VLT® 5000 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

www.danfoss.com/drives

VLT® 5000
MG51A902

*MG51A902*
175R0786 MG51A902 Rev. 2006-02-09
 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Contents

Safety ...................................................................................................................... 3
Safety regulations ..................................................................................................... 4
Warning against unintended start ............................................................................. 4
Installation of mechanical brake ................................................................................ 4

Quick Setup ......................................................................................................... 6

Introduction ......................................................................................................... 9
Available literature ..................................................................................................... 9

Technical data .................................................................................................. 10

General technical data ............................................................................................ 10
Electrical data ......................................................................................................... 17
Fuses ..................................................................................................................... 34
Mechanical dimensions .......................................................................................... 37

Installation ......................................................................................................... 40
Mechanical installation ............................................................................................ 40
Safety earthing ....................................................................................................... 43
Extra protection (RCD) ............................................................................................ 43
Electrical installation - mains supply ....................................................................... 43
Electrical installation - motor cables ....................................................................... 43
Connection of motor .............................................................................................. 44
Direction of motor rotation ...................................................................................... 44
Electrical installation - brake cable ......................................................................... 45
Electrical installation - brake resistor temperature switch ........................................ 45
Electrical installation - loadsharing ......................................................................... 45
Electrical installation - 24 Volt external DC supply ................................................... 47
Electrical installation - relay outputs ....................................................................... 47
Electrical installation - control cables ...................................................................... 55
Electrical installation - bus connection ................................................................... 57
Electrical installation - EMC precautions ................................................................. 58
Use of emc-correct cables ..................................................................................... 61
Electrical installation - earthing of control cables ..................................................... 62
RFI switch .............................................................................................................. 63

Operation of the frequency converter .................................................. 66

Control panel (LCP) ................................................................................................ 66
Control panel - display ............................................................................................ 66
Control panel - LEDs .............................................................................................. 66
Control panel - control keys .................................................................................... 66
Quick Setup ........................................................................................................... 69
Parameter selection ................................................................................................ 70
Menu mode ............................................................................................................ 70
Initialisation to factory setting .................................................................................. 71

Application configuration .......................................................................... 74

Connection examples ............................................................................................. 74
Setting of parameters ............................................................................................. 76

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1

 VLT® 5000 Series

Special functions ............................................................................................ 79

Local and remote control ........................................................................................ 79
Control with brake function ..................................................................................... 80
References - single references ................................................................................ 81
References - multi-references ................................................................................. 83
Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA ......................................................................... 86
Mechanical brake control ....................................................................................... 88
PID for process control ........................................................................................... 90
PID for speed control ............................................................................................. 91
Quick discharge ..................................................................................................... 92
Flying start .............................................................................................................. 94
Normal/high overload torque control,open loop ...................................................... 95
Programming of Torque limit and stop ................................................................... 95

Programming .................................................................................................... 97
Parameters - Operation and Display ...................................................................... 97
Parameters - Load and motor .............................................................................. 103
Parameters - References and limits ..................................................................... 114
Parameters - Inputs and outputs .......................................................................... 122
Parameters - Special functions ............................................................................. 138
Parameters - Serial communication ..................................................................... 152
Parameters - Technical functions and diagnostics ................................................ 158

Miscellaneous ................................................................................................ 164

Trouble-shooting .................................................................................................. 164
Display - Status messages ................................................................................... 165
Warnings and alarms ............................................................................................ 168
Warnings .............................................................................................................. 169

Index .................................................................................................................... 187

2 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

175ZA438.18
VLT 5000 Series

Safety
Operating Instructions
Software version: 3.7x

These Operating Instructions can be used for all VLT 5000 Se-
ries frequency converters with software version 3.7x.
The software version number can be seen from parameter 624.
CE and C-tick labelling do not cover VLT 5001-5062,
525-600 V units.

These Operating Instructions are a tool intended for persons who are to install, operate and program the
VLT 5000 Series.

Operating Instructions: Gives instructions in optimum installation, commissioning and service.

Design Guide: Gives all required information for design purposes, and gives a good
insight into the technology, product range, technical data, etc.

The Operating Instructions including Quick Setup are delivered with the unit.
When reading these Operating Instructions, you will come across different symbols that require special
attention.
The symbols used are the following:

Indicates a general warning

Indicates a high-voltage warning

NB!:
Indicates something to be noted by the reader

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 3

 VLT® 5000 Series

The voltage of the frequency converter

is dangerous whenever the equipment ■ Warning against unintended start
is connected to mains. Incorrect 1. The motor can be brought to a stop by
installation of the motor or the frequency converter means of digital commands, bus commands,
may cause damage to the equipment, serious references or a local stop, while the frequency
personal injury or death. converter is connected to mains.
Consequently, the instructions in this manual, If personal safety considerations make it necessary
as well as national and local rules and safety to ensure that no unintended start occurs, these
regulations, must be complied with. stop functions are not sufficient.
2. While parameters are being changed, the
■ Safety regulations motor may start. Consequently, the stop key
1. The frequency converter must be disconnected [STOP/RESET] must always be activated, following
from mains if repair work is to be carried out. Check which data can be modified.
that the mains supply has been disconnected 3. A motor that has been stopped may start if faults
and that the necessary time has passed before occur in the electronics of the frequency converter,
removing motor and mains plugs. or if a temporary overload or a fault in the supply
2. The [STOP/RESET] key on the control panel of mains or the motor connection ceases.
the frequency converter does not disconnect
the equipment from mains and is thus not to ■ Installation of mechanical brake
be used as a safety switch. Do not connect a mechanical brake to the output
3. Correct protective earthing of the equipment from the frequency converter before the relevant
must be established, the user must be protected parameters for brake control are parameterised.
against supply voltage, and the motor must be
protected against overload in accordance with (Selection of output in parameter 319, 321,
applicable national and local regulations. 323 or 326 and cut-in current and frequency
4. The earth leakage currents are higher than 3.5 mA. in parameter 223 and 225).
5. Protection against motor overload is not included ■ Use on isolated mains
in the factory setting. If this function is desired, See section RFI Switch regarding use on isolated mains.
set parameter 128 to data value ETR trip or
data value ETR warning. It is important to follow the recommendations regarding
Note: The function is initialised at 1.16 x rated installation on IT-mains, since sufficient protection
motor current and rated motor frequency. For of the complete installation must be observed.
the North American market: The ETR functions Not taking care using relevant monitoring devices
provide class 20 motor overload protection for IT-mains may result in damage.
in accordance with NEC.
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and main
supply while the frequency converter is connected
to mains. Check that the mains supply has been
disconnected and that the necessary time has
expired before removing motor and mains plugs.
7. Please note that the frequency converter has more
voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3, when loadsharing
(linking of DC intermediate circuit) and external 24 V
DC have been installed. Check that all voltage inputs
have been disconnected and that the necessary
time has passed before repair work is commenced.

4 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

175ZA439.21
Warning:
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the equipment has
been disconnected from mains.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as
external 24 V DC, load-sharing (linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well

Safety
as the motor connection for kinetic back-up.
Using VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V: wait at least 4 minutes
Using VLT 5008-5052, 200-240 V: wait at least 15 minutes
Using VLT 5001-5006, 380-500 V: wait at least 4 minutes
Using VLT 5008-5062, 380-500 V: wait at least 15 minutes
Using VLT 5072-5302, 380-500 V: wait at least 20 minutes
Using VLT 5352-5552, 380-500 V: wait at least 40 minutes
Using VLT 5001-5005, 525-600 V: wait at least 4 minutes
Using VLT 5006-5022, 525-600 V: wait at least 15 minutes
Using VLT 5027-5062, 525-600 V: wait at least 30 minutes
Using VLT 5042-5352, 525-690 V: wait at least 20 minutes
Using VLT 5402-5602, 525-690 V: wait at least 30 minutes

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Introduction to Quick Setup

This Quick Setup will guide you through EMC correct
installation of the frequency converter by connecting
power, motor and control wiring (fig. 1). Start/stop
of motor is to be done with the switch.
For VLT 5122 - 5552 380 - 500 V, VLT 5032 - 5052
200 - 240 V AC and VLT 5042-5602, 525-690 V,
please refer to Technical data and Installation regarding
mechanical and electrical installation.

Fig. 1

■ 1. Mechanical Installation

VLT 5000 frequency converters allow side-by-side mounting. The necessary cooling demands a free air
passage of 100 mm above and below the frequency converter (5016-5062 380-500 V, 5008-5027 200-240
V and 5016-5062 525-600 V must have 200 mm, 5072-5102, 380-500 V 225 mm).
Drill all holes by using the measurements stated in the table. Please note the difference in unit voltage. Place
the frequency converter on the wall. Tighten up all four screws.
All the below listed measurements are in mm

VLT type A B C a b
Bookstyle IP 20, 200–240 V, (Fig. 2)
5001 - 5003 395 90 260 384 70
5004 - 5006 395 130 260 384 70
Bookstyle IP 20, 380–500 V (Fig. 2)
5001 - 5005 395 90 260 384 70
5006 - 5011 395 130 260 384 70
Compact IP 54, 200–240 V (Fig. 3)
5001 - 5003 460 282 195 260 258
5004 - 5006 530 282 195 330 258
5008 - 5011 810 350 280 560 326
5016 - 5027 940 400 280 690 375
Compact IP 54, 380–500 V (Fig. 3) Fig. 2
5001 - 5005 460 282 195 260 258
5006 - 5011 530 282 195 330 258
5016 - 5027 810 350 280 560 326
5032 - 5062 940 400 280 690 375
5072 - 5102 940 400 360 690 375
Compact IP 20, 200–240 V (Fig. 4)
5001 - 5003 395 220 160 384 200
5004 - 5006 395 220 200 384 200
5008 560 242 260 540 200
5011 - 5016 700 242 260 680 200
5022 - 5027 800 308 296 780 270 Fig. 3
Compact IP 20, 380–500 V (Fig. 4)
5001 - 5005 395 220 160 384 200
5006 - 5011 395 220 200 384 200
5016 - 5022 560 242 260 540 200
5027 - 5032 700 242 260 680 200
5042 - 5062 800 308 296 780 270
5072 - 5102 800 370 335 780 330

Fig. 4

6 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ 2. Electrical Installation, power

NOTE: The terminals are detachable on VLT 5001 - 5006, 200 - 240 V, VLT 5001 - 5011, 380 - 500 V and
VLT 5001 - 5011, 525 - 600 V
Connect the mains supply to the mains terminals L1, L2, L3 of the frequency converter and to the earth
connection (fig. 5-8). Cable relief fitting is placed on the wall for Bookstyle units. Mount screened motor
cable to the motor terminals U, V, W, PE of the frequency converter. Make sure, the screen is connected
electrically to the drive.

Setup
Quick
Fig. 5 Fig. 7
Bookstyle IP 20 Compact IP 20
5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V 5016 - 5102 380 - 500 V
5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V 5008 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5016 - 5062 525 - 600 V

Fig. 8
Compact IP 54
Fig. 6 5016 - 5062 380 - 500 V
Compact IP 20 and IP 54 5008 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
5001 - 5011 525 - 600 V

Fig. 9
Compact IP 54
5072 - 5102 380 - 500 V

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ 3. Electrical installation, control leads

Use a screw driver to remove the front cover
under the control panel.
NOTE: The terminals are detachable. Connect a
jumber between terminals 12 and 27 (Fig. 10)

Mount screened cable to external start/stop of

control terminals 12 and 18.

Fig. 10

■ 4. Programming Set frequency interval and ramp times (Fig. 11)

The frequency converter is programmed over
the control panel. Min. reference Parameter 204
Max. reference Parameter 205
Press the QUICK MENU button. The Quick Menu Ramp up time Parameter 207
appears in the display. You choose parameters by Ramp down time Parameter 208
means of arrow up and arrow down. Press the
CHANGE DATA button to change parameter value.
Set Operation site, Parameter 002 for Local.
Data values are changed using the up and down
arrows. Press the left or right buttons to move the
cursor. Press OK to save your parameter setting.

Set the desired language in parameter 001. You

have six possibilities: English, German, French,
Danish, Spanish and Italian.

Set the motor parameters according to the motorplate:

Motor power Parameter 102

Motor voltage Parameter 103
Motor frequency Parameter 104
Motor current Parameter 105
Rated motor speed Parameter 106

Fig. 11

■ 5. Motor Start
Select total or reduced Automatic Motor Adaption
Press the START button to start the motor. Set motor
(AMA) in Parameter 107. For further description of
speed in Parameter 003. Check if the direction of
AMA, see section Automatic Motor Adaption, AMA.
rotations is as shown in the display. It can be changed
by swapping two phases of the motor cable. Press the START button to start the Automatic
Motor Adaption (AMA).
Press the STOP button to stop the motor.
Press the DISPLAY/STATUS button to leave
the Quick Menu.

8 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Available literature
Below is a list of the literature available for VLT
5000. It must be noted that there may be deviations
from one country to another.

Supplied with the unit:

Operating instructions ....................................................................................................................... MG.51.AX.YY
High Power Installation Guide ............................................................................................................. MI.90.JX.YY

Communication with VLT 5000:

VLT 5000 Profibus manual ................................................................................................................ MG.10.EX.YY
VLT 5000 DeviceNet manual ............................................................................................................. MG.50.HX.YY
VLT 5000 LonWorks manual ............................................................................................................ MG.50.MX.YY
VLT 5000 Modbus manual ............................................................................................................... MG.10.MX.YY
VLT 5000 Interbus manual ................................................................................................................ MG.10.OX.YY

Application options for VLT 5000:

VLT 5000 SyncPos option manual .................................................................................................... MG.10.EX.YY
VLT 5000 Positioning controller manual ............................................................................................. MG.50.PX.YY
VLT 5000 Synchronising controller manual ........................................................................................ MG.10.NX.YY
Ring spinning option ............................................................................................................................ MI.50.ZX.02
Wobble function option ........................................................................................................................ MI.50.JX.02
Winder and Tension control option .................................................................................................... MG.50.KX.02

Instructions for VLT 5000:

Loadsharing ........................................................................................................................................ MI.50.NX.02

Introduction
VLT 5000 Brake resistors .................................................................................................................... MI.90.FX.YY
Brake resistors for horizontal applications (VLT 5001 - 5011) (Only in English and German) ................. MI.50.SX.YY
LC filter modules ................................................................................................................................. MI.56.DX.YY
Converter for encoder inputs (5V TTL to 24 V DC) (Only in combined English/German) ......................... MI.50.IX.51
Back Plate to VLT 5000 Series ........................................................................................................... MN.50.XX.02

Various literature for VLT 5000:

Design Guide .................................................................................................................................... MG.51.BX.YY
Incorporating a VLT 5000 Profibus in a Simatic S5 system ................................................................ MC.50.CX.02
Incorporating a VLT 5000 Profibus in a Simatic S7 system ................................................................. MC.50.AX.02
Hoist and the VLT 5000 series ........................................................................................................... MN.50.RX.02

Miscellaneous (only in English):

Protection against electrical hazards ................................................................................................. MN.90.GX.02
Choice of prefuses ............................................................................................................................ MN.50.OX.02
VLT on IT mains ................................................................................................................................ MN.90.CX.02
Filtering of harmonic currents ............................................................................................................. MN.90.FX.02
Handling aggressive environments ...................................................................................................... MN.90.IX.02
CI-TITM contactors - VLT® frequency converters ................................................................................. MN.90.KX.02
VLT® frequency converters and UniOP operator panels .................................................................... MN.90.HX.02

X = version number
YY = language version

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 9

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ General technical data

Mains supply (L1, L2, L3):

Supply voltage 200-240 V units ........................................................................ 3 x 200/208/220/230/240 V ±10%
Supply voltage 380-500 V units ................................................................ 3 x 380/400/415/440/460/500 V ±10%
Supply voltage 525-600 V units ............................................................................... 3 x 525/550/575/600 V ±10%
Supply voltage 525-690 V units ........................................................................ 3 x 525/550/575/600/690 V ±10%
Supply frequency ........................................................................................................................ 48-62 Hz +/- 1 %
See the section on special conditions in the Design Guide

Max imbalance of supply voltage:

VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V and 525-600 V and VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V .......... ±2.0% of rated supply voltage
VLT 5016-5062, 380-500 V and 525-600 V and VLT 5008-5027, 200-240 V .......... ±1.5% of rated supply voltage
VLT 5072-5552, 380-500 V and VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V .................................. ±3.0% of rated supply voltage
VLT 5042-5602, 525-690 V ..................................................................................... ±3.0% of rated supply voltage
True Power factor (λ) ...................................................................................................... 0.90 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor (cos ϕ) ............................................................................................. near unity (>0.98)
No. of switchings on supply input L1, L2, L3 .......................................................................... approx. 1 time/min.
See the section on special conditions in the Design Guide

VLT output data (U, V, W):

Output voltage ................................................................................................................ 0-100% of supply voltage
Output frequency VLT 5001-5027, 200-240 V ...................................................................... 0-132 Hz, 0-1000 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V ........................................................................ 0-132 Hz, 0-450 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5001-5052, 380-500 V ...................................................................... 0-132 Hz, 0-1000 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5062-5302, 380-500 V ........................................................................ 0-132 Hz, 0-450 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5352-5552, 380-500 V ........................................................................ 0-132 Hz, 0-300 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5001-5011, 525-600 V ........................................................................ 0-132 Hz, 0-700 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5016-5052, 525-600 V ...................................................................... 0-132 Hz, 0-1000 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5062, 525-600 V .................................................................................. 0-132 Hz, 0-450 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5042-5302, 525-690 V ........................................................................ 0-132 Hz, 0-200 Hz
Output frequency VLT 5352-5602, 525-690 V ........................................................................ 0-132 Hz, 0-150 Hz
Rated motor voltage, 200-240 V units .............................................................................. 200/208/220/230/240 V
Rated motor voltage, 380-500 V units ............................................................... 380/400/415/440/460/480/500 V
Rated motor voltage, 525-600 V units ............................................................................................ 525/550/575 V
Rated motor voltage, 525-690 V units ..................................................................................... 525/550/575/690 V
Rated motor frequency ............................................................................................................................ 50/60 Hz
Switching on output ................................................................................................................................. Unlimited
Ramp times .................................................................................................................................... 0.05-3600 sec.

Torque characteristics:
Starting torque, VLT 5001-5027, 200-240 V and VLT 5001-5552, 380-500 V ................................ 160% for 1 min.
Starting torque, VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V .................................................................................. 150% for 1 min.
Starting torque, VLT 5001-5062, 525-600 V .................................................................................. 160% for 1 min.
Starting torque, VLT 5042-5602, 525-690 V .................................................................................. 160% for 1 min.
Starting torque ............................................................................................................................ 180% for 0.5 sec.
Acceleration torque ....................................................................................................................................... 100%
Overload torque, VLT 5001-5027, 200-240 V and VLT 5001-5552, 380-500 V,
VLT 5001-5062, 525-600 V, and VLT 5042-5602, 525-690 V ....................................................................... 160%
Overload torque, VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V ............................................................................................... 150%
Arresting torque at 0 rpm (closed loop) ......................................................................................................... 100%
The torque characteristics given are for the frequency converter at the high overload torque level
(160%). At the normal overload torque (110%), the values are lower.

10 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Braking at high overload torque level

Cycle time (s) Braking duty cycle at 100% torque Braking duty cycle at over
torque (150/160%)
200-240 V
5001-5027 120 Continuous 40%
5032-5052 300 10% 10%
380-500 V
5001-5102 120 Continuous 40%
5122-5252 600 Continuous 10%
5302 600 40% 10%
5352-5552 600 40%1) 10%2)
525-600 V
5001-5062 120 Continuous 40%
525-690 V
5042-5352 600 40% 10%
5402-5602 600 40%3) 10%4)

1) VLT 5502 at 90% torque. At 100% torque the braking duty cycle is 13%. At mains rating 441-500 V 100% torque the braking duty
cycle is 17%.
VLT 5552 at 80% torque. At 100% torque the braking duty cycle is 8%.
2) Based on 300 second cycle:
For VLT 5502 the torque is 145%.
For VLT 5552 the torque is 130%.
3) VLT 5502 at 80% torque.
VLT 5602 at 71% torque.
4) Based on 300 second cycle.
For VLT 5502 the torque is 128%.
For VLT 5602 the torque is 114%.

Control card, digital inputs:

Number of programmable digital inputs ................................................................................................................ 8
Terminal nos. ............................................................................................................ 16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33
Voltage level ........................................................................................................... 0-24 V DC (PNP positive logics)
Voltage level, logical ’0’ ............................................................................................................................ < 5 V DC
Voltage level, logical ’1’ ........................................................................................................................... >10 V DC
Maximum voltage on input ........................................................................................................................ 28 V DC
Input resistance, Ri ........................................................................................................................................ 2 k
Scanning time per input ............................................................................................................................. 3 msec.
Reliable galvanic isolation: All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV). In addition,
the digital inputs can be isolated from the other terminals on the control card by connecting an external 24
Technical

V DC supply and opening switch 4. VLT 5001-5062, 525-600 V do not meet PELV.
data

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 11

 VLT® 5000 Series

Control card, analogue inputs:

No. of programmable analogue voltage inputs/thermistor inputs .......................................................................... 2
Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 53, 54
Voltage level ........................................................................................................................ 0 - ±10 V DC (scalable)
Input resistance, Ri ...................................................................................................................................... 10 k
No. of programmable analogue current inputs ..................................................................................................... 1
Terminal no. ........................................................................................................................................................ 60
Current range .................................................................................................................... 0/4 - ±20 mA (scalable)
Input resistance, Ri ...................................................................................................................................... 200
Resolution .......................................................................................................................................... 10 bit + sign
Accuracy on input .......................................................................................................... Max. error 1% of full scale
Scanning time per input ............................................................................................................................. 3 msec.
Terminal no. ground ............................................................................................................................................ 55
Reliable galvanic isolation: All analogue inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage
(PELV)* as well as other inputs and outputs.
* VLT 5001-5062, 525-600 V do not meet PELV.

Control card, pulse/encoder input:

No. of programmable pulse/encoder inputs .......................................................................................................... 4
Terminal nos. .................................................................................................................................... 17, 29, 32, 33
Max. frequency on terminal 17 ...................................................................................................................... 5 kHz
Max. frequency on terminals 29, 32, 33 ...................................................................... 20 kHz (PNP open collector)
Max. frequency on terminals 29, 32, 33 ..................................................................................... 65 kHz (Push-pull)
Voltage level ........................................................................................................... 0-24 V DC (PNP positive logics)
Voltage level, logical ’0’ ............................................................................................................................ < 5 V DC
Voltage level, logical ’1’ ........................................................................................................................... >10 V DC
Maximum voltage on input ........................................................................................................................ 28 V DC
Input resistance, Ri ........................................................................................................................................ 2 k
Scanning time per input ............................................................................................................................. 3 msec.
Resolution .......................................................................................................................................... 10 bit + sign
Accuracy (100-1 kHz), terminals 17, 29, 33 ............................................................... Max. error: 0.5% of full scale
Accuracy (1-5 kHz), terminal 17 ................................................................................. Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Accuracy (1-65 kHz), terminals 29, 33 ....................................................................... Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Reliable galvanic isolation: All pulse/encoder inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage
(PELV)*. In addition, pulse and encoder inputs can be isolated from the other terminals on the control
card by connecting an external 24 V DC supply and opening switch 4.
* VLT 5001-5062, 525-600 V do not meet PELV.

Control card, digital/pulse and analogue outputs:

No. of programmable digital and analogue outputs .............................................................................................. 2
Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 42, 45
Voltage level at digital/pulse output ...................................................................................................... 0 - 24 V DC
Minimum load to ground (terminal 39) at digital/pulse output ....................................................................... 600
Frequency ranges (digital output used as pulse output) ............................................................................ 0-32 kHz
Current range at analogue output ........................................................................................................ 0/4 - 20 mA
Maximum load to ground (terminal 39) at analogue output ........................................................................... 500
Accuracy of analogue output ..................................................................................... Max. error: 1.5% of full scale
Resolution on analogue output. ....................................................................................................................... 8 bit
Reliable galvanic isolation: All digital and analogue outputs are galvanically isolated from the
supply voltage (PELV)*, as well as other inputs and outputs.
* VLT 5001-5062, 525-600 V do not meet PELV.

12 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Control card, 24 V DC supply:

Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 12, 13
Max. load (short-circuit protection) ............................................................................................................. 200 mA
Terminal nos. ground .................................................................................................................................... 20, 39
Reliable galvanic isolation: The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage
(PELV)*, but has the same potential as the analogue outputs.
* VLT 5001-5062, 525-600 V do not meet PELV.

Control card, RS 485 serial communication:

Terminal nos. .............................................................................................................. 68 (TX+, RX+), 69 (TX-, RX-)
Reliable galvanic isolation: Full galvanic isolation.

Relay outputs:1)
No. of programmable relay outputs ...................................................................................................................... 2
Terminal nos., control card (resistive load only) ....................................................................................... 4-5 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC1) on 4-5, control card ........................................................................ 50 V AC, 1 A, 50 VA
Max. terminal load (DC1 (IEC 947)) on 4-5, control card ................................. 25 V DC, 2 A / 50 V DC, 1 A, 50 W
Max. terminal load (DC1) on 4-5, control card for UL/cUL applications .................... 30 V AC, 1 A / 42.5 V DC, 1A
Terminal nos., power card (resistive and inductive load) ...................................................... 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC1) on 1-3, 1-2, power card ............................................................. 250 V AC, 2 A, 500 VA
Max. terminal load (DC1 (IEC 947)) on 1-3, 1-2, power card ............................. 25 V DC, 2 A / 50 V DC, 1A, 50 W
Min. terminal load (AC/DC) on 1-3, 1-2, power card ....................................... 24 V DC, 10 mA / 24 V AC, 100 mA

1) Rated values for up to 300,000 operations.

At inductive loads the number of operations are reduced by 50%, alternatively the current can be reduced by
50%, thus the 300,000 operations are maintained.

Brake resistor terminals (only SB, EB, DE and PB units):

Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 81, 82

External 24 Volt DC supply:

Terminal nos. ................................................................................................................................................ 35, 36
Voltage range ....................................................................................... 24 V DC ±15% (max. 37 V DC for 10 sec.)
Max. voltage ripple ..................................................................................................................................... 2 V DC
Power consumption .............................................................................. 15 W - 50 W (50 W for start-up, 20 msec.)
Technical
Min. pre-fuse ............................................................................................................................................... 6 Amp
data

Reliable galvanic isolation: Full galvanic isolation if the external 24 V DC supply is also of the PELV type.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 13

 VLT® 5000 Series

Cable lengths, cross-sections and connectors:

Max. motor cable length, screened cable ..................................................................................................... 150 m
Max. motor cable length, unscreened cable ................................................................................................. 300 m
Max. motor cable length, screened cable VLT 5011 380-500 V .................................................................... 100 m
Max. motor cable length, screened cable VLT 5011 525-600 V
and VLT 5008, normal overload mode, 525-600 V .......................................................................................... 50 m
Max. brake cable length, screened cable ........................................................................................................ 20 m
Max. loadsharing cable length, screened cable ..................................... 25 m from frequency converter to DC bar.
Max. cable cross-section for motor, brake and loadsharing, see Electrical data
Max. cable cross-section for 24 V external DC supply
- VLT 5001-5027 200-240 V; VLT 5001-5102 380-500 V; VLT 5001-5062 525-600 V ................. 4 mm2 /10 AWG
- VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V; VLT 5122-5552 380-500 V; VLT 5042-5602 525-690 V .............. 2.5 mm2 /12 AWG
Max. cross-section for control cables ....................................................................................... 1.5 mm 2 /16 AWG
Max. cross-section for serial communication ............................................................................ 1.5 mm2 /16 AWG
If UL/cUL is to be complied with, copper cable with temperature class 60/75°C must be used
(VLT 5001 - 5062 380 - 500 V, 525 - 600 V and VLT 5001 - 5027 200 - 240 V).
If UL/cUL is to be complied with, copper cable with temperature class 75°C must be used
(VLT 5072 - 5552 380 - 500 V, VLT 5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V, VLT 5042 - 5602 525 - 690 V).
Connectors are for use of both copper and aluminium cables, unless other is specified.

Accuracy of display readout (parameters 009-012):

Motor current [6] 0-140% load ............................................................... Max. error: ±2.0% of rated output current
Torque % [7], -100 - 140% load ...................................................................... Max. error: ±5% of rated motor size
Output [8], power HP [9], 0-90% load ................................................................... Max. error: ±5% of rated output

Control characteristics:
Frequency range .................................................................................................................................. 0 - 1000 Hz
Resolution on output frequency ............................................................................................................. ±0.003 Hz
System response time ............................................................................................................................... 3 msec.
Speed, control range (open loop) ..................................................................................... 1:100 of synchro. speed
Speed, control range (closed loop) ................................................................................. 1:1000 of synchro. speed
Speed, accuracy (open loop) ............................................................................ < 1500 rpm: max. error ± 7.5 rpm
..................................................................................................... >1500 rpm: max. error of 0.5% of actual speed
Speed, accuracy (closed loop) .......................................................................... < 1500 rpm: max. error ± 1.5 rpm
..................................................................................................... >1500 rpm: max. error of 0.1% of actual speed
Torque control accuracy (open loop) ................................................ 0- 150 rpm: max. error ±20% of rated torque
................................................................................................... 150-1500 rpm: max. error ±10% of rated torque
........................................................................................................ >1500 rpm: max. error ±20% of rated torque
Torque control accuracy (speed feedback) ............................................................. Max. error ±5% of rated torque
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor

Externals:
Enclosure (dependent on power size) ................................................................ IP 00, IP 20, IP 21, Nema 1, IP 54
Vibration test .................................. 0.7 g RMS 18-1000 Hz random. 3 directions for 2 hours (IEC 68-2-34/35/36)
Max. relative humidity ................................................................................ 93 % (IEC 68-2-3) for storage/transport
Max. relative humidity ............................................... 95 % non condensing (IEC 721-3-3; class 3K3) for operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 721 - 3 - 3) ................................................................................ Uncoated class 3C2
Aggressive environment (IEC 721 - 3 - 3) .................................................................................... Coated class 3C3
Ambient temperature IP 20/Nema 1 (high overload torque 160%) .......... Max. 45°C (24-hour average max. 40°C)
Ambient temperature IP 20/Nema 1 (normal overload torque 110%) ....... Max. 40°C (24-hour average max. 35°C)
Ambient temperature IP 54 (high overload torque 160%) ....................... Max. 40°C (24-hour average max. 35°C)
Ambient temperature IP 54 (normal overload torque 110%) .................... Max. 40°C (24-hour average max. 35°C)
Ambient temperature IP 20/54 VLT 5011 500 V ..................................... Max. 40°C (24-hour average max. 35°C)

14 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Ambient temperature IP 54 VLT 5042-5602, 525-690 V; and 5122-5552, 380-500 V (high overload torque
160%) ..................................................................................................... Max. 45°C (24-hour average max. 40°C)
Derating for high ambient temperature, see the Design Guide
Min. ambient temperature in full operation ........................................................................................................ 0°C
Min. ambient temperature at reduced performance ..................................................................................... -10°C
Temperature during storage/transport ............................................................................................. -25 - +65/70°C
Max. altitude above sea level ...................................................................................................................... 1000 m
Derating for altitude over 1000 m above sealevel, see the Design Guide
EMC standards applied, Emission ..................................... EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61800-3, EN 55011
EMC standards applied, Immunity .......................... EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6, VDE 0160/1990.12
See section on special conditions in the Design Guide
VLT 5001-5062, 525 - 600 V do not comply with EMC or Low Voltage Directives.
IP54 units are not intended for direct outdoor installation. The IP54 rating does not relate to other
exposures as sun, icing, wind blown driving rain. Under such circumstances Danfoss recommends to
install the units in an enclosure designed for these environmental conditions. Alternatively, an installation
at minimum 0.5 m above surface and covered by a shed is recommended

Technical
data

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 15

 VLT® 5000 Series

VLT 5000 Series protection:

• Electronic motor thermal protection against overload.

• Temperature monitoring of heat-sink ensures that the frequency converter cuts out if the temperature reaches 90°C
for IP 00, IP 20 and Nema 1. For IP 54, the cut-out temperature is 80°C. An overtemperature can only be reset when
the temperature of the heat-sink has fallen below 60°C.

For the units mentioned below, the limits are as follows:

- VLT 5122, 380-500 V, cuts out at 75°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 60°C.
- VLT 5152, 380-500 V, cuts out at 80°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 60°C.
- VLT 5202, 380-500 V, cuts out at 95°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 65°C.
- VLT 5252, 380-500 V, cuts out at 95°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 65°C.
- VLT 5302, 380-500 V, cuts out at 105°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 75°C.
- VLT 5352-5552, 380-500 V, cut out at 85°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 60°C.
- VLT 5042-5122, 525-690 V, cut out at 75°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 60°C.
- VLT 5152, 525-690 V, cuts out at 80°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 60°C.
- VLT 5202-5352, 525-690 V, cut out at 100°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 70°C.
- VLT 5402-5602, 525-690 V, cut out at 75°C and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 60°C.

• The frequency converter is protected against short-circuiting on motor terminals U, V, W.

• The frequency converter is protected against earth fault on motor terminals U, V, W.

• Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures that the frequency converter cuts out if the intermediate circuit voltage becomes
too high or too low.

• If a motor phase is missing, the frequency converter cuts out, see parameter 234 Motor phase monitor.

• If there is a mains fault, the frequency converter is able to carry out a controlled decelleration.

• If a mains phase is missing, the frequency converter will cut out when a load is placed on the motor.

16 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical data

■ Bookstyle and Compact, Mains supply

3 x 200 - 240 V
According to international requirements VLT type 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006
Output current IVLT,N [A] 3.7 5.4 7.8 10.6 12.5 15.2
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] 5.9 8.6 12.5 17 20 24.3
Output (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 1.5 2.2 3.2 4.4 5.2 6.3
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 1 1.5 2 3 4 5

Max. cable cross-section to motor,

4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm 2 ]/[AWG]2 )

Rated input current (200 V)IL,N [A] 3.4 4.8 7.1 9.5 11.5 14.5
Max. cable
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
cross-section power [mm2 ]/[AWG] 2 )
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 16/10 16/10 16/15 25/20 25/25 35/30
Efficiency3) 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
Weight IP 20 EB
[kg] 7 7 7 9 9 9.5
Bookstyle
Weight IP 20 EB Compact [kg] 8 8 8 10 10 10
Weight IP 54 Compact [kg] 11.5 11.5 11.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
Power loss at
[W] 58 76 95 126 172 194
max. load.
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54 IP54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

Technical
data

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 17

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5008 5011 5016 5022 5027
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] 32 46 61.2 73 88
IVLT, MAX (60
35.2 50.6 67.3 80.3 96.8
s) [A]
Output (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 13.3 19.1 25.4 30.3 36.6
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 10 15 20 25 30

High overload torque (160 %):

Output current IVLT,N [A] 25 32 46 61.2 73
IVLT, MAX (60
40 51.2 73.6 97.9 116.8
s) [A]
Output (240 V) SVLT,N [kVA] 10 13 19 25 30
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 7.5 10 15 20 25
Max. cable cross-section to motor, IP 54 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0
brake and loadsharing [mm2 /AWG]2)5) IP 20 16/6 35/2 35/2 35/2 50/0
Min. cable cross-section to motor, brake
10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 16/6
and loadsharing4) [mm2 /AWG]2)

Rated input current (200 V) IL,N [A] 32 46 61 73 88

Max. cable cross-section, IP 54 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2 50/0
power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)5) IP 20 16/6 35/2 35/2 35/2 50/0
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 50 60 80 125 125
Efficiency3) 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 21 25 27 34 36
Weight IP 54 [kg] 38 40 53 55 56
Power loss at max. load.
- high overload torque [W]
340 426 626 833 994
(160 %)
- normal overload torque [W]
426 545 783 1042 1243
(110 %)
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to comply
with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of a AI-Cu connector.

18 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5032 5042 5052
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (200-230 V) 115 143 170
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (200-230 V) 127 158 187
IVLT,N [A] (231-240 V) 104 130 154
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (231-240 V) 115 143 170
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (208 V) 41 52 61
SVLT,N [kVA] (230 V) 46 57 68
SVLT,N [kVA] (240 V) 43 54 64
Typical shaft output [HP] (208 V) 40 50 60
Typical shaft output [kW] (230 V) 30 37 45
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (200-230 V) 88 115 143
IVLT, MAX [A] (200-230 V) 132 173 215
IVLT,N [A] (231-240 V) 80 104 130
IVLT, MAX [A] (231-240 V) 120 285 195
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (208 V) 32 41 52
SVLT,N [kVA] (230 V) 35 46 57
SVLT,N [kVA] (240 V) 33 43 54
Typical shaft output [HP] (208 V) 30 40 50
[kW] (230 V) 22 30 37
Max. cable cross-section to motor [mm2 ]4,6 120
and loadsharing [AWG]2,4,6 300 mcm
[mm2 ]4,6 25
Max. cable cross-section to brake
[AWG]2,4,6 4
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (230 V) 101.3 126.6 149.9
Normal overload torque (150 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (230 V) 77,9 101,3 126,6
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 120
power supply [AWG]2,4,6 300 mcm
Min. cable cross-section to motor, [mm2]4,6 6
power [AWG]2,4,6 8
supply, brake and loadsharing
Max. pre-fuses (mains) [-]/UL [A]1 150/150 200/200 250/250
Efficiency3 0,96-0,97
Power loss Normal overload [W] 1089 1361 1612
High overload [W] 838 1089 1361
Weight IP 00 [kg] 101 101 101
Weight IP 20 Nema1 [kg] 101 101 101
Weight IP 54 Nema12 [kg] 104 104 104
Enclosure IP 00 / Nema 1 (IP 20) / IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
Technical

4. Max. cable cross-section is the maximum possible cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on
data

the terminals. Min. cable cross-section is the minimum allowed cross-section. Always comply
with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Weight without shipping container.
6. Connection stud: M8 Brake: M6.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 19

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Bookstyle and Compact, Mains supply

3 x 380 - 500 V
According to international requirements VLT type 5001 5002 5003 5004
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 2.2 2.8 4.1 5.6
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 3.5 4.5 6.5 9
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 1.9 2.6 3.4 4.8
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 3 4.2 5.5 7.7
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 1.7 2.1 3.1 4.3
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 1.6 2.3 2.9 4.2
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 1 1.5 2 3
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2 )

Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 2.3 2.6 3.8 5.3
IL,N [A] (460 V) 1.9 2.5 3.4 4.8
Max. cable cross-section, power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 16/6 16/6 16/10 16/10
Efficiency 3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB Bookstyle [kg] 7 7 7 7.5
Weight IP 20 EB Compact [kg] 8 8 8 8.5
Weight IP 54 Compact [kg] 11.5 11.5 11.5 12
Power loss at max. load [W] 55 67 92 110
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

20 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Bookstyle and Compact, Mains supply

3 x 380 - 500 V
According to international requirements VLT type 5005 5006 5008 5011
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 7.2 10 13 16
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 11.5 16 20.8 25.6
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 6.3 8.2 11 14.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 10.1 13.1 17.6 23.2
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 5.5 7.6 9.9 12.2
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 5.5 7.1 9.5 12.6
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 4 5 7.5 10
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2 )

Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 7 9.1 12.2 15.0

IL,N [A] (460 V) 6 8.3 10.6 14.0
Max. cable cross-section power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 16/15 25/20 25/25 35/30
Efficiency 3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB Bookstyle [kg] 7.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
Weight IP 20 EB Compact [kg] 8.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Weight IP 54 EB Compact [kg] 12 14 14 14
Power loss at max. [W]
139 198 250 295
load.
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

Technical
data

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 21

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5016 5022 5027
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 32 37.5 44
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 35.2 41.3 48.4
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 27.9 34 41.4
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 30.7 37.4 45.5
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 24.4 28.6 33.5
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 24.2 29.4 35.8
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 15 18.5 22
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 20 25 30
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 24 32 37.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 38.4 51.2 60
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 21.7 27.9 34
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 34.7 44.6 54.4
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 18.3 24.4 28.6
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 18.8 24.2 29.4
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 11 15 18.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 15 20 25
Max. cable cross-section to motor, IP 54 16/6 16/6 16/6
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) IP 20 16/6 16/6 35/2
Min. cable cross-section to motor,
brake and loadsharing [mm2]/[AWG]2) 4) 10/8 10/8 10/8
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 32 37.5 44
IL,N [A] (460 V) 27.6 34 41
Max. cable cross-section, IP 54 16/6 16/6 16/6
power [mm 2 ]/[AWG] IP 20 16/6 16/6 35/2
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 63/40 63/50 63/60
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 21 22 27
Weight IP 54 [kg] 41 41 42
Power loss at max. load.
- high overload torque (160 %) [W] 419 559 655
- normal overload torque (110 %) [W] 559 655 768
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to comply
with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.

22 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5032 5042 5052
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 61 73 90
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 67.1 80.3 99
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 54 65 78
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 59.4 71.5 85.8
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 46.5 55.6 68.6
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 46.8 56.3 67.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 30 37 45
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 40 50 60
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 44 61 73
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 70.4 97.6 116.8
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 41.4 54 65
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 66.2 86 104
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 33.5 46.5 55.6
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 35.9 46.8 56.3
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 22 30 37
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 30 40 50
Max. cable cross-section to motor, IP 54 35/2 35/2 50/0
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)5) IP20 35/2 35/2 50/0
Min. cable cross-section to motor,
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)4) 10/8 10/8 16/6
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 60 72 89
IL,N [A] (460 V) 53 64 77
Max. cable cross-section IP 54 35/2 35/2 50/0
power[mm 2 ]/[AWG]2) 5) IP 20 35/2 35/2 50/0
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 80/80 100/100 125/125
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 28 41 42
Weight IP 54 [kg] 54 56 56
Power loss at max. load.
- high overload torque (160 %) [W] 768 1065 1275
- normal overload torque (110 %) [W] 1065 1275 1571
IP 20/ IP 20/ IP 20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to comply
with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of a AI-Cu connector.

Technical
data

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 23

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5062 5072 5102
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 106 147 177

IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 117 162 195

IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 106 130 160

IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 117 143 176
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 80.8 102 123
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 91.8 113 139
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] (400 V) 55 75 90
PVLT,N [HP] (460 V) 75 100 125
PVLT,N [kW] (500 V) 75 90 110
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 90 106 147
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 V) 135 159 221
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 80 106 130
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (441-500 V) 120 159 195
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (380-440 V) 68.6 73.0 102
SVLT,N [kVA] (441-500 V) 69.3 92.0 113
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] (400 V) 45 55 75
PVLT,N [HP] (460 V) 60 75 100
PVLT,N [kW] (500 V) 55 75 90
150/300 150/300
Max. cable cross-section to motor, IP 54 50/05)
mcm6) mcm6)
120/250 120/250
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) IP20 50/05)
mcm5) mcm5)
Min. cable cross-section to motor,
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]4) 16/6 25/4 25/4
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380 V) 104 145 174
IL,N [A] (460 V) 104 128 158
150/300 150/300
Max. cable cross-section IP 54 50/05)
mcm mcm
120/250 120/250
power[mm 2 ]/[AWG]2) IP 20 50/05)
mcm5) mcm5)
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 160/150 225/225 250/250
Efficiency3) >0.97 >0.97 >0.97
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 43 54 54
Weight IP 54 [kg] 60 77 77
Power loss at max. load.
- high overload torque (160 %) [W] 1122 1058 1467
- normal overload torque (110 %) [W] 1322 1467 1766
IP20/ IP20/ IP20/
Enclosure
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to comply
with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of a AI-Cu connector.
6. Brake and loadsharing: 95 mm2 / AWG 3/0

24 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5122 5152 5202 5252 5302
Normal overload current (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 212 260 315 395 480
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
233 286 347 434 528
(380-440 V)
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 190 240 302 361 443
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
209 264 332 397 487
(441-500 V)
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 147 180 218 274 333
SVLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 151 191 241 288 353
SVLT,N [kVA] (500 V) 165 208 262 313 384
Typical shaft output [kW] (400 V) 110 132 160 200 250
[HP] (460 V) 150 200 250 300 350
[kW] (500 V) 132 160 200 250 315
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 177 212 260 315 395
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
266 318 390 473 593
(380-440 V)
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 160 190 240 302 361
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
240 285 360 453 542
(441-500 V)
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 123 147 180 218 274
SVLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 127 151 191 241 288
SVLT,N [kVA] (500 V) 139 165 208 262 313
Typical shaft output [kW] (400 V) 90 110 132 160 200
[HP] (460 V) 125 150 200 250 300
[kW] (500 V) 110 132 160 200 250
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 2 x 70 2 x 185
to motor [AWG]2,4,6 2 x 2/0 2 x 350 mcm
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 2 x 70 2 x 185
to loadsharing and brake [AWG]2,4,6 2 x 2/0 2 x 350 mcm
Normal overload current (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380-440 V) 208 256 317 385 467
IL,N [A] (441-500 V) 185 236 304 356 431
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380-440 V) 174 206 256 318 389
IL,N [A] (441-500 V) 158 185 236 304 356
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 2 x 70 2 x 185
power supply [AWG]2,4,6 2 x 2/0 2 x 350 mcm
Max. pre-fuses (mains) 300/ 350/ 450/ 500/ 630/
[A]1
[-]/UL 300 350
400 500 600
Efficiency3 0,98
Power loss Normal overload [W] 2619 3309 4163 4977 6107
High overload [W] 2206 2619 3309 4163 4977
Weight IP 00 [kg] 82 91 112 123 138
Weight IP 21/Nema1 [kg] 96 104 125 136 151
Technical
Weight IP 54/Nema12 [kg] 96 104 125 136 151
data
Enclosure IP 00, IP 21/Nema 1 and IP 54/Nema12

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Max. cable cross-section is the maximum possible cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals.
Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Weight without shipping container.
6. Connection bolt power supply and motor: M10; Brake and loadsharing: M8

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 25

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 380 - 500 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5352 5452 5502 5552
Normal overload current (110 %):

Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 600 658 745 800

IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
660 724 820 880
(380-440 V)
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 540 590 678 730
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
594 649 746 803
(441-500 V)
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 416 456 516 554
SVLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 430 470 540 582
SVLT,N [kVA] (500 V) 468 511 587 632
Typical shaft output [kW] (400 V) 315 355 400 450
[HP] (460 V) 450 500 550/600 600
[kW] (500 V) 355 400 500 530
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 480 600 658 695
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
720 900 987 1042
(380-440 V)
IVLT,N [A] (441-500 V) 443 540 590 678
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
665 810 885 1017
(441-500 V)
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 333 416 456 482
SVLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 353 430 470 540
SVLT,N [kVA] (500 V) 384 468 511 587
Typical shaft output [kW] (400 V) 250 315 355 400
[HP] (460 V) 350 450 500 550
[kW] (500 V) 315 355 400 500
Max. cable [mm2]4,6
4x240
cross-section to motor [AWG]2,4,6
4x500 mcm
and loadsharing
Max. cable [mm2]4,6
2x185
cross-section [AWG]2,4,6
2x350 mcm
to brake
Normal overload current (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380-440 V) 590 647 733 787
IL,N [A] (441-500 V) 531 580 667 718
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (380-440 V) 472 590 647 684
IL,N [A] (441-500 V) 436 531 580 667
Max. cable [mm2]4,6
4x240
cross-section power [AWG]2,4,6
4x500 mcm
supply
Max. pre-fuses (mains)
[A]1 700/700 900/900 900/900 900/900
[-]/UL
Efficiency3 0,98
Power loss Normal overload [W] 7630 7701 8879 9428
High overload [W] 6005 6960 7691 7964
Weight IP 00 [kg] 221 234 236 277
Weight IP 21/Nema1 [kg] 263 270 272 313
Weight IP 54/Nema12 [kg] 263 270 272 313
Enclosure IP 00, IP 21/Nema 1 and IP 54/Nema12

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Max. cable cross-section is the maximum possible cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals.
Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Weight without shipping container.
6. Connection bolt power supply, motor and loadsharing: M10 (compression lug), 2xM8 (box lug), M8 (brake)

26 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5001 5002 5003 5004

Normal overload torque (110 %):

Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 2.6 2.9 4.1 5.2
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 2.9 3.2 4.5 5.7
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 2.6 3.0 4.3 5.4
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 2.5 2.8 3.9 5.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 1.5 2 3 4
Highl overload torque (160%):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 1.8 2.6 2.9 4.1
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 2.9 4.2 4.6 6.6
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 2.7 3.8 4.3 6.2
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 1.7 2.5 2.8 3.9
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 1 1.5 2 3
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)

Normal overload torque (110 %):

Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 2.5 2.8 4.0 5.1
IL,N [A] (600 V) 2.2 2.5 3.6 4.6
High overload torque ( 160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 1.8 2.5 2.8 4.0
IL,N [A] (600 V) 1.6 2.2 2.5 3.6
Max. cable cross-section, power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 3 4 5 6
Efficiency 3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Power loss at max.
[W] 63 71 102 129
load.
Enclosure IP 20 / Nema 1

1. For type of fuses see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

Technical
data

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 27

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5005 5006 5008 5011

Normal overload torque (110 %):

Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 6.4 9.5 11.5 11.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 7.0 10.5 12.7 12.7
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 6.7 9.9 12.1 12.1
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 6.1 9.0 11.0 11.0
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 7.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 5 7.5 10.0 10.0
Highl overload torque (160%):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 5.2 6.4 9.5 11.5
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 8.3 10.2 15.2 18.4
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 7.8 9.8 14.4 17.6
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 5.0 6.1 9.0 11.0
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 3 4 5.5 7.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 4 5 7.5 10
Max. cable cross-section to motor,
4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)

Normal overload torque (110 %):

Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 6.2 9.2 11.2 11.2
IL,N [A] (600 V) 5.7 8.4 10.3 10.3
High overload torque ( 160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 5.1 6.2 9.2 11.2
IL,N [A] (600 V) 4.6 5.7 8.4 10.3
Max. cable cross-section, power [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4/10 4/10 4/10 4/10
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 8 10 15 20
Efficiency 3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
Power loss at max.
[W] 160 236 288 288
load.
Enclosure IP 20 / Nema 1

1. For type of fuses see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

28 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5016 5022 5027
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 23 28 34
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 25 31 37
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 22 27 32
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 24 30 35
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 22 27 32
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 22 27 32
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 15 18.5 22
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 20 25 30
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 18 23 28
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 29 37 45
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 17 22 27
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 27 35 43
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 17 22 27
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 17 22 27
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 11 15 18.5
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 15 20 25
Max. cable cross-section to motor, 16 16 35
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 6 6 2
Min. cable cross-section to motor, 0.5 0.5 10
brake and loadsharing [mm2]/[AWG]4) 20 20 8
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 22 27 33
IL,N [A] (600 V) 21 25 30
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 18 22 27
IL,N [A] (600 V) 16 21 25
Max. cable cross-section, 16 16 35
power [mm 2 ]/[AWG]2) 6 6 2
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 30 35 45
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 23 23 30
Power loss at max. load [W] 576 707 838
Enclosure IP 20 / Nema 1

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to comply
with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.

Technical
data

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 29

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact, Mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5032 5042 5052 5062
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 43 54 65 81
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 47 59 72 89
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 41 52 62 77
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 45 57 68 85
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 41 51 62 77
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 41 52 62 77
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 30 37 45 55
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 40 50 60 75
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 34 43 54 65
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (550 V) 54 69 86 104
IVLT,N [A] (575 V) 32 41 52 62
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V) 51 66 83 99
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 32 41 51 62
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 32 41 52 62
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW] 22 30 37 45
Typical shaft output PVLT,N [HP] 30 40 50 60
Max. cable cross-section to motor, 35 50 50 50
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)5) 2 1/0 1/0 1/0
Min. cable cross-section to motor, 10 16 16 16
brake and loadsharing [mm2 ]/[AWG]4) 8 6 6 6
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 42 53 63 79
IL,N [A] (600 V) 38 49 58 72
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 33 42 53 63
IL,N [A] (600 V) 30 38 49 58
Max. cable cross-section 35 50 50 50
power[mm 2 ]/[AWG]2) 5) 2 1/0 1/0 1/0
Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A] 60 75 90 100
Efficiency3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Weight IP 20 EB [kg] 30 48 48 48
Power loss at max. load [W] 1074 1362 1624 2016
Enclosure IP 20 / Nema 1

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals to comply
with IP 20. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of a AI-Cu connector.

30 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Mains supply 3 x 525 - 690 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5042 5052 5062 5072 5102
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (525-550 V) 56 76 90 113 137
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
62 84 99 124 151
(525-550 V)
IVLT,N [A] (551-690 V) 54 73 86 108 131
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
59 80 95 119 144
(551-690 V)
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 53 72 86 108 131
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 54 73 86 108 130
SVLT,N [kVA] (690 V) 65 87 103 129 157
Typical shaft output [kW] (550 V) 37 45 55 75 90
[HP] (575 V) 50 60 75 100 125
[kW] (690 V) 45 55 75 90 110
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (525-550 V) 48 56 76 90 113
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
77 90 122 135 170
(525-550 V)
IVLT,N [A] (551-690 V) 46 54 73 86 108
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
74 86 117 129 162
(551-690 V)
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 46 53 72 86 108
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 46 54 73 86 108
SVLT,N [kVA] (690 V) 55 65 87 103 129
Typical shaft output [kW] (550 V) 30 37 45 55 75
[HP] (575 V) 40 50 60 75 100
[kW] (690 V) 37 45 55 75 90
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 2 x 70
to motor [AWG]2,4,6 2 x 2/0
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 2 x 70
to loadsharing and brake [AWG]2,4,6 2 x 2/0
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 60 77 89 110 130
IL,N [A] (575 V) 58 74 85 106 124
IL,N [A] (690 V) 58 77 87 109 128
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 53 60 77 89 110
IL,N [A] (575 V) 51 58 74 85 106
IL,N [A] (690 V) 50 58 77 87 109
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 2 x 70
power supply [AWG]2,4,6 2 x 2/0
Max. pre-fuses (mains)
[A]1 125 160 200 200 250
[-]/UL
Efficiency3 0.97 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.98
Power loss Normal overload [W] 1458 1717 1913 2262 2662
High overload [W] 1355 1459 1721 1913 2264
Technical
Weight IP 00 [kg] 82
data
Weight IP 21/Nema1 [kg] 96
Weight IP 54/Nema12 [kg] 96
Enclosure IP 00, IP 21/Nema 1 and IP 54/Nema12

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Max. cable cross-section is the maximum possible cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals.
Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Weight without shipping container.
6. Connection bolt power supply and motor: M10; Brake and loadsharing: M8

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 31

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ mains supply 3 x 525 - 690 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5122 5152 5202 5252 5302 5352
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (525-550 V) 162 201 253 303 360 418
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
178 221 278 333 396 460
(525-550 V)
IVLT,N [A] (551-690 V) 155 192 242 290 344 400
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
171 211 266 319 378 440
(551-690 V)
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 154 191 241 289 343 398
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 154 191 241 289 343 398
SVLT,N [kVA] (690 V) 185 229 289 347 411 478
Typical shaft output [kW] (550 V) 110 132 160 200 250 315
[HP] (575 V) 150 200 250 300 350 400
[kW] (690 V) 132 160 200 250 315 400
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (525-550 V) 137 162 201 253 303 360
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
206 243 302 380 455 540
(525-550 V)
IVLT,N [A] (551-690 V) 131 155 192 242 290 344
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A]
197 233 288 363 435 516
(551-690 V)
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 131 154 191 241 289 343
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 130 154 191 241 289 343
SVLT,N [kVA] (690 V) 157 185 229 289 347 411
Typical shaft output [kW] (550 V) 90 110 132 160 200 250
[HP] (575 V) 125 150 200 250 300 350
[kW] (690 V) 110 132 160 200 250 315
Max. cable [mm2]4,6 2x 70 2 x 185
cross-section to motor [AWG]2,4,6 2 x 2/0 2 x 350 mcm
Max. cable
[mm2]4,6 2 x 70 2 x 185
cross-section to
[AWG]2,4,6 2 x 2/0 2 x 350 mcm
loadsharing and brake
Normal overload torque (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 158 198 245 299 355 408
IL,N [A] (575 V) 151 189 234 286 339 390
IL,N [A] (690 V) 155 197 240 296 352 400
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (550 V) 130 158 198 245 299 355
IL,N [A] (575 V) 124 151 189 234 286 339
IL,N [A] (690 V) 128 155 197 240 296 352
Max. cable [mm2]4,6
2 x 70 2 x 185
cross-section [AWG]2,4,6
2 x 2/0 2 x 350 mcm
power supply
Max. pre-fuses (mains)
[A]1 315 350 350 400 500 550
[-]/UL
Efficiency3 0,98
Power loss Normal overload [W] 3114 3612 4292 5155 5821 6149
High overload [W] 2664 2952 3451 4275 4875 5185
Weight IP 00 [kg] 82 91 112 123 138 151
Weight IP 21/Nema1 [kg] 96 104 125 136 151 165
Weight IP 54/Nema12 [kg] 96 104 125 136 151 165
Enclosure IP 00, IP 21/Nema 1 and IP 54/Nema12

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

2. American Wire Gauge.
3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Max. cable cross-section is the maximum possible cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals.
Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Weight without shipping container.
6. Connection bolt power supply and motor: M10; Brake and loadsharing: M8

32 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Compact, Mains supply 3 x 525 - 690 V

According to international requirements VLT type 5402 5502 5602
Normal overload current (110 %):

Output current IVLT,N [A] (525-550 V) 523 596 630

IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (525-550 V) 575 656 693
IVLT,N [A] (551-690 V) 500 570 630
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (551-690 V) 550 627 693
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 498 568 600
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 498 568 627
SVLT,N [kVA] (690 V) 598 681 753
Typical shaft output [kW] (550 V) 400 450 500
[HP] (575 V) 500 600 650
[kW] (690 V) 500 560 630
High overload torque (160 %):
Output current IVLT,N [A] (525-550 V) 429 523 596
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (525-550 V) 644 785 894
IVLT,N [A] (551-690 V) 410 500 570
IVLT, MAX (60 s) [A] (551-690 V) 615 750 855
Output SVLT,N [kVA] (550 V) 409 498 568
SVLT,N [kVA] (575 V) 408 498 568
SVLT,N [kVA] (690 V) 490 598 681
Typical shaft output [kW] (550 V) 315 400 450
[HP] (575 V) 400 500 600
[kW] (690 V) 400 500 560
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 4x240
to motor and loadsharing [AWG]2,4,6 4x500 mcm
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 2x185
to brake [AWG]2,4,6 2x350 mcm
Normal overload current (110 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (525-550 V) 504 574 607
IL,N [A] (551-690 V) 482 549 607
High overload torque (160 %):
Rated input current IL,N [A] (525-550 V) 413 504 574
IL,N [A] (551-690 V) 395 482 549
Max. cable cross-section [mm2]4,6 4x240
power supply [AWG]2,4,6 4x500 mcm
Max. pre-fuses (mains)
[A]1 700/700 900/900 900/900
[-]/UL
Efficiency3 0,98
Power loss Normal overload [W] 7249 8727 9673
High overload [W] 5818 7671 8715
Weight IP 00 [kg] 221 236 277
Weight IP 21/Nema1 [kg] 263 272 313
Weight IP 54/Nema12 [kg] 263 272 313
Enclosure IP 00, IP 21/Nema 1 and IP 54/Nema12 Technical

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses

data

2. American Wire Gauge.

3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4. Max. cable cross-section is the maximum possible cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals.
Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.
5. Weight without shipping container.
6. Connection bolt power supply, motor and loadsharing: M10 (compression lug), 2xM8 (box lug), M8 (brake)

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 33

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Fuses
UL compliance
To comply with UL/cUL approvals, pre-fuses according to the table below must be used.

200-240 V

VLT Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut

5001 KTN-R10 5017906-010 KLN-R10 ATM-R10 or A2K-10R
5002 KTN-R10 5017906-010 KLN-R10 ATM-R10 or A2K-10R
5003 KTN-R25 5017906-016 KLN-R15 ATM-R15 or A2K-15R
5004 KTN-R20 5017906-020 KLN-R20 ATM-R20 or A2K-20R
5005 KTN-R25 5017906-025 KLN-R25 ATM-R25 or A2K-25R
5006 KTN-R30 5012406-032 KLN-R30 ATM-R30 or A2K-30R
5008 KTN-R50 5014006-050 KLN-R50 A2K-50R
5011 KTN-R60 5014006-063 KLN-R60 A2K-60R
5016 KTN-R85 5014006-080 KLN-R80 A2K-80R
5022 KTN-R125 2028220-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R
5027 KTN-R125 2028220-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R
5032 KTN-R150 2028220-160 L25S-150 A25X-150
5042 KTN-R200 2028220-200 L25S-200 A25X-200
5052 KTN-R250 2028220-250 L25S-250 A25X-250

380-500 V
Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut
5001 KTS-R6 5017906-006 KLS-R6 ATM-R6 or A6K-6R
5002 KTS-R6 5017906-006 KLS-R6 ATM-R6 or A6K-6R
5003 KTS-R10 5017906-010 KLS-R10 ATM-R10 or A6K-10R
5004 KTS-R10 5017906-010 KLS-R10 ATM-R10 or A6K-10R
5005 KTS-R15 5017906-016 KLS-R16 ATM-R16 or A6K-16R
5006 KTS-R20 5017906-020 KLS-R20 ATM-R20 or A6K-20R
5008 KTS-R25 5017906-025 KLS-R25 ATM-R25 or A6K-25R
5011 KTS-R30 5012406-032 KLS-R30 A6K-30R
5016 KTS-R40 5012406-040 KLS-R40 A6K-40R
5022 KTS-R50 5014006-050 KLS-R50 A6K-50R
5027 KTS-R60 5014006-063 KLS-R60 A6K-60R
5032 KTS-R80 2028220-100 KLS-R80 A6K-180R
5042 KTS-R100 2028220-125 KLS-R100 A6K-100R
5052 KTS-R125 2028220-125 KLS-R125 A6K-125R
5062 KTS-R150 2028220-160 KLS-R150 A6K-150R
5072 FWH-220 2028220-200 L50S-225 A50-P225
5102 FWH-250 2028220-250 L50S-250 A50-P250
5122* FWH-300/170M3017 2028220-315 L50S-300 A50-P300
5152* FWH-350/170M3018 2028220-315 L50S-350 A50-P350
5202* FWH-400/170M4012 206xx32-400 L50S-400 A50-P400
5252* FWH-500/170M4014 206xx32-500 L50S-500 A50-P500
5302* FWH-600/170M4016 206xx32-600 L50S-600 A50-P600
5352 170M4017 2061032,700 6.9URD31D08A0700
5452 170M6013 2063032,900 6.9URD33D08A0900
5502 170M6013 2063032,900 6.9URD33D08A0900
5552 170M6013 2063032,900 6.9URD33D08A0900

34 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

* Circuit Breakers manufactured by General Electric, Cat. No. SKHA36AT0800, with rating plugs listed below can be used to meet
UL-requirements:

5122 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 300

5152 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 400
5202 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 400
5252 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 500
5302 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 600

525-600 V
Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut
5001 KTS-R3 5017906-004 KLS-R003 A6K-3R
5002 KTS-R4 5017906-004 KLS-R004 A6K-4R
5003 KT-R5 5017906-005 KLS-R005 A6K-5R
5004 KTS-R6 5017906-006 KLS-R006 A6K-6R
5005 KTS-R8 5017906-008 KLS-R008 A6K-8R
5006 KTS-R10 5017906-010 KLS-R010 A6K-10R
5008 KTS-R15 5017906-016 KLS-R015 A6K-15R
5011 KTS-R20 5017906-020 KLS-R020 A6K-20R
5016 KTS-R30 5017906-030 KLS-R030 A6K-30R
5022 KTS-R35 5014006-040 KLS-R035 A6K-35R
5027 KTS-R45 5014006-050 KLS-R045 A6K-45R
5032 KTS-R60 5014006-063 KLS-R060 A6K-60R
5042 KTS-R75 5014006-080 KLS-R075 A6K-80R
5052 KTS-R90 5014006-100 KLS-R090 A6K-90R
5062 KTS-R100 5014006-100 KLS-R100 A6K-100R

525-600 V (UL) and 525-690 V (CE) drives

Bussmann SIBA FERRAZ-SHAWMUT
5042 170M3013 2061032,125 6.6URD30D08A0125
5052 170M3014 2061032,16 6.6URD30D08A0160
5062 170M3015 2061032,2 6.6URD30D08A0200
5072 170M3015 2061032,2 6.6URD30D08A0200
5102 170M3016 2061032,25 6.6URD30D08A0250
5122 170M3017 2061032,315 6.6URD30D08A0315
5152 170M3018 2061032,35 6.6URD30D08A0350
5202 170M4011 2061032,35 6.6URD30D08A0350
Technical

5252 170M4012 2061032,4 6.6URD30D08A0400

data

5302 170M4014 2061032,5 6.6URD30D08A0500

5352 170M5011 2062032,55 6.6URD32D08A550
5402 170M4017 2061032,700 6.9URD31D08A0700
5502 170M6013 2063032,900 6.9URD33D08A0900
5602 170M6013 2063032,900 6.9URD33D08A0900

KTS-fuses from Bussmann may substitute KTN for 240 V drives.

FWH-fuses from Bussmann may substitute FWX for 240 V drives.

KLSR fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute KLNR fuses for 240 V drives.
L50S fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute L25S fuses for 240 V drives.

A6KR fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A2KR for 240 V drives.
A50X fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A25X for 240 V drives.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 35

 VLT® 5000 Series

Non UL compliance
If UL/cUL is not to be complied with, we recommend the above mentioned fuses or:

VLT 5001-5027 200-240 V type gG

VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V type gR
VLT 5001-5062 380-500 V type gG
VLT 5072-5102 380-500 V type gR
VLT 5122-5302 380-500 V type gG
VLT 5352-5552 380-500 V type gR
VLT 5001-5062 525-600 V type gG

Not following the recommendation may result in unnecessary damage of the drive in case of malfunction. Fuses must be designed for
protection in a circuit capable of supplying a maximum of 100000 Arms (symmetrical), 500/600 V maximum.

36 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Mechanical dimensions
All the below listed measurements are in mm.
A B C D a b ab/be Type
Bookstyle IP 20
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
395 90 260 384 70 100 A
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
395 130 260 384 70 100 A
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Compact IP 00
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V 800 370 335 780 270 225 B
5122 - 5152 380 - 500 V 1046 408 3731) 1001 304 225 J
5202 - 5302 380 - 500 V 1327 408 3731) 1282 304 225 J
5352 - 5552 380 - 500 V 1547 585 4941) 1502 304 225 I
5042 - 5152 525 - 690 V 1046 408 3731) 1001 304 225 J
5202 - 5352 525 - 690 V 1327 408 3731) 1282 304 225 J
5402 - 5602 525 - 690 V 1547 585 4941) 1502 304 225 I
Compact IP 20
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
395 220 160 384 200 100 C
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V 395 220 200 384 200 100 C
5001 - 5011 525 - 600 V (IP 20 and Nema 1)
5008 200 - 240 V
5016 - 5022 380 - 500 V 560 242 260 540 200 200 D
5016 - 5022 525 - 600 V (Nema 1)
5011 - 5016 200 - 240 V
5027 - 5032 380 - 500 V 700 242 260 680 200 200 D
5027 - 5032 525 - 600 V (Nema 1)
5022 - 5027 200 - 240 V
5042 - 5062 380 - 500 V 800 308 296 780 270 200 D
5042 - 5062 525 - 600 V (Nema 1)
5072 - 5102 380 - 500 V 800 370 335 780 330 225 D
Compact Nema 1/IP20/IP21
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V 954 370 335 780 270 225 E
5122 - 5152 380 - 500 V 1208 420 3731) 1154 304 225 J
5202 - 5302 380 - 500 V 1588 420 3731) 1535 304 225 J
5352 - 5552 380 - 500 V 2000 600 4941) - - 225 H
5042 - 5152 525 - 690 V 1208 420 3731) 1154 304 225 J
5202 - 5352 525 - 690 V 1588 420 3731) 1535 304 225 J
5402 - 5602 525 - 690 V 2000 600 4941) - - 225 H
Compact IP 54/Nema 12
5001 - 5003 200 - 240 V
460 282 195 85 260 258 100 F
5001 - 5005 380 - 500 V
5004 - 5006 200 - 240 V
530 282 195 85 330 258 100 F
5006 - 5011 380 - 500 V
Technical
5008 - 5011 200 - 240 V
810 350 280 70 560 326 200 F
data

5016 - 5027 380 - 500 V

5016 - 5027 200 - 240 V
940 400 280 70 690 375 200 F
5032 - 5062 380 - 500 V
5032 - 5052 200 - 240 V 937 495 421 - 830 374 225 G
5072 - 5102 380 - 500 V 940 400 360 70 690 375 225 F
5122 - 5152 380 - 500 V 1208 420 3731) - 1154 304 225 J
5202 - 5302 380 - 500 V 1588 420 3732) 1535 304 225 J
5352 - 5552 380 - 500 V 2000 600 4941) - - - 225 H
5042 - 5152 525 - 690 V 1208 420 3731) - 1154 304 225 J
5202 - 5352 525 - 690 V 1588 420 3731) 1535 304 225 J
5402 - 5602 525 - 690 V 2000 600 4941) - - 225 H
ab: Minimum space above enclosure’
be: Minimum space below enclosure
1) With disconnect, add 44 mm.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 37

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Mechanical dimensions, cont.

38 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Mechanical dimensions (cont.)

Type H, IP 20, IP 54

Type I, IP 00

Technical
data

Type J, IP 00, IP 21, IP 54

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 39

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Mechanical installation

Please pay attention to the requirements

that apply to integration and field mounting
kit, see the below list. The information given
in the list must be observed to avoid serious damage
or injury, especially when installing large units.

The frequency converter must be installed vertically.

The frequency converter is cooled by means of air

circulation. For the unit to be able to release its cooling
air, the minimum distance over and below the unit
must be as shown in the illustration below.
To protect the unit from overheating, it must be
ensured that the ambient temperature does not rise
above the max. temperature stated for the frequency
converter and that the 24-hour average temperature is
not exceeded . The max. temperature and 24-hour
average can be seen from the General Technical Data.
If the ambient temperature is in the range of 45°C -55°
C, derating of the frequency converter will become
relevant, see Derating for ambient temperature.
The service life of the frequency converter will
be reduced if derating for ambient temperature
is not taken into account.

40 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Installation of VLT 5001-5602

All frequency converters must be installed in a
way that ensures proper cooling.

Cooling

All Bookstyle and Compact units require a minimum

space above and below the enclosure.

Side by side/flange by flange

All frequency converters can be mounted side

by side/flange by flange.
d [mm] Comments
Bookstyle
VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V 100
Installation on a plane, vertical surface (no spacers)
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V 100

Compact (all enclosure types)

VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V 100
VLT 5001-5011, 380-500 V 100 Installation on a plane, vertical surface (no spacers)
VLT 5001-5011, 525-600 V 100

VLT 5008-5027, 200-240 V 200

VLT 5016-5062, 380-500 V 200
Installation on a plane, vertical surface (no spacers)
VLT 5072-5102, 380-500 V 225
VLT 5016-5062, 525-600 V 200

VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V 225 Installation on a plane, vertical surface (no spacers)
VLT 5122-5302, 380-500 V 225
VLT 5042-5352, 525-690 V 225 IP 54 filter mats must be changed when they are dirty.
VLT 5352-5552, 380-500 V 225 IP 00 above and below enclosure
VLT 5402-5602, 525-690 V 225 IP 21/IP 54 only above enclosure
Installation

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 41

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Installation of VLT 5352-5552 380-500 V

and VLT 5402-5602 525-690 V Compact
Side-by-side
Nema 1 (IP 21) and IP 54
Cooling

Compact Nema 1 (IP 21) and IP 54

All Nema 1 (IP 21) and IP 54 units in the

above-mentioned series can be installed side by
side without any space between them, since these
units do not require cooling on the sides.

All units in the above-mentioned series require a

minimum space of 225 mm above the enclosure and
must be installed on a flat level surface. This applies
to both Nema 1 (IP 21) and IP 54 units.
Gaining access requires a minimum space of 579
mm in front of the frequency converter.

Filter mats in IP 54 units have to be changed regularly

depending on the operating environment.

42 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation ■ Safety earthing

The voltage on the frequency converter is NB!:

dangerous when the unit is connected to The frequency converter has a high leakage
mains. Incorrect installation of the motor or current and must be earthed appropriately
the frequency converter may lead to material damage for safety reasons. Use earth terminal
or serious injury or it may be fatal. Consequently, the (see section Electrical installation, power cables),
instructions in this manual as well as national and local which enables reinforced earthing.
rules and safety regulations must be complied with. Apply national safety regulations.
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal, even after
the mains supply has been disconnected.
Using VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V and 380-500 ■ Extra protection (RCD)
V: wait at least 4 minutes. ELCB relays, multiple protective earthing or earthing
Using VLT 5008-5052, 200-240 V: wait can be used as extra protection, provided that local
at least 15 minutes. safety regulations are complied with.
Using VLT 5008-5062, 380-500 V: wait
In the case of an earth fault, a DC content may
at least 15 minutes.
develop in the faulty current.
Using VLT 5072-5302, 380-500 V: wait
at least 20 minutes. If ELCB relays are used, local regulations must be
Using VLT 5352-5552, 380-500 V: wait observed. Relays must be suitable for protection
at least 40 minutes. of 3-phase equipment with a bridge rectifier and
Using VLT 5001-5005, 525-600 V: wait for a brief discharge on power-up.
at least 4 minutes.
Using VLT 5006-5022, 525-600 V: wait See also the section Special Conditions in
at least 15 minutes. the Design Guide.
Using VLT 5027-5062, 525-600 V: wait
at least 30 minutes.
Using VLT 5042-5352, 525-690 V: wait ■ Electrical installation - mains supply
at least 20 minutes. Connect the three mains phases to terminals L1, L2, L3.
Using VLT 5402-5602, 525-690 V: wait
at least 30 minutes.

NB!:
It is the user’s or certified electrician’s
responsibility to ensure correct earthing and
protection in accordance with applicable
national and local norms and standards. ■ Electrical installation - motor cables

NB!:
■ High voltage test If an unscreened cable is used, some
A high voltage test can be carried out by short- EMC requirements are not complied with,
circuiting terminals U, V, W, L1, L2 and L3 and see the Design Guide.
energizing by max. 2.15 kV DC for one second If the EMC specifications regarding emission are
between this short-circuit and the chassis. to be complied with, the motor cable must be
screened, unless otherwise stated for the RFI filter
NB!:
in question. It is important to keep the motor cable
The RFI switch must be closed (position
as short as possible so as to reduce the noise level
Installation

ON) when high voltage tests are carried

and leakage currents to a minimum.
out (see section RFI Switch).
The motor cable screen must be connected to the
The mains and motor connection must be interrupted
metal cabinet of the frequency converter and to the
in the case of high voltage tests of the total installation
metal cabinet of the motor. The screen connections
if the leakage currents are too high.
are to be made with the biggest possible surface
(cable clamp). This is enabled by different installation
devices in the different frequency converters.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 43

 VLT® 5000 Series

Installation with twisted screen ends (pigtails) is ■ Direction of motor rotation

to be avoided, since these spoil the screening
effect at higher frequencies.
If it is necessary to break the screen to install a motor
isolator or motor contactor, the screen must be
continued at the lowest possible HF impedance.

The frequency converter has been tested with a given

length of cable and a given cross-section of that cable.
If the cross-section is increased, the cable capacitance
- and thus the leakage current - increases, and the
cable length must be reduced correspondingly.

When frequency converters are used together with

LC filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor,
the switching frequency must be set according to
the LC filter instruction in Parameter 411. When
setting the switching frequency higher than 3 kHz,
the output current is derated in SFAVM mode. By
The factory setting is for clockwise rotation with the
changing Parameter 446 to 60° AVM mode, the
frequency transformer output connected as follows.
frequency at which the current is derated is moved
upwards. Please see Design Guide. Terminal 96 connected to U-phase
Terminal 97 connected to V-phase
Terminal 98 connected to W-phase
■ Connection of motor The direction of motor rotation can be changed by
All types of 3-phased asynchronous standard motors switching two phases in the motor cable.
can be used with the VLT 5000 Series.

■ Parallel coupling of motors

Normally, small motors are star-connected

(200/400 V, /Y).
Large motors are delta-connected (400/690 V, /Y).

Frequency converters are able to control several

motors connected in parallel. If the motors are to
have different rpm values, the motors must have
different rated rpm values. Motor rpm is changed
simultaneously, which means that the ratio between
the rated rpm values is maintained across the range.

The total current consumption of the motors is

not to exceed the maximum rated output current
IVLT,N for the frequency converter.

Problems may arise at the start and at low rpm values if

the motor sizes are widely different. This is because the
relatively high ohmic resistance in small motors calls for
a higher voltage at the start and at low rpm values.

44 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

NB!:
In systems with motors connected in parallel, the
This function is only available on VLT 5032-5052,
electronic thermal relay (ETR) of the frequency
200-240 V; VLT 5122-5552, 380-500 V; and
converter cannot be used as motor protection
VLT 5042-5602, 525-690 V.
for the individual motor. Consequently, additional
If the temperature of the brake resistor gets too high and
motor protection is required, such as thermistors
the thermal switch drops out, the frequency converter
in each motor (or individual thermal relays) suitable
will stop braking. The motor will start coasting.
for frequency converter use.
A KLIXON switch must be installed that is ‘normally
Please note that the individual motor cable for each closed’. If this function is not used, 106 and 104
motor must be summed and is not to exceed the must be short-circuited together.
total motor cable length permitted.

■ Motor thermal protection

The electronic thermal relay in UL-approved frequency
converters has received the UL-approval for single
motor protection when parameter 128 has been set for
ETR Trip and parameter 105 has been programmed to ■ Electrical installation - loadsharing
the rated motor current (see motor nameplate). (Only extended with typecode EB, EX, DE, DX).
No. Function
88, 89 Loadsharing
■ Electrical installation - brake cable
(Only standard with brake and extended with Terminals for loadsharing
brake. Typecode: SB, EB, DE, PB).
No. Function
81, 82 Brake resistor terminals
The connection cable must be screened and
the max. length from the frequency converter
The connection cable to the brake resistor must be
to the DC bar is 25 metres.
screened. Connect the screen by means of cable
Load sharing enables linking of the DC intermediate
clamps to the conductive back plate at the frequency
circuits of several frequency converters.
converter and to the metal cabinet of the brake resistor.
Size the brake cable cross-section to match NB!:
the brake torque. See also Brake instructions, Please note that voltages up to 1099 V DC
MI.90.FX.YY and MI.50.SX.YY for further information may occur on the terminals.
regarding safe installation. Load sharing calls for extra equipment. For
further information please consult Loadsharing
NB!:
Instructions MI.50.NX.XX.
Please note that voltages up to 1099 V
DC, depending on the supply voltage, may
occur on the terminals.

■ Electrical installation - brake resistor

temperature switch
Torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm ■ Tightening-up torques and screw sizes
Installation

Screw size: M3 The table shows the torque required when fitting
terminals to the frequency converter. For VLT
No. Function
5001-5027 200-240 V, VLT 5001-5102 380-500 V
106, 104, Brake resistor temperature switch.
and VLT 5001-5062 525-600 V, the cables must be
105
fastened with screws. For VLT 5032 - 5052 200-240 V,
VLT 5122-5552 380-500 V, VLT 5042-5602 525-690
V the cables must be fastened with bolts.
These figures apply to the following terminals:

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 45

 VLT® 5000 Series

Mains terminals Nos 91, 92, 93

L1, L2, L3

Motor terminals Nos 96, 97, 98

U, V, W

Earth terminal No 94, 95, 99

Brake resistor terminals 81, 82

Loadsharing 88, 89

VLT type Torque [Nm] Screw/ Tool

200-240 V Boltsize
5001-5006 0,6 M3 Slotted screw
5008 IP20 1,8 M4 Slotted screw
5008-5011 IP54 1,8 M4 Slotted screw
5011-5022 IP20 3 M5 4 mm Allen wrench
5016-502231) IP54 3 M5 4 mm Allen wrench
5027 6 M6 4 mm Allen wrench
5032-5052 11,3 M8 (bolt and stud)
380-500 V
5001-5011 0,6 M3 Slotted screw
5016-5022 IP20 1,8 M4 Slotted screw
5016-5027 IP54 1,8 M4 Slotted screw
5027-5042 IP20 3 M5 4 mm Allen wrench
5032-50423) IP54 3 M5 4 mm Allen wrench
5052-5062 6 M6 5 mm Allen wrench
5072-5102 IP20 15 M6 6 mm Allen wrench
IP542) 24 M8 8 mm Allen wrench
5122-53024) 19 M10 bolt 16 mm wrench
5352-55525) 19 M10 bolt (compression 16 mm wrench
lug)
525-600 V
5001-5011 0,6 M3 Slotted screw
5016-5027 1,8 M4 Slotted screw
5032-5042 3 M5 4 mm Allen wrench
5052-5062 6 M6 5 mm Allen wrench
525-690 V
5042-53524) 19 M10 bolt 16 mm wrench
5402-56025) 19 M10 bolt (compression 16 mm wrench
lug)

1) Brake terminals: 3,0 Nm, Nut: M6

2) Brake and loadsharing: 14 Nm, M6 Allen screw
3) IP54 with RFI - Line terminals 6Nm, Screw: M6 - 5 mm Allen wrench
4) Loadsharing and brake terminals: 9,5 Nm; Bolt M8
5) Brake terminals: 9,5 Nm; Bolt M8.

46 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation - external fan supply ■ Electrical installation - relay outputs

Torque 0,5-0,6 Nm Torque: 0.5 - 0.6 Nm
Screwsize: M3 Screw size: M3

No. Function
1-3 Relay output, 1+3 break, 1+2 make
See parameter 323 of the Operating
Instructions. See also General
technical data.
4, 5 Relay output, 4+5 make See
parameter 326 of the Operating
Instructions.
See also General technical data.

Available in 5122-5552, 380-500 V; 5042-5602,

525-690 V, 5032-5052, 200-240 V in all
enclosure types.
Only for IP54 units in the power range VLT 5016-5102,
380-500 V and VLT 5008-5027, 200-240 V AC. If
the drive is supplied by the DC bus (loadsharing), the
internal fans are not supplied with AC power. In this
case they must be supplied with an external AC supply.

■ Electrical installation - 24 Volt external DC supply

(Only extended versions. Typecode: PS, PB,
PD, PF, DE, DX, EB, EX).

Torque: 0.5 - 0.6 Nm

Screw size: M3
No. Function
35, 36 24 V external DC supply

External 24 V DC supply can be used as low-voltage

supply to the control card and any option cards
installed. This enables full operation of the LCP (incl.
parameter setting) without connection to mains.
Please note that a warning of low voltage will be
given when 24 V DC has been connected; however,
there will be no tripping. If 24 V external DC supply
is connected or switched on at the same time as
the mains supply, a time of min. 200 msec. must
be set in parameter 120 Start delay.
A pre-fuse of min. 6 Amp, slow-blow, can be
fitted to protect the external 24 V DC supply.
The power consumption is 15-50 W, depending
Installation

on the load on the control card.

NB!:
Use 24 V DC supply of type PELV to ensure
correct galvanic isolation (type PELV) on the
control terminals of the frequency converter.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 47

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation, power cables

Bookstyle Compact IP 20/Nema 1

VLT 5001-5006 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011 380-500 V

Compact IP 54 Compact IP 20/Nema 1

VLT 5001-5006 200-240 V VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011 380-500 V VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
VLT 5001-5011 525-600 V VLT 5016-5062 525-600 V

48 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 54 Compact IP 00/NEMA 1 (IP 20)

VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V
VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V

Compact IP 54
Installation

VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 49

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 20 Compact IP 21/IP 54 with disconnect and fuse

VLT 5072-5102 380-500 V VLT 5122-5152 380-500 V, VLT 5042-5152 525-690 V
NOTE: The RFI switch has no function in the 525-690 V drives

Compact IP 54 Compact IP 00 without disconnect and fuse

VLT 5072-5102 380-500 V VLT 5122-5152 380-500 V, VLT 5042-5152 525-690 V

50 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 21/IP 54 with disconnect and fuse Compact IP 00 with disconnect and fuse
VLT 5202-5302 380-500 V, VLT 5202-5352 525-690 V VLT 5352-5552 380-500 V, VLT 5402-5602 525-690 V
Note: The RFI switch has no function in the 525-690 V drives

Compact IP 00 with disconnect and fuse Compact IP 00 without disconnect and fuse
VLT 5202-5302 380-500 V, VLT 5202-5352 525-690 V VLT 5352-5552 380-500 V, VLT 5402-5602 525-690 V
Note: The RFI switch has no function in the 525-690 V drives
Installation

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 51

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 21/IP 54 without disconnect and fuse

VLT 5352-5552 380-500 V, VLT 5402-5602, 525-690 V
Note: The RFI switch has no function in the 525-690 V drives.

Position of earth terminals, IP 00 Position of earth terminals, IP 21/ IP 54

52 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation, power cables

Bookstyle Compact IP 54
VLT 5001-5006 200-240 V VLT 5001-5006 200-240 V
VLT 5001-5011 380-500 V VLT 5001-5011 380-500 V
VLT 5001-5011 525-600 V

Compact IP 00/NEMA 1 Compact IP 54

VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V VLT 5008-5027 200-240 V
VLT 5016-5102 380-500 V VLT 5016-5062 380-500 V
VLT 5016-5062 525-600 V
Installation

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 53

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 00/NEMA 1 (IP20) Compact IP 54

VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V

Compact IP 54
VLT 5072-5102 380-500 V

54 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation - control cables

All terminals for the control cables are located under
the protective cover of the frequency converter. The
protective cover (see drawing) can be removed by
means of a pointed object - a screwdriver or similar.

No. Function
12, 13 Voltage supply to digital inputs For the 24
V DC to be usable for the digital inputs,
switch 4 on the control card must be
closed. position "ON".

16-33 Digital inputs/encoder inputs

20 Ground for digital inputs

39 Ground for analogue/digital outputs

42, 45 Analogue/digital outputs for indicating

frequency, reference, current and torque

Once the protective cover has been removed, the

50 Supply voltage to potentiometer and
actual EMC-correct installation can start. See drawings
thermistor 10 V DC
in the section, EMC correct installation.

53, 54 Analogue reference input, voltage 0 - ±10

V
Tightening-up torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
Screw size: M3 55 Ground for analogue reference inputs
See section earthing of braided screened/armoured
control cables.
60 Analogue reference input, current 0/4-20
mA

61 Termination for serial communication. See

section Bus connection. This terminal is
normally not to be used.

68, 69 RS 485 interface, serial communication.

Where the frequency converter is
connected to a bus, switches 2 and 3
(switches 1- 4) must be closed on the first
and the last frequency converter. On the
Installation

remaining frequency converters, switches

2 and 3 must be open. The factory setting
is closed (position "ON").

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 55

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation

Conversion of analogue inputs

Current input signal to voltage input

0-20 mA 0-10 V Connect 510 ohms resistor between input terminal 53 and 55
4-20 mA 2-10 V (terminal 54 and 55) and adjust minimum and maximum values in
parameters 309 and 310 (parameters 312 and 313).

56 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation - bus connection

The serial bus connection in accordance with the RS ■ DIP Switches 1-4
485 (2-conductor) norm is connected to terminals The dipswitch is located on the control card.
68/69 of the frequency converter (signals P and N). It is used for serial communication, terminals 68 and 69.
Signal P is the positive potential (TX+,RX+), while The switching position shown is the factory setting.
signal N is the negative potential (TX-,RX-).

If more than one frequency converter is to be connected

to a given master, use parallel connections.
Switch 1 has no function.
Switches 2 and 3 are used for terminating an RS
485 interface, serial communication.
Switch 4 is used for separating the common potential
for the internal 24 V DC supply from the common
potential of the external 24 V DC supply.

NB!:
Please note that when Switch 4 is in position
"OFF", the external 24 V DC supply is galvanically
isolated from the frequency converter.

In order to avoid potential equalizing currents in the

screen, the cable screen can be earthed via terminal
61, which is connected to the frame via an RC-link.

Bus termination
The bus must be terminated by a resistor network
at both ends. For this purpose, set switches 2
and 3 on the control card for "ON".

Installation

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 57

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation - EMC precautions • Avoid using unscreened/unarmoured motor or

The following is a guideline to good engineering control cables inside cabinets housing the drive(s),
practice, when installing drives. Following these whenever this can be avoided.
guidelines is advised, where compliance with EN • An uninterrupted high frequency connection
61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 55011 or EN 61800-3 between the frequency converter and the motor
First environment is required. If the installation is in EN units is required for IP54 units.
61800-3 Second environment, i.e. industrial networks
or in an installation that has its own transformer, it The illustration shows an example of an EMC-correct
is acceptable to deviate from these guidelines. It is electrical installation of an IP 20 frequency converter;
however not recommended. See also CE labelling, the frequency converter has been fitted in an installation
Emission and EMC test results under special conditions cabinet with an output contactor and connected to a
in the Design Guide for further details. PLC, which in this example is installed in a separate
cabinet. In IP 54 units and VLT 5032-5052, 200-240
Good engineering practice to ensure EMC-correct V in IP20/IP21/NEMA 1 enclosure screened cables
electrical installation: are connected by using EMC conduits to ensure
proper EMC performance. See illustration. Other
• Use only braided screened/armoured motor cables
ways of making the installation may have as good
and braided screened/armoured control cables. The
an EMC performance, provided the above guide
screen should provide a minimum coverage of 80%.
lines to engineering practice are followed.
The screen material must be metal, not limited to
but typically copper, aluminium, steel or lead. There Please note, that when the installation is not carried
are no special requirements for the mains cable. through according to the guideline as well as when
• Installations using rigid metal conduits are not unscreened cables and control wires are used, some
required to use screened cable, but the motor emission requirements are not complied with, although
cable must be installed in conduit separate from the immunity requirements are fulfilled. See the section
the control and mains cables. Full connection EMC test results in the Design Guide for further details.
of the conduit from the drive to the motor is
required. The EMC performance of flexible
conduits varies a lot and information from the
manufacturer must be obtained.
• Connect the screen/armour/conduit to earth
at both ends for motor cables as well as for
control cables. In some cases, it is not possible
to connect the screen in both ends. In these
cases, it is important to connect the screen at the
frequency converter. See also Earthing of braided
screened/armoured control cables.
• Avoid terminating the screen/armour with
twisted ends (pigtails). Such a termination
increases the high frequency impedance of the
screen, which reduces its effectiveness at high
frequencies. Use low impedance cable clamps
or EMC cable glands instead.
• It is important to ensure good electrical contact
between the mounting plate on which the frequency
converter is installed and the metal chassis of the
frequency converter. However, this does not apply
to IP 54 units as they are designed for wall-mounting
and VLT 5122-5552 380-500 V, 5042-5602 525-690
V and VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V in IP20/NEMA
1 enclosure and IP 54/NEMA 12 enclosure.
• Use starwashers and galvanically conductive
installation plates to secure good electrical
connections for IP00 and IP20 installations.

58 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Installation

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 59

 VLT® 5000 Series

60 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Use of emc-correct cables

Braided screened/armoured cables are recommended
Transfer impedance (ZT) can be assessed on the
to optimise EMC immunity of the control cables and
basis of the following factors:
the EMC emission from the motor cables.
- The conductibility of the screen material.
The ability of a cable to reduce the in- and outgoing - The contact resistance between the individual
radiation of electric noise depends on the transfer screen conductors.
impedance (ZT). The screen of a cable is normally - The screen coverage, i.e. the physical area
designed to reduce the transfer of electric noise; of the cable covered by the screen - often
however, a screen with a lower transfer impedance stated as a percentage value.
(ZT) value is more effective than a screen with a - Screen type, i.e. braided or twisted pattern.
higher transfer impedance (ZT).

Aluminium-clad with copper wire.

Twisted copper wire or armoured steel wire cable.

Single-layer braided copper wire with varying percentage screen

coverage.
This is the typical Danfoss reference cable.

Double-layer braided copper wire.

Twin layer of braided copper wire with a magnetic,

screened/armoured intermediate layer.

Cable that runs in copper tube or steel tube.

Lead cable with 1.1 mm wall thickness.

Transfer impedance (ZT) is rarely stated by

cable manufacturers, but it is often possible to
estimate transfer impedance (ZT) by assessing
the physical design of the cable.
Installation

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 61

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Electrical installation - earthing of control cables

Generally speaking, control cables must be braided Correct earthing
screened/armoured and the screen must be Control cables and cables for serial communication
connected by means of a cable clamp at both must be fitted with cable clamps at both ends to
ends to the metal cabinet of the unit. ensure the best possible electrical contact

The drawing below indicates how correct earthing is Wrong earthing

carried out and what to be done if in doubt. Do not use twisted cable ends (pigtails), since these
increase the screen impedance at high frequencies.

Protection with respect to earth potential

between PLC and VLT
If the earth potential between the frequency converter
and the PLC (etc.) is different, electric noise may
occur that will disturb the whole system. This
problem can be solved by fitting an equalising cable,
to be placed next to the control cable. Minimum
cable cross-section: 16 mm 2.

For 50/60 Hz earth loops

If very long control cables are used, 50/60 Hz earth
loops may occur. This problem can be solved by
connecting one end of the screen to earth via a
100nF capacitor (keeping leads short).

Cables for serial communication

Low-frequency noise currents between two frequency
converters can be eliminated by connecting one end of
the screen to terminal 61. This terminal is connected
to earth via an internal RC link. It is recommended
to use twisted-pair cables to reduce the differential
mode interference between the conductors.

62 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ RFI switch
Mains supply isolated from earth: Position of RFI switches
If the frequency converter is supplied from an isolated
mains source ( IT mains) or TT/TN-S mains with
grounded leg, the RFI switch is recommended to
be turned off (OFF)1). For further reference, see
IEC 364-3. In case optimum EMC performance is
needed, parallel motors are connected or the motor
cable length is above 25 m, it is recommended
to set the switch in ON position.
In OFF position, the internal RFI capacities (filter
capacitors) between the chassis and the intermediate
circuit are cut off to avoid damage to the intermediate
circuit and to reduce the earth capacity currents
(according to IEC 61800-3).
Please also refer to the application note VLT on
IT mains, MN.90.CX.02. It is important to use
isolation monitors that are capable for use together
with power electronics (IEC 61557-8). Bookstyle IP 20
VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
NB!:
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
The RFI switch is not to be operated with
mains connected to the unit. Check that
the mains supply has been disconnected
before operating the RFI switch.

NB!:
Open RFI switch is only allowed at factory
set switching frequencies.

NB!:
The RFI switch connects the capacitors
galvanically to earth.

The red switches are operated by means of e.g. a

screwdriver. They are set in the OFF position when
they are pulled out and in ON position when they
are pushed in. Factory setting is ON.
Compact IP 20/NEMA 1
VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V
VLT 5001 - 5011 525 - 600 V

Mains supply connected to earth:

The RFI switch must be in ON position in order for the
frequency converter to comply with the EMC standard.
Installation

1) Not possible with 5042-5602, 525-690 V units.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 63

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 20/NEMA 1
VLT 5008 200 - 240 V
VLT 5016 - 5022 380 - 500 V Compact IP 20/NEMA 1
VLT 5016 - 5022 525 - 600 V VLT 5022 - 5027 200 - 240 V
VLT 5042 - 5102 380 - 500 V
VLT 5042 - 5062 525 - 600 V

Compact IP 20/NEMA 1
VLT 5011 - 5016 200 - 240 V Compact IP 54
VLT 5027 - 5032 380 - 500 V VLT 5001 - 5006 200 - 240 V
VLT 5027 - 5032 525 - 600 V VLT 5001 - 5011 380 - 500 V

64 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Compact IP 54
VLT 5008 - 5011 200 - 240 V
VLT 5016 - 5027 380 - 500 V
Compact IP 54
VLT 5072 - 5102 380 - 500 V

Compact IP 54 All enclosure types

VLT 5016 - 5027 200 - 240 V VLT 5122-5552 380 - 500 V
VLT 5032 - 5062 380 - 500 V
Installation

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 65

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Control panel (LCP)

The front of the frequency converter features a
control panel - LCP (Local Control Panel), which
makes up a complete interface for operation and
monitoring of the VLT 5000 Series.
The control panel is detachable and can - as an
alternative - be installed up to 3 metres away from
the frequency converter, e.g. on a front panel,
by means of a mounting kit option.
The functions of the control panel can be
divided into three groups:

• display
• keys for changing program parameters
• keys for local operation

All data are indicated by means of a 4-line

alpha-numeric display, which in normal operation
is able to show 4 measurements and 3 operating
conditions continuously. During programming, all the
information required for quick, effective parameter
Setup of the frequency converter will be displayed. As
a supplement to the display, there are three LEDs for
voltage (power or 24 V external), warning and alarm.
All program parameters of the frequency converter can
be changed immediately from the control panel, unless
this function has been blocked via parameter 018.

■ Control panel - display

4th line is used in operating status for showing a
The LCD-display has rear lighting and a total of 4
status text or in data change mode for showing the
alpha-numeric lines together with a box that shows
mode or value of the selected parameter.
the direction of rotation (arrow) and the chosen
Setup as well as the Setup in which programming An arrow indicates the direction of rotation of the
is taking place if that is the case. motor. Furthermore, the Setup which has been
selected as the Active Setup in parameter 004 is
175ZA443.10

shown. When programming another Setup than

1st line 12345678901234567890 the Active Setup, the number of the Setup which
is being programmed will appear to the right. This
2nd line

3rd line
12345678
12345678901234567890
SETUP

1 second Setup number will flash.

■ Control panel - LEDs

4th line 12345678901234567890 At the bottom of the control panel is a red alarm LED and
a yellow warning LED, as well as a green voltage LED.

1st line shows up to 3 measurements continuously

in normal operating status or a text which If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm
explains the 2 nd line. and/or warning LED lights up together with a status
and alarm text on the control panel.
2nd line shows a measurement with related
unit continuously, regardless of status (except The voltage LED is activated when the frequency
in the case of alarm/warning). converter receives voltage, or 24 V external supply; at
the same time the rear lighting of the display will be on.
3rd line is normally blank and is used in the menu
mode to show the selected parameter number or
parameter group number and name.

66 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Control panel - control keys

The control keys are divided into functions. This means
that the keys between display and indicator lamps [OK] is used for confirming a change of the
are used for parameter Setup, including choice of parameter selected.
display indication during normal operation.
[+/-] is used for selecting parameter and
for changing the chosen parameter or for

frequency converter
changing the read out in line 2.

Operation of the
[<>] is used for selecting group and to
move the cursor when changing numerical
parameters.
[STOP / RESET] is used for stopping
the motor connected or for resetting the
frequency converter after a drop-out (trip).
Keys for local control are found under the Can be selected via parameter 014 to be
indicator LEDs. active or inactive. If stop is activated, line 2
will flash, and [START] must be activated.
[JOG] overrides the output frequency to
a preset frequency while the key is kept
down. Can be selected via parameter 015
to be active or inactive.
■ Control key functions [FWD / REV] changes the direction of
rotation of the motor, which is indicated
[DISPLAY / STATUS] is used for selecting by means of the arrow on the display
the mode of display or for changing back although only in Local. Can be selected via
to Display mode from either the Quick parameter 016 to be active or inactive.
menu mode or the Menu mode.
[QUICK MENU] is used for programming [START] is used for starting the frequency
the parameters that belong under the converter after stop via the "Stop" key. Is
Quick menu mode. It is possible to switch always active, but cannot override a stop
directly between Quick menu mode and command given via the terminal strip.
Menu mode.
[MENU] is used for programming all
NB!:
parameters. It is possible to switch directly
If the keys for local control have been
between Menu mode and Quick menu
selected as active, they will remain active
mode.
both when the frequency has been set for
[CHANGE DATA ] is used for changing
Local Control and for Remote Control via parameter
the parameter selected either in the Menu
002, although with the exception of [Fwd/rev],
mode or the Quick menu mode.
which is only active in Local operation.
[CANCEL] is used if a change of the
selected parameter is not to be carried out. NB!:
If no external stop function has been selected
and the [Stop] key has been selected as
inactive, the motor can be started and can only
be stopped by disconnecting the voltage to the motor.

■ Control panel - display read-outs

The display read-out state can be varied - see the list
below - depending on whether the frequency converter
is in normal operation or is being programmed.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 67

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Display mode Operating variable: Unit:

In normal operation, up to 4 different operating Reference [%]
variables can be indicated continuously: 1.1 and 1.2 Reference [unit]
Feedback [unit]
and 1.3 and 2, and in line 4 the present operating
Frequency [Hz]
status or alarms and warnings that have arisen. Frequency x scaling [-]

195NA113.10
Motor current [A]
VAR 1.1 VAR 1.2 VAR 1.3
Torque [%]

VAR 2 SETUP

1
Power
Power
Output energy
[kW]
[HP]
[kWh]
Motor voltage [V]
STATUS DC-link voltage [V]
Motor thermal load [%]
VLT thermal load [%]
Hours run [Hours]
■ Display mode - selection of read-outstate Input status, dig. Input [Binary code]
Input status, analogue terminal 53 [V]
There are three options in connection with the Input status, analogue terminal 54 [V]
choice of read-out state in the Display mode - I, II Input status, analogue terminal 60 [mA]
and III. The choice of read-out state determines the Pulse reference [Hz]
number of operating variables read out. External reference [%]
Status word [Hex]
Read-out state: I: II: III: Brake effect/2 min. [kW]
Line 1 Description Data value for Description for Brake effect/sec. [kW]
for operating 3 operating 3 operating Heat sink temp. [ºC]
Alarm word [Hex]
variable in line 2 variables in line variables in line
Control word [Hex]
1 1 Warning word 1 [Hex]
Extended status word [Hex]
Communication option card warning [Hex]
The table below gives the units linked to the variables RPM [min-1]
in the first and second line of the display. RPM x scaling [-]
LCP Display text [-]

Operating variables 1.1 and 1.2 and 1.3 in the first

line, and operating variable 2 in the second line are
selected via parameter 009, 010, 011 and 012.

• Read-out state I:
This read-out state is standard after starting
up or after initialisation.

FREQUENCY

50.0 Hz
MOTOR IS RUNNING

Line 2 gives the data value of an operating variable with

related unit, and line 1 provides a text which explains
line 2, cf. table. In the example, Frequency has
been selected as variable via parameter 009. During
normal operation another variable can immediately
be read out by using the [+/-] keys.

• Read-out state II:

Switching between read-out states I and II is effected
by pressing the [DISPLAY / STATUS] key.

68 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

parameters is quite large. Also, this series offers

24.3% 30.2% 13.8A a choice between two programming modes - a
Menu mode and a Quick menu mode.
50.0 Hz The former provides access to all parameters. The
latter takes the user through a few parameters
MOTOR IS RUNNING which make it possible in most cases to start
operating the frequency converter.

frequency converter
Regardless of the mode of programming, a change

Operation of the
In this state, data values for four operating values of a parameter will take effect and be visible both in
are shown at the same time, giving the related the Menu mode and in the Quick menu mode.
unit, cf. table. In the example, Reference, Torque,
Current and Frequency are selected as variables
in the first and second line. ■ Structure for the Quick menu mode versus
the Menu mode
• Read-out state III:
In addition to having a name, each parameter is linked
This read-out state can be held as long as the
up with a number which is the same regardless of
[DISPLAY/STATUS] key is pressed. When the
the programming mode. In the Menu mode, the
key is released, the system switches back to
parameters are divided into groups, with the first digit
Read-out state II, unless the key is pressed for
of the parameter number (from the left) indicating the
less that approx. 1 sec., in which case the system
group number of the parameter in question.
always reverts to Read-out state I.
• The quick menu takes the user through a number
REF% TORQUE CURR A of parameters that may be enough to get the
motor to run nearly optimally, if the factory setting
50.0 Hz SETUP

1 for the other parameters takes the desired control

functions into account, as well as the configuration
MOTOR IS RUNNING of signal inputs/outputs (control terminals).
• The Menu mode makes it possible to select
and change all parameters at the user’s option.
This is where parameter names and units for operating However, some parameters will be "missing",
variables in the first and second line are given - depending on the choice of configuration (parameter
operating variable 2 remains unchanged. 100), e.g. open loop hides all the P.I.D. parameters.

• Display state IV:

This display state can be produced during operation
■ Quick Setup
if another setup is to be changed without stopping
The Quick Setup starts with pressing the [QUICK
the frequency converter. This function is activated
MENU] key, which brings out the following
in parameter 005, Programming Setup.
read-out on the display:

24.3% 30.2% 13.8A

QUICK MENU 1 OF 13
50.0 Hz 50.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
MOTOR IS RUNNING
ENGLISH

The selected programming setup number will flash At the bottom of the display, the parameter number
to the right of the active setup. and name are given together with the status/value
of the first parameter under Quick Setup. The first
time the [Quick Menu] key is pressed after the
■ Parameter Setup
The VLT 5000 Series can be used for practically
all assignments, which is why the number of

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 69

 VLT® 5000 Series

unit has been switched on, the read-outs always Group no. Parameter group:
start at pos. 1 - see table below.
0 Operation & Display
1 Load & Motor
2 References & Limits
■ Parameter selection
3 Inputs & Outputs
The selection of parameter is effected by means of the
4 Special functions
[+/-] keys. The following parameters are accessible:
5 Serial communication
Pos.: No.: Parameter: Unit: 6 Technical functions
1 001 Language 7 Application Options
2 102 Motor output [kW]] 8 Fieldbus Profile
3 103 Motor voltage [V] 9 Fieldbus Communication
4 104 Motor frequency [Hz]
5 105 Motor current [A]
When the desired parameter group has been
6 106 Rated motor speed [rpm] selected, each parameter can be chosen by
7 107 Automatic motor adaptation, means of the [+/-] keys:
AMA
8 204 Minimum reference [Hz]
FREQUENCY
9 205 Maximum reference [Hz]
10 207 Ramp-up time 1 [sec.] 50.0 Hz
11 208 Ramp-down time 1 [sec.] 001 LANGUAGE
12 002 Local/remote control ENGLISH
13 003 Local reference

The 3rd line of the display shows the parameter

number and name, while the status/value of the
selected parameter are shown in line 4.
■ Menu mode
The Menu mode is started by pressing the [MENU] key,
which produces the following read-out on the display:
■ Changing data
Regardless of whether a parameter has been selected
FREQUENCY
under the Quick menu or the Menu mode, the
50.0 Hz procedure for changing data is the same.
Pressing the [CHANGE DATA] key gives access to
0 KEYB.&DISPLAY
changing the selected parameter, following which the
underlining in line 4 will flash on the display.
The procedure for changing data depends on
Line 3 on the display shows the parameter whether the selected parameter represents a
group number and name. numerical data value or a text value.

■ Parameter selection ■ Changing a text value

In the Menu mode the parameters are divided If the selected parameter is a text value, the text value
into groups. Selection of parameter group is is changed by means of the [+/-] keys.
effected by means of the [<>] keys.
The following parameter groups are accessible: FREQUENCY

50.0 Hz
001 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH

70 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

The bottom display line shows the text value that will be The chosen digit is indicated by the digit flashing. The
entered (saved) when acknowledgement is given [OK]. bottom display line shows the data value that will be
entered (saved) when signing off with [OK].

■ Change of group of numeric data values

If the chosen parameter represents a numeric ■ Changing of data value, step-by-step
data value, the chosen data value is changed Certain parameters can be changed step by step

frequency converter
Operation of the
by means of the [+/-] keys. or infinitely variably. This applies to Motor power
(parameter 102), Motor voltage (parameter 103)
and Motor frequency (parameter 104).
FREQUENCY
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
50.0 HZ
102 MOTOR POWER
SETUP

1
data values and as numeric data values infinitely variably.

0.37 KW
■ Read out and programming of indexed parameters
Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
Parameter 615 - 617 contain a historical log which
FREQUENCY
can be read out. Choose the actual parameter, press
50.0 HZ
102 MOTOR POWERSETUP
SETUP

1
the [CHANGE DATA] key and use the [+] and [-]
keys to scroll through the log of values. During the
1 read out line 4 of the display will flash.
0.55 KW
If a bus option is mounted in the drive, the
programming of parameter 915 - 916 needs to be
The chosen data value is indicated by the digit flashing.
carried through in the following way:
The bottom display line shows the data value that will
be entered (saved) when signing off with [OK]. Choose the actual parameter, press the [CHANGE
DATA] key and use the [+] and [-] keys to scroll through
the different indexed values. To change the value of
■ Infinitely variable change of numericdata value the parameter, select the indexed value and press the
If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data [CHANGE DATA] key. Using the [+] and [-] keys the
value, a digit is first selected by means of the [<>] keys. value to be changed will flash. To accept the new
setting, press [OK], to abort, press [CANCEL].

FREQUENCY

50.0 Hz SETUP

1 ■ Initialisation to factory setting

The frequency converter can be initialised to
130 START FREQUENCY
09.0 HZ factory settings in two ways.

Initialisation by parameter 620

- Recommended initialisation
Then the chosen digit is changed infinitely variably
by means of the [+/-] keys: • Select parameter 620
• Press [CHANGE]
FREQUENCY • Select "Initialisation"
• Press the [OK] key
50.0 Hz SETUP

1 • Cut off the mains supply and wait until

the display turns off.
130 START FREQUENCY
10.0 HZ • Reconnect the mains supply - the frequency
converter is now reset.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 71

 VLT® 5000 Series

This parameter initialises all except:

500 Serial communication address
501 Baud rate for serial communication
601-605 Operating data
615-617 Fault logs

Manual initialisation

• Disconnect from mains and wait until the

display turns off.
• Press the following keys at the same time:
[Display/status]
[Change data]
[OK]
• Reconnecting the mains supply while
pressing the keys.
• Release the keys
• The frequency converter has now been
programmed for the factory setting.

This parameter initialises all except:

600-605 Operating data

NB!:
Settings for serial communication and
fault logs are reset.

72 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Menu structure
DISPLAY MODE

VAR 1.1 VAR 1.2 VAR 1.3

VAR 2
▲

frequency converter
Operation of the
STATUS

▲ ▲

MENU MODE QUICK MENU MODE

FREQUENCY QUICK MENU 1 OF 13

50.0 HZ 50.0 HZ
▲

0 KEYB.&DISPLAY 001 LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

Choice of Choice of
parameter group

DATA MODE

FREQUENCY

50.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
▲ ▲

▲
DATA CHANGE MODE DATA CHANGE MODE

FREQUENCY QUICK MENU 1 OF 13

50.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
50.0 HZ
001 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH Choice of
ENGLISH
data value

175ZA446.11

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 73

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Connection examples ■ Setup change

■ Two wire start/stop

- Selection of setup using terminals 32 and 33.

Parameter 306 =Selection of setup, lsb [10]
Parameter 307 = Selection of setup, msb [10]
Parameter 004 = Multi-setup [5].
- Start/stop using terminal 18.
Parameter 302 = Start [1]
- Quick-stop using terminal 27. ■ Digital speed up/down
Parameter 304 = Coasting stop inverted [0]

■ Pulse start/stop

- Speed up and down using terminals 32 and 33.

Parameter 306 = Speed up [9]
Parameter 307 = Speed down [9]
Parameter 305 = Freeze reference [7].

- Stop inverted by means of terminal 16. ■ Potentiometer reference

Parameter 300 = Stop inverted [2]
- Pulse start using terminal 18.
Parameter 302 = Pulse start [2]
- Jog by means of terminal 29.
Parameter 305 = Jog [5]

Parameter 308 = Reference [1]

Parameter 309 = Terminal 53, min. scaling
Parameter 310 = Terminal 53, max. scaling

74 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Two-wire transmitter

Parameter 314 = Reference [1], Feedback [2]

Parameter 315 = Terminal 60, min. scaling
Parameter 316 = Terminal 60, max. scaling

■ Current reference with speed feedback

configuration
Application
Parameter 100 = Speed control, closed loop
Parameter 308 = Feedback [2]
Parameter 309 = Terminal 53, min. scaling
Parameter 310 = Terminal 53, max. scaling
Parameter 314 = Reference [1]
Parameter 315 = Terminal 60, min. scaling
Parameter 316 = Terminal 60, max. scaling

■ Encoder connection

Parameter 306 = Encoder input B [24]

Parameter 307 = Encoder input A [25]

If an encoder is connected that only has one

output to Encoder input A [25], Encoder input B
[24] must be set to No function [0].

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 75

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Application configuration There is a choice of the following configurations:

Using this parameter enables the choice of a
configuration (setting) of the frequency converter - Speed control, open loop
that fits the application in which the frequency - Speed control, closed loop
converter is to be active. - Process control, closed loop
- Torque control, open loop
NB!: - Torque control, speed feedback
First, the motor nameplate date must be The selection of special motor characteristics can be
set in parameters 102-106. combined with any application configuration.

■ Setting of parameters signals is required (the internal slip compensation

Select Speed control, open loop if a normal is operating) from motor or unit.
speed adjustment without external feedback Set the following parameters in order shown:
Speed control, open loop:
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Speed control, open loop [0]
200 Output frequency range/direction
201 Output frequency low limit Only if [0] or [2] in par. 200
202 Output frequency high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference

Select Speed control, closed loop if the application Speed control, open loop is not sufficient or a
has a feedback signal and the accuracy in full holding torque is required.
Set the following parameters in order shown:
Speed control, closed loop (PID):
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Speed control, closed loop [1]
200 Output frequency range/direction Output frequency low limit
201 Output frequency low limit
202 Output frequency high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
414 Minimum feedback Only if [0] or [2] in par. 200
415 Maximum feedback
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference
417 Speed PID proportional gain
418 Speed PID integration time
419 Speed PID differentiation time
420 Speed PID diff. gain limit
421 Speed PID lowpass filter time

Please be aware that the encoder loss function

(parameter 346) will be active when parameter 100
is set to Speed control, closed loop.

76 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Select Process control, closed loop if the application pressure, etc. Typical applications are pumps and fans.
has a feedback signal that is not directly related to Set the following parameters in the order shown:
motor speed (rpm/Hz), but units, such as temperature,
Process control, closed loop (Process PID):
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Process control, closed loop [3]
201 Output frequency low limit
202 Output frequency high limit
416 Process units Define the feedback and reference
input as described in the section
PID for process control.
203 Reference/feedback range
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference
414 Minimum feedback
415 Maximum feedback
437 Process PID normal/inverse

configuration
Application
438 Process PID anti-windup
439 Process PID start frequency
440 Process PID proportional gain
441 Process PID integration time
442 Process PID differentiation time Only used in high dynamic
applications
443 Process PID diff. gain limit
444 Process PID lowpass filter

Select Torque control, open loop if PI control is

required, to change the motor frequency in order
Torque control, open loop, is to be selected if the
to maintain the torque reference (Nm).
speed direction is not to be changed during operation;
This is relevant for winding and extrusion applications.
this means that either a positive or a negative
torque reference is used at all times.
Set the following parameters in order shown:
Torque control, open loop:
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Torque control, open loop [4]
200 Output frequency range/direction
201 Output frequency low limit
202 Output frequency high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference
414 Minimum feedback
415 Maximum feedback
433 Torque proportional gain
434 Torque integration time

Select Torque control, speed feedback, if an encoder

feedback signal is to be generated. This is relevant
in winder and extruder applications.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 77

 VLT® 5000 Series

Torque control, speed feedback, is selected if it is to Set the following parameters in order shown:
be possible to change the speed direction, while at
the same time maintaining the torque reference.
Torque control, speed feedback:
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
100 Configuration Torque control, speed feedback [5]
200 Output frequency, range/direction
201 Output frequency, low limit
202 Output frequency, high limit
203 Reference/feedback range
204 Minimum reference Only if [0] in par. 203
205 Maximum reference
414 Minimum feedback
415 Maximum feedback
306 Encoder feedback, input B [24]
307 Encoder feedback, input A [25]
329 Encoder feedback, pulse/rev
421 Speed PID low-pass filter time
448 Gear ratio
447 Torque regulation, speed feedback
449 Friction loss

After Torque control, speed feedback, has been 2. Start the motor with a positive torque reference and a
selected, the frequency converter should be calibrated positive direction of rotation. Read the torque gauge.
to ensure that the current torque equals the torque 3. Using the same torque reference, change the
of the frequency converter. For this to be ensured, direction of rotation from positive to negative.
a torque gauge must be fitted to the shaft so as to Read the torque and adjust it to the same
enable accurate adjustment of parameter 447, Torque level as for the positive torque reference and
compensation , and parameter 449, Friction loss. It is direction of rotation. This can be done by means
recommended to run an AMA before torque calibration. of parameter 449, Friction loss.
Proceed as follows before beginning to use the system: 4. Using a warm motor and approx. 50% load,
set parameter 447, Torque compensation, to
1. Fit a torque gauge to the shaft. match the torque gauge. The frequency converter
is now ready for operation.

Select Special motor characteristics if the synchronous motor, parallel motor operation or if
frequency converter is to be adapted to a slip- compensation is not required.
Set the following parameters in order shown:
Special motor characteristics:
Parame- Setting: Data value:
ter:
101 Torque characteristics Special motor characteristics [5] or [15]
432 + 431 F5 frequency/U5 voltage
430 + 429 F4 frequency/U4 voltage
428 + 427 F3 frequency/U3 voltage
426 + 425 F2 frequency/U2 voltage
424 + 423 F1 frequency/U1 voltage
422 U0 voltage

78 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Local and remote control functions/commands given via the control panel,
The frequency converter can be operated the digital inputs or the serial communication port
manually or remotely. The following is a list of the in the two situations (modes).

If parameter 002 is set to Local [1]:

On the LCP, the following keys can be used for local control:
Key: Parameter: Data value:

[STOP] 014 [1] Enable

[JOG] 015 [1] Enable
[RESET] 017 [1] Enable
[FWD/REV] 016 [1] Enable

Set parameter 013 for LCP control and open loop [1] or LCP control as parameter 100 [3]:

1. Local reference is set in parameter 003; can be changed via the "+/-" keys.
2. Reversing can be effected by means of the [FWD/REV] key.

Set parameter 013 for LCP digital control and open loop [2] or LCP digital control as parameter 100 [4]:

For the above parameter setting, it is now possible 10. Motor coasting stop via digital terminal 27.
to control the frequency converter as follows: 11. Reversing via digital terminal 19.
Digital inputs: 12. Choice of Setup, msb/speed up via digital
terminal 32.
1. Local reference set in parameter 003 can be 13. Choice of Setup, lsb/speed down via
changed via the "+/-" keys.

functions
Special
digital terminal 33.
2. Reset via digital terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33.
3. Stop inverse via digital terminal 16, 17, The serial communication port:
27, 29, 32 or 33.
4. Choice of Setup, lsb via digital terminal 16, 29 or 32. 1. Ramp 2
5. Choice of Setup, msb via digital terminal 17, 29 or 33. 2. Reset
6. Ramp 2 via digital terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33. 3. Choice of Setup, lsb
7. Quick-stop via digital terminal 27. 4. Choice of Setup, msb
8. DC braking via digital terminal 27. 5. Relay 01
9. Reset and motor coasting stop via digital terminal 27. 6. Relay 04

If parameter 002 is set to Remote control [0]:

Key: Parameter: Data value:
[STOP] 014 [1]
[JOG] 015 [1]
[RESET] 017 [1]

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 79

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Control with brake function

The function of the brake is to limit the voltage in
the intermediate circuit when the motor is acting
as a generator. This occurs, for example, when
the load drives the motor and the power enters the
intermediate circuit. The brake is built up in the
form of a chopper circuit with the connection of an
external brake resistor. Placing the brake resistor
externally offers the following advantages:
The maximum permissible load on the brake resistor is
- The brake resistor can be selected on the basis stated as a peak power at a given ED. The following
of the application in question. example and formula apply to VLT 5000 only. The
- The brake energy is dissipated outside the control peak power can be calculated on the basis of the
panel, i.e. where the energy can be utilized. highest brake resistance required for braking:
- The electronics of the frequency converter will not
be overheated if the brake resistor is overloaded. PPEAK = PMOTOR x MBR(%) x η MOTOR x ηVLT [W]

The brake is protected against short-circuiting of the where MBR(%) is a percentage of the rated torque.
brake resistor, and the brake transistor is monitored to The brake resistance is calculated as follows:
ensure that short-circuiting of the transistor is detected.
By using a relay/digital output, the latter can be used
for protecting the brake resistor against overloading in
connection with a fault in the frequency converter.
In addition, the brake makes it possible to read out the The brake resistance depends on the intermediate
momentary power and the mean power for the latest circuit voltage (UDC).
120 seconds, as well as to monitor that the power The brake will be active at the following voltages:
energizing does not exceed a monitoring limit selected • 3 x 200-220 V: 397 V
via parameter 402. In parameter 403 select the function • 3 x 380-500 V: 822 V
to be carried out when the power transmitted to the • 3 x 525-600 V: 943 V
brake resistor exceeds the limit set in parameter 402. • 3 x 525-690 V: 1084 V

NB!: NB!:
Monitoring of the brake power is not a The brake resistor used must be rated to 430
safety function; a thermal switch is required Volts, 850 Volts, 960 Volts or 1100 Volts, unless
for that purpose. The brake resistor circuit Danfoss brake resistors are used.
is not earth leakage protected.
RREC is the resistance recommended by Danfoss,
i.e. one that guarantees the user that the
■ Selection of Brake Resistor frequency converter is able to brake at the highest
In order to select the right brake resistor, it must braking torque (Mbr) of 160%.
be known how often to brake and by how much ηmotor is typically at 0.90, while ηVLT is typically at 0.98.
power braking is effected. RREC at 160% braking torque can be written as:

The resistor ED is an indication of the duty cycle

at which the resistor is working.

The resistor ED is calculated as follows:

where tb is the braking time in seconds and T

cycle is the total cycle time.

P motor in kW.

80 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

NB!:
NB!: If a short circuit in the brake transistor
The max. brake resistance selected should occurs, power dissipation in the brake resistor
have an ohmic value max. 10% lower than can only be prevented by using a mains
that recommended by Danfoss. If a brake switch or contactor to disconnect the mains for
resistor with a higher ohmic value is selected, the the frequency converter. (The contactor can be
160% braking torque will not be achieved and there controlled by the frequency converter).
is a risk that the frequency converter will cut out for
safety reasons. For further information, please consult
Brake Resistor Instruction MI.90.FX.YY.

■ References - single references

Using a single reference, only one active reference
signal is connected, either in the form of an external U/f on terminal 53,
or in the form of a preset (internal) reference. 54 or 60. f (pulse)
The external reference can be voltage, current, on terminal 17 or 29
frequency (pulse) or binary via the serial port. Two / External binary (serial port).
examples are given below of the way the single Single ref.
references are handled by VLT 5000 Series. \ Preset references (par.215-218)

Example 1:
External reference signal = 1 V (min) - 5 V (max)
Reference = 5 Hz - 50 Hz
Configuration (parameter 100) - Speed
control, open loop.

functions
Special
Setting:
Parameter: Setting: Data value:
100 Configuration Speed control, open loop [0]
308 Funct. of analogue input Reference [1]
309 Min. reference signal Min. 1V
310 Max. reference signal Max. 5V
203 Reference range Reference range Min - Max [0]
204 Minimum reference Min. reference 5 (Hz)
205 Maximum reference Max. reference 50 (Hz)
The following can be used: - Catch-up/slow-down via digital input terminals 16,17, 29, 32 or 33
- Freeze reference via digital input terminals 16,17, 29, 32 or 33.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 81

 VLT® 5000 Series

Example 2:
External reference signal = 0 V (min) - 10 V (max)
Reference = -50 Hz ccw - 50 Hz cw
Configuration (parameter 100) =Speed
control, open loop.

Setting:
Parameter: Setting: Data value:
100 Configuration Speed control, open loop [0]
308 Funct. of analogue input Reference [1]
309 Min. reference signal Min. 0V
310 Max. reference signal Max. 10 V
203 Reference range Reference range - Max - + Max [1]
205 Max. reference 100 Hz
214 Reference type Sum [0]
215 Preset reference -50%
200 Output frequency range/direction Both directions, 0-132 Hz [1]
- Catch-up/slow-down via digital input terminals 16,17, 29, 32
The following can be used:
or 33
- Freeze reference via digital input terminals 16,17, 29, 32 or 33.

82 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ References - multi-references
If the multi-reference is used, two or more reference
signals are connected, either in the form of external
or preset reference signals. Via parameter 214 these
can be combined in three different ways:

/ Sum
Multi-ref. – Relative
\ External/preset

In the following, each reference type (sum, relative

and external/preset) is shown:

SUM

functions
Special

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 83

 VLT® 5000 Series

RELATIVE

EXTERNAL/PRESET

84 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

References

functions
Special

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 85

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA

Automatic motor adaptation is a test algorithm How to perform an AMA
that measures the electrical motor parameters at
a motor standstill. This means that AMA itself 1. Press the [STOP/RESET] key
does not supply any torque. 2. Set motor nameplate data in parameters 102 to 106
AMA is useful when commissioning systems, where 3. Select whether a total [ENABLE (RS,XS)]or a reduced
the user wants to optimise the adjustment of the [ENABLE RS] AMA is required in parameter 107
frequency converter to the motor applied. This feature 4. Connect terminal 12 (24 VDC) to terminal
is used in particular where the factory setting does 27 on the control card
not adequately cover the motor in question. 5. Press the [START] key or connect terminal
There are two motor parameters that are of primary 18 (start) to terminal 12 (24 VDC) to start the
significance in automatic motor adaptation: the automatic motor adaptation.
stator resistance, Rs, and the reactance at normal Now the automatic motor adaptation goes through
magnetising level, Xs. Parameter 107 allows a choice four tests (for reduced AMA only the first two tests).
of automatic motor adaptation, with determination The different tests can be followed in the display as
of both Rs and Xs, or reduced automatic motor dots after the text WORKING in parameter 107:
adaptation with determination of only Rs. 1. Initial error check where nameplate data and physical
The duration of a total automatic motor adaptation errors are checked. Display shows WORKING.
varies from a few minutes on small motors to more 2. DC test where the stator resistance is estimated.
than 10 minutes on large motors. Display shows WORKING..
3. Transient test where the leakage inductance is
Limitations and preconditions:
estimated. Display shows WORKING...
• For AMA to be able to determine the motor 4. .AC test where the stator reactance is estimated.
parameters optimally, the correct nameplate data Display shows WORKING....
for the motor connected to the frequency converter
NB!:
must be entered in parameters 102 to 106.
AMA can only be carried out if there are
• For the best adjustment of the frequency
no alarms during tuning.
converter, it is recommended to carry out AMA
on a cold motor. Repeated AMA runs may lead
Discontinue AMA
to a heating of the motor that will result in an
increase of the stator resistance, Rs. If the automatic motor adaptation is to be discontinued,
• AMA can only be carried out if the rated motor press the [STOP/RESET] key or disconnect
current is minimum 35% of the rated output terminal 18 from terminal 12.
current of the frequency converter. AMA can be
carried out up to one oversize motor. The automatic motor adaptation ends up with one
• If a LC filter is inserted between the frequency of the following messages after the test:
converter and the motor, it will only be possible
Warnings and alarm messages
to carry out a reduced test. If an overall
setting is required, remove the LC filter while ALARM 21
running a total AMA. After completion of the Auto-optimisation OK
AMA reinsert the LC filter. Press the [STOP/RESET] key or disconnect terminal 18
• If motors are coupled in parallel only use from terminal 12. This alarm indicates that the AMA is
reduced AMA if any. OK and that the drive is correctly adapted to the motor.
• When using synchronous motors it is only
possible to make a reduced AMA. ALARM 22
• Long motor cables can have an effect on the Auto-optimisation not OK
implementation of the AMA function if their resistance [AUTO MOTOR ADAPT OK]
is bigger than the stator resistance of the motor. A fault has been found during automatic motor
adaptation. Press the [STOP/RESET] key or disconnect
terminal 18 from terminal 12. Check the possible cause
to the fault related to the alarm message given. The
figure after the text is the error code, which can be
seen in the fault log in parameter 615. Automatic motor
adaptation does not update parameters. You may
choose to run a reduced automatic motor adaptation.

86 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

CHECK P.103,105 [0]

[AUTO MOT ADAPT FAIL] Parameter 102, WARNING 39 - 42
103 or 105 has a wrong setting. Correct the A fault have been encountered during automatic
setting and start AMA all over. motor adaptation. Check the possible fault causes
in accordance with the warning message. Press
LOW P.105 [1]
the [CHANGE DATA key and select "CONTINUE"
The motor is too small for AMA to be carried out.
if AMA is to continue despite the warning or press
If AMA is to be enabled, the rated motor current
the [STOP/RESET] key or disconnect terminal 18
(parameter 105) must be higher than 35% of the rated
from terminal 12 to discontinue AMA.
output current of the frequency converter.
WARNING: 39
ASYMMETRICAL IMPEDANCE [2]
CHECK P.104,106
AMA has detected an asymmetrical impedance
The setting of parameter 102, 104 or 106
in the motor connected to the system. The
is probably wrong. Check the setting and
motor could be defective.
choose ‘Continue’ or ‘Stop’.
MOTOR TOO BIG [3]
WARNING: 40
The motor connected to the system is too big for
CHECK P.103,105
AMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter
The setting of parameter 102, 103 or 105
102 does not match the motor used.
is probably wrong. Check the setting and
MOTOR TOO SMALL [4] choose ‘Continue’ or ‘Stop’.
The motor connected to the system is too small for
WARNING: 41
AMA to be carried out. The setting in parameter
MOTOR TOO BIG
102 does not match the motor used.
The motor used is probably too big for AMA to
TIME OUT [5] be carried out. The setting in parameter 102
AMA fails because of noisy measuring signals. Try to may not match the motor. Check the motor
start AMA all over a number of times, until AMA is and choose ‘Continue’ or ‘Stop’.

functions
Special
carried out. Please note that repeated AMA runs may
WARNING: 42
heat the motor to a level where the stator resistance RS
MOTOR TOO SMALL
is increased. In most cases, however, this is not critical.
The motor used is probably too small for AMA
INTERRUPTED BY USER [6] to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102
AMA has been interrupted by the user. may not match the motor. Check the motor
and choose ‘Continue’ or ‘Stop’.
INTERNAL FAULT [7]
An internal fault has occurred in the frequency
converter. Contact your Danfoss supplier.

LIMIT VALUE FAULT [8]

The parameter values found for the motor are
outside the acceptable range within which the
frequency converter is able to work.

MOTOR ROTATES [9]

The motor shaft rotates. Make sure that the
load is not able to make the motor shaft rotate.
Then start AMA all over.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 87

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Mechanical brake control start until the output current is above the level selected
For hoisting applications, it is necessary to be able in parameter 223 Warning: Low Current.
to control an electro-magnetic brake. During stop mechanical brake is released until the
For controlling the brake, a relay output (01 or frequency is below the level selected in parameter
04) is required. This output must be kept closed 225 Warning: Low frequency.
(voltage-free) during the time when the frequency Notice by Extended mechanical brake control [34] that
converter is not able to ‘hold’ the motor, e.g. because the brake does not close if the output current gets
of too high load. In parameter 323 or 326 (relay under parameter 223 Warning: Low current.
outputs 01, 04), select Mechanical brake control Nor does a current low level warning appear.
[32] or Extended mechanical brake control [34] for
applications with an electro-magnetic brake. In extended mechanical brake mode an overcurrent
During start/stop and ramp-down, the output trip (alarm 13) can be reset by an externally reset.
current is monitored. If Mechanical brake control If the frequency converter is brought into an alarm
[32] is selected and the current is below the level condition or an overcurrent or overvoltage situation,
selected in parameter 223 Warning: Low current, the the mechanical brake will immediately cut in.
mechanical brake is closed (voltage-free).
As a point of departure, a current can be selected NB!:
which is approx. 70% of the magnetising current. The application shown is only for hoisting
Parameter 225 Warning: Low frequency states without counterweight.
the frequency during ramp-down at which the
mechanical brake is to close again.

If Extended mechanical brake control [34] is selected

the mechanical brake is closed (voltage-free) during

Control of mechanical brake:

Parameter: Setting: Data value:
323 Relay 01 or par. 326 relay 04 Mechanical brake control [32]
323 Relay 01 or par. 326 relay 04 Extended mechanical brake control [34]
223 Warning: Low current approx. 70% of magnetising current1)
225 Warning: Low frequency 3-5 Hz 2)
122 Function at stop Pre-magnetisation [3]
120 Start delay time 0.1-0.3 sec.
121 Start function Start frequency/voltage clockwise3) [3]
130 Start frequency Set to slip frequency
The voltage must be corresponding to the frequency that has been set in
131 Initial voltage
parameter 130.
1. During start and stop, the current limit in parameter
223 decides the switching level.
2. This value indicates the frequency during ramp-down
at which the mechanical brake is to be closed again.
This assumes that a stop signal has been given.
3. It must be ensured that the motor starts
clockwise (hoist), since otherwise the frequency
converter may drop the load. Switch U, V,
W connections, if required.

88 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

functions
Special

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 89

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ PID for process control Relative references can be programmed. A relative

Feedback reference is a percentage value (Y) of the sum of
The feedback signal must be connected to a terminal the external references (X). This percentage value
on the frequency converter. Use the list below to is added to the sum of the external references,
decide which terminal is to be used and which which produces the active reference (X + XY). See
parameters are to be programmed. section Handling of multi references.
If relative references are to be used, parameter 214 is to
Feedback type Terminal Parameters
be set to Relative [1]. This makes the preset references
Pulse 33 307
Voltage 53 308, 309, 310 relative. Furthermore, Relative reference [4] can be
Current 60 314, 315, 316 programmed on terminal 54 and/or 60. If an external
relative reference is selected, the signal on the input will
be a percentage value of the full range of the terminal.
Furthermore, the minimum and maximum feedback
The relative references are added with signs.
(parameters 414 and 415) must be set to a value in
the process unit that corresponds to the minimum NB!:
and maximum value on the terminal. Terminals that are not in use should preferably
Select process unit in parameter 416. be set to No function [0].

Reference
Inverse control
A minimum and a maximum reference can be set (204
If the drive has to react with increasing speed on
and 205), which limit the sum of all references. The
and increasing feedback, Inverse must be selected in
reference range cannot exceed the feedback range.
parameter 437. Normal control means that the motor
If one or several setpoint references are required,
speed decreases when the feedback signal increases.
the simplest way is to set such reference directly
in parameters 215 to 218. Select between the Anti Windup
preset references by connecting terminals 16, 17, The process controller comes with the anti windup
29, 32 and/or 33 to terminal 12. Which terminals function in active position. This function ensures
that are used depends on the choice made in the that when either a frequency limit or a torque limit
parameters of the various terminals (parameters is reached, the integrator will be set to a gain that
300, 301, 305, 306 and/or 307). Use the table corresponds to the actual frequency. This avoids
below when selecting preset references. integrating on an error that cannot in any case be
Preset ref. msb Preset ref. lsb compensated for by means of a speed change. This
Preset ref. 1 0 0 function can be disabled in parameter 438.
(par. 215)
Start-up conditions
Preset ref. 2 0 1
In some applications, optimum setting of the process
(par. 216)
controller will mean that it takes an excessive time
Preset ref. 3 1 0
for the desired process value to be reached. In
(par. 217)
such applications it might be an advantage to fix a
Preset ref. 4 1 1
motor frequency to which the frequency converter is
(par. 218)
to bring the motor before the process controller is
activated. This is done by programming a Process
If an external reference is required, this can either PID start frequency in parameter 439.
be an analogue or a pulse reference. If current
is used as a feedback signal, only voltage can Differentiator gain limit
be used as an analogue reference. Use the If there are quick changes in reference or feedback
following list to decide which terminal to use and in a given application - which means that the error
which parameters to program. changes swiftly - the differentiator may soon become
too dominant. This is because it reacts to changes in
Reference type Terminal Parameters
the error. The quicker the error changes, the stronger
Pulse 17 or 29 301 or 305
Voltage 53 or 54 308, 309, 310 or the differentiator gain is. The differentiator gain can
311, 312, 313 thus be limited to allow setting of the reasonable
Current 60 314, 315, 316 differentiation time for slow changes and a suitably

90 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

quick gain for quick changes. This is done in parameter Use the list below to decide which terminal to use for
443, Process PID Differentiator gain limit. the feedback signal and which parameters to program.

Lowpass filter Feedback type Terminal Parameters

If there are oscillations of the current/voltage feedback Pulse 32 306
signal, these can be dampened by means of a lowpass Pulse 33 307
Feedback 329
filter. Set a suitable lowpass filter time constant. This
pulse/rev.
time constant represents the limitfrequency of the
Voltage 53 308, 309, 310
ripples occurring on the feedback signal. If the lowpass
Current 60 314, 315, 316
filter has been set to 0.1s, the limit frequency will be 10
RAD/sec., corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz. This
will mean that all currents/voltages that vary by more Furthermore, the minimum and maximum feedback
than 1.6 oscillations per second will be removed by (parameters 414 and 415) are to be set to values in the
the filter. In other words, control will only be carried process unit that correspond to the actual minimum
out on a feedback signal that varies by a frequency of and maximum process feedback values and units.
less than 1.6 Hz. Choose a suitable time constant in The minimum feedback cannot be set to a value
parameter 444, Process PID Lowpass filter. lower than 0. Choose unit in parameter 416.

Optimisation of the process controller Reference

The basic settings have now been made; all that needs A minimum and a maximum reference can be set (204
to be done is to optimise the proportional gain, the and 205) which limit the sum of all references. The
integration time and the differentiation time (parameters reference range cannot exceed the feedback range.
440, 441, 442). In most processes, this can be done If one or several preset references are required,
by following the guidelines given below. the simplest way of doing this is by setting such
references directly in parameters 215 to 218. Choose
1. Start the motor between the preset references by connecting terminals
2. Set parameter 440 (proportional gain) to 0.3 and 16,17,29,32 and/or 33 to terminal 12. Which of them
increase it until the feedback signal again begins that are to be used depends on the choice in the
to vary continuously. Then reduce the value until

functions
parameters of the terminals in question (parameters

Special
the feedback signal has stabilised. Now lower 300, 301, 305, 306 and/or 307). The table below
the proportional gain by 40-60%. can be used to select the preset references.
3. Set parameter 441 (integration time) to 20s
Preset ref. msb Preset ref. lsb
and reduce the value until the feedback signal
Preset ref. 1 0 0
again begins to vary continuously. Increase the
(par. 215)
integration time until the feedback signal stabilises,
Preset ref. 2 0 1
followed by an increase of 15-50%.
(par. 216)
4. Only use parameter 442 for very fast-acting
Preset ref. 3 1 0
systems only (differentiation time). The typical
(par. 217)
value is four times the set integration time. The Preset ref. 4 1 1
differentiator should only be used when the (par. 218)
setting of the proportional gain and the integration
time has been fully optimised.
If an external reference is required, this can either by an
NB!: analogue reference or a pulse reference. If current is
If necessary, start/stop can be activated used as a feedback signal, voltage can be used as an
a number of times in order to provoke a analogue reference. Use the list below to decide which
variation of the feedback signal. terminal to use and which parameters to program.

See also the examples of connection given Reference type Terminal Parameters
Pulse 17 or 29 301 or 305
in the Design Guide.
Voltage 53 or 54 308, 309, 310 or
311, 312, 313
Current 60 314, 315, 316
■ PID for speed control
Feedback

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 91

 VLT® 5000 Series

Relative references can be programmed. A relative

This function is used for discharging the capacitors
reference is a percentage value (Y) of the sum of
in the intermediate circuit after the mains supply
the external references (X). This percentage value
has been interrupted. This is a useful function for
is added to the sum of the external references,
servicing the frequency converter and/or the motor
which produces the active reference (X + XY).
installation. The motor must be stopped before
See drawing on pages 62 and 63.
quick discharge is activated. If the motor acts as a
If relative references are to be used, parameter 214 is to
generator, quick discharge is not possible.
be set to Relative [1]. This makes the preset references
relative. Furthermore, Relative reference [4] can be The quick discharge function can be selected
programmed on terminal 54 and/or 60. If an external via parameter 408. The function starts when the
relative reference is selected, the signal on the input will intermediate circuit voltage has dropped to a given
be a percentage value of the full range of the terminal. value and the rectifier has stopped.
The relative references are added with signs. In order to obtain the possibility of a quick discharge,
the frequency converter requires an external 24 V DC
NB!:
supply to terminals 35 and 36, as well as a suitable
Terminals that are not in use should preferably
brake resistor on terminals 81 and 82.
be set to No function [0].
For sizing of the discharge resistor for quick discharge,
Differentiator gain limit see Brake Instructions MI.50.DX.XX.
If there are quick changes in reference or feedback
in a given application - which means that the error NB!:
changes swiftly - the differentiator may soon become Quick discharge is only possible if the
too dominant. This is because it reacts to changes in frequency converter has 24 Volts external
the error. The quicker the error changes, the stronger DC supply and if an external brake/discharge
the differentiator gain is. The differentiator gain can resistor has been connected.
thus be limited to allow setting of the reasonable
Before servicing the installation (frequency
differentiation time for slow changes and a suitably
converter + motor), it must be checked
quick gain for quick changes. This is done in parameter
that the intermediate circuit voltage
420, Speed PID Differentiator gain limit.
is below 60 V DC. This is done by measuring
Lowpass filter terminals 88 and 89, load-sharing.
If are oscillations of the current/voltage on the
NB!:
feedback signal, these can be dampened by means
The power dissipation during quick discharge
of a lowpass filter. Set a suitable lowpass filter time
does not form part of the power monitoring
constant. This time constant represents the limit
function, parameter 403. When sizing resistors,
frequency of the ripples occurring on the feedback
this fact should be taken into consideration.
signal. If the lowpass filter has been set to 0.1s, the
break frequency will be 10 RAD/sec., corresponding
to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz. This will mean that all
currents/voltages that vary by more than 1.6 oscillations
per second will be removed by the filter.
In other words, control will only be carried out on a
feedback signal that varies by a frequency of less
than 1.6 Hz. Choose a suitable time constant in
parameter 421, Speed PID Lowpass filter.

■ Quick discharge
This function is only available in EB units (extended
with brake) of the following type:
• VLT 5001-5052, 200-240 V
• VLT 5001-5102, 380-500 V
• 5001-5062, 525-600 V

92 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Parameter 408 = [1]

Quick discharge
activated

TRIP (RESET)
Check 24 Volts
external DC supply
No 24 Volts external
DC supply
ALARM:33
Q.DISCHARGING FAILED
24 Volts external
DC supply OK

TRIP (RESET)
Start
Quick discharge
Timeout ALARM:33
Q.DISCHARGING FAILED
Discharge

Discharge completed

POWER IS DISCHARGED
175ZA447.10

■ Mains failure/quick discharge with mains

Using a digital input, it is possible to activate mains
failure inverse
failure and/or quick discharge. This is done by
The first column in the table shows Mains failure ,
selecting Mains failure inverse on one of the control
which is selected in parameter 407. If no function
terminals (16, 17, 29, 32, 33). Mains failure inverse
is selected, the mains failure procedure will not be
is active in the logical ’0’ situation.
carried out. If Controlled ramp-down [1] is selected,
the frequency converter will take the motor down to 0 NB!:

functions
Special
Hz. If Enable [1] has been selected in parameter 408, The frequency converter can be completely
a quick discharge of the intermediate circuit voltage damaged if the Quick-discharge function
will be carried out after the motor has stopped. is repeated, using the digital input while
mains voltage is on.

Mains failure par. Quick discharge par. 408 Mains failure inverse digital Function
407 input
No function [0] Disable [0] Logical ’0’ 1
No function [0] Disable [0] Logical ’1’ 2
No function [0] Enable [1] Logical ’0’ 3
No function [0] Enable [1] Logical ’1’ 4
[1]-[4] Disable [0] Logical ’0’ 5
[1]-[4] Disable [0] Logical ’1’ 6
[1]-[4] Enable [1] Logical ’0’ 7
[1]-[4] Enable [1] Logical ’1’ 8

Function no. 1
Function no. 4
Mains failure and quick discharge are not active.
Quick discharge is activated when the intermediate
Function no. 2 circuit voltage has dropped to a given value and
Mains failure and quick discharge are not active. the inverters have stopped. See procedure
on previous page.
Function no. 3
The digital input activates the quick discharge function,
regardless of the intermediate circuit voltage level and
regardless of whether the motor is running.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 93

 VLT® 5000 Series

Function no. 5
The digital input activates the mains failure function, 1. Flying start is active.
regardless of whether the unit receives any supply
voltage. See the different functions in parameter 407.

Function no. 6
The mains failure function is activated when the
intermediate circuit voltage has dropped to a given
value. The selected function in case of mains
failure is selected in parameter 407.

Function no. 7
The digital input activates both the quick discharge and
the mains failure function, regardless of the intermediate
circuit voltage level and regardless of whether the
motor is running. First the mains failure function will be 2. Flying start is active.
active; subsequently there will be a quick discharge.

Function no. 8
Quick discharge and mains failure function are activated
when the intermediate circuit level drops to a given level.
First the mains failure function will be active;
subsequently there will be a quick discharge.

■ Flying start
This function makes it possible to "catch" a motor
that is spinning freely and for the frequency converter
to take control of the motor speed. This function can
be enabled or disabled via parameter 445. The search sequence for the spinning motor depends
on Rotation, frequency/direction (parameter 200). If
If flying start has been selected, there will be four only clockwise is selected, the frequency converter will
situations in which the function is activated: start looking from Maximum frequency (parameter 202)
down to 0 Hz. If the frequency converter does not find
1. After a coast has been given via terminal 27.
the spinning motor during the search sequence, it will
2. After power-up.
carry out a DC braking so as to try to bring the speed
3. If the frequency converter is in a trip state and
of the spinning motor down to 0 rpm. This requires that
a reset signal has been given.
the DC brake is active via parameters 125 and 126. If
4. If the frequency converter releases the motor
Both directions is selected, the frequency converter will
because of a fault state and the fault disappears
first find out in which direction the motor rotates and
before a trip, the frequency converter will catch
then search for the frequency. If the motor is not found,
the motor and go back to the reference.
the system assumes that the motor is at a standstill or
is rotating at a low speed, and the frequency converter
will start the motor in the normal way after searching.

94 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

3. The frequency converter trips and Flying

NB!:
start is active.
This function cannot be chosen for VLT
5001-5006, 200-240 Volts, and VLT
5001-5011, 380-500 Volts.

■ Internal current regulator

The VLT 5000 features an integral current limit
regulator which is activated when the motor current,
and thus the torque, is higher than the torque
limits set in parameter 221 and 222.
When VLT 5000 Series is at the current limit
during motor operation or regenerative operation,
the frequency converter will try to get below the
preset torque limits as quickly as possible without
4. The frequency converter momentarily losing control of the motor.
releases the motor. Flying start is activated While the current regulator is active, the frequency
and catches the motor again. converter can only be stopped by means of terminal
27 if set to Coasting stop, inverse [0] or Reset and
coasting stop, inverse [1]. A signal on terminals
16-33 will not be active until the frequency converter
has moved away from the current limit.
Please note that the motor will not use the
ramp-down time, since terminal 27 must be
programmed for Coasting stop, inverse [0] or
Reset and coasting stop, inverse [1].

functions
Special
■ Programming of Torque limit and stop
In applications with an external electro-mechanical
■ Normal/high overload torque control,open loop brake, such as hoisting applications, it is possible
This function enables the frequency converter to perform to stop the frequency converter via a ‘standard’
a constant 100% torque, using an oversize motor. stop command, while at the same time activating
The choice between a normal or a high overload torque the external electro-mechanical brake.
characteristic is made in parameter 101. The example given below illustrates the programming
of frequency converter connections.
This is also where to choose between a high/normal
The external brake can be connected to relay 01 or
constant torque characteristic (CT) or a high/normal
04, see Control of mechanical brake on page 66.
VT torque characteristic
Program terminal 27 to Coasting stop, inverse [0]
If a high torque characteristic is chosen, a rated or Reset and coasting stop, inverse [1], as well as
motor with the frequency converter obtains up to terminal 42 to Torque limit and stop [27].
160% torque for 1 min. in both CT and VT. If a
normal torque characteristic is chosen, an oversize
motor allows up to 110% torque performance for up
to 1 min. in both CT and VT. This function is used
mainly for pumps and fans, since these applications
do not require an overload torque.

The advantage of choosing a normal torque

characteristic for an oversize motor is that the frequency
converter will be able constantly to yield 100% torque,
without derating as a result of a bigger motor.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 95

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description:
If a stop command is active via terminal 18 and
the frequency converter is not at the torque limit,
the motor will ramp down to 0 Hz.
If the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
a stop command is activated, terminal 42 Output
(programmed to Torque limit and stop [27]) will be
activated. The signal to terminal 27 will change from
’logic 1’ to ’logic 0’ and the motor will start coasting.

- Start/stop via terminal 18.

Parameter 302 = Start [1].
- Quickstop via terminal 27.
Parameter 304 = Coasting stop, inverse [0].
- Terminal 42 Output
Parameter 319 = Torque limit and stop [27].
- Terminal 01 Relay output
Parameter 323 = Mechanical brake control [32].

96 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Parameters - Operation and Display 5. An external control command that can be connected
to terminal 16, 17, 19, 27, 29, 32 or 33. However,
001 Language [2] or [4] must be selected in parameter 013.
(LANGUAGE)
See also section Shift between local and remote control.
Value:
✭English (ENGLISH) [0]
German (DEUTSCH) [1]
003 Local reference
French (FRANCAIS) [2]
(LOCAL REFERENCE)
Danish (DANSK) [3]
Spanish (ESPAÑOL) [4] Value:
Italian (ITALIANO) [5] Par 013 set for [1] or [2]:
0 - f MAX ✭ 50 Hz
Function:
The choice in this parameter defines the language
to be used on the display. Par 013 set for [3] or [4] and par. 203 = [0] set for:
RefMIN - RefMAX ✭ 0.0
Description of choice:
There is a choice of English [0], German [1], French Function:
[2], Danish [3], Spanish [4] and Italian [5]. This parameter allows manual setting of the
desired reference value (speed or reference for
the selected configuration, depending on the
choice made in parameter 013).
002 Local/remote control
The unit follows the configuration selected in parameter
(OPERATION SITE)
100, provided Process control, closed loop [3] or
Value:
Torque control, open loop [4] has been selected.
✭Remote control (REMOTE) [0]
Local control (LOCAL) [1] Description of choice:
Local [1] must be selected in parameter 002
Function:
for this parameter to be used.
There is a choice of two methods of controlling
The set value is saved in the case of a voltage
the frequency converter.
drop-out, see parameter 019.
Description of choice: In this parameter Data Change Mode is not exited
automatically (after time out).
If Remote control [0] is selected, the frequency
Local reference cannot be set via the serial
converter can be controlled via:
communication port.
1. The control terminals or the serial
communication port. Programming
2. The [START] key. However, this cannot overrule
Stop commands (also start-disable) entered via the Warning: Since the value set is remembered
digital inputs or the serial communication port. after the power has been cut, the motor
3. The [STOP], [JOG] and [RESET] keys, provided that may start without warning when the
these are active (see parameter 014, 015 and 017). power is reinstated; if parameter 019 is changed
to Auto restart, use saved ref. [0].
If Local control [1] is selected, the frequency
converter can be controlled via: 004 Active Setup
1. The [START] key. However, this cannot override (ACTIVE SETUP)
Stop commands on the digital terminals (if [2] or
Value:
[4] has been selected in parameter 013).
Factory Setup (FACTORY SETUP) [0]
2. The [STOP], [JOG] and [RESET] keys, provided that
✭Setup 1 (SETUP 1) [1]
these are active (see parameter 014, 015 and 017).
Setup 2 (SETUP 2) [2]
3. The [FWD/REV] key, provided that this has been
Setup 3 (SETUP 3) [3]
activated in parameter 016 and that in parameter
Setup 4 (SETUP 4) [4]
013 a choice of [1] or [3] has been made.
MultiSetup (MULTI SETUP) [5]
4. Via P003 the local reference can be controlled by
means of the "Arrow up" and "Arrow down" keys.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 97
 VLT® 5000 Series

Function: 006 Copying of Setups

This parameter defines the Setup number to control (SETUP COPY)
the functions of the frequency converter. Value:
All parameters can be programmed in four individual ✭No copying (NO COPY) [0]
parameter Setups, Setup 1 - Setup 4. In addition, there
Copy to Setup 1 from # (COPY TO SETUP 1) [1]
is a Factory Setup, which cannot be modified.
Copy to Setup 2 from # (COPY TO SETUP 2) [2]
Description of choice: Copy to Setup 3 from # (COPY TO SETUP 3) [3]
Copy to Setup 4 from # (COPY TO SETUP 4) [4]
Factory Setup [0] contains the data set at the works.
Copy to Setup all from # (COPY TO ALL) [5]
Can be used as a data source if the other Setups
are to be returned to a known state.
Parameter 005 and 006 allow copying from one # = the Setup selected in parameter 005
Setup to one or all the other Setups.
Function:
Setups 1-4 [1]-[4] are four individual Setups that
A copy is made from the Setup selected in parameter
can be selected individually.
005 to one of the other Setups or to all the other
Multi-Setup [5] is used by remote-switching
Setups simultaneously. The setup copying function
between Setups. Terminals 16/17/29/32/33 as
does not copy parameter 001, 004, 005, 500 and 501.
well as the serial communication port can be used
for switching between Setups. Copying is only possible in Stop Mode (motor
stopped on a Stop command).

Description of choice:
005 Programming Setup
The copying starts when the desired copying
(EDIT SETUP)
function has been entered and confirmed by
Value: pressing the [OK] key.
Factory Setup (FACTORY SETUP) [0] The display indicates when copying is in progress.
Setup 1 (SETUP 1) [1]
Setup 2 (SETUP 2) [2]
Setup 3 (SETUP 3) [3]
007 LCP copy
Setup 4 (SETUP 4) [4]
✭Active Setup (ACTIVE SETUP) (LCP COPY)
[5]
Value:
Function: ✭No copying (NO COPY) [0]
The choice is of the Setup in which programming Upload all parameters (UPLOAD ALL PARAM) [1]
(change of data) is to occur during operation Download all parameters (DOWNLOAD ALL) [2]
(applies both via the control panel and via the Download power-independent par.
serial communication port). The 4 Setups can be (DOWNLOAD SIZE INDEP.) [3]
programmed independently of the Setup selected as
the active Setup (selected in parameter 004). Function:
Parameter 007 is used if it is desired to use the
Description of choice: integrated copying function of the control panel. The
The Factory Setup [0] contains the data set at the control panel is detachable. You can therefore easily
works and can be used as a data source if the other copy parameter value(s) from one to another.
Setups are to be returned to a known state.
Setups 1-4 [1]-[4] are individual Setups which can be Description of choice:
used as required. They can be programmed freely, Select Upload all parameters [1] if all parameter values
regardless of the Setup selected as the active Setup and are to be transmitted to the control panel.
thus controlling the functions of the frequency converter. Select Download all parameters [2] if all transmitted
parameter values are to be copied to the frequency
NB!: converter on which the control panel has been mounted.
If a general change of data or a copying to Select Download power-independent par. [3] if only the
the active Setup is effected, this immediately power-independent parameters are to be downloaded.
affects the functioning of the unit. This is used if downloading to a frequency converter

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

98 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

that has a different rated power that the one from External reference [%] (EXTERNAL REF [%]) [21]
where the parameter Setup originates. Status word [Hex] (STATUS WORD [HEX]) [22]
Please note that the power-dependent parameter Brake effect/2 min. [KW]
102-106 must be programmed after copying. (BRAKE ENERGY/2 MIN) [23]
Brake effect/sec. [kW] (BRAKE ENERGY/S) [24]
NB!:
Heat sink temp. [°C] (HEATSINK TEMP [°C]) [25]
Uploading/Downloading can only be carried
Alarm word [Hex] (ALARM WORD [HEX]) [26]
out in the Stop mode.
Control word [Hex]
(CONTROL WORD [HEX]) [27]
Warning word 1 [Hex]
008 Display scaling of motor frequency
(WARNING WORD 1 [HEX]) [28]
(FREQUENCY SCALE) Warning word 2 [Hex]
Value: (WARNING WORD 2 [HEX]) [29]
0.01 - 500.00 ✭ 1 Communication option card warning
(COMM OPT WARN [HEX]) [30]
Function: RPM [min-1] (MOTOR RPM [RPM]) [31]
This parameter chooses the factor to be multiplied RPM x scaling [-] (MOTOR RPM X SCALE) [32]
by the motor frequency, fM , for presentation in LCP Display text (FREE PROG. ARRAY) [33]
the display, when parameters 009-012 have been
set for Frequency x Scaling [5]. Function:
This parameter allows a choice of the data value
Description of choice:
to be displayed in line 2 of the display.
Set the desired scaling factor. Parameters 010-012 enable the use of three additional
data values to be displayed in line 1.

Description of choice:
009 Display line 2 (DISPLAY LINE 2)
No readout switches of the readout.
Value:
Reference [%] corresponds to the total reference
No readout (NONE) [0]
(sum of digital/analogue/preset/bus/freeze
Reference [%] (REFERENCE [%]) [1]
ref./catch-up and slow-down).
Reference [unit] (REFERENCE [UNIT]) [2]
Reference [unit] gives the status value of terminals
Feedback [unit] (FEEDBACK [UNIT]) [3]
17/29/53/54/60 using the unit stated on the basis of
✭Frequency [Hz] (FREQUENCY [HZ]) [4]
configuration in parameter 100 (Hz, Hz and rpm).
Frequency x Scaling [-]
Feedback [unit] gives the status value of
(FREQUENCY X SCALE) [5]
terminal 33/53/60 using the unit/scale selected
Motor current [A] (MOTOR CURRENT [A]) [6]
in parameter 414, 415 and 416.
Torque [%] (TORQUE [%]) [7]
Frequency [Hz] gives the motor frequency, i.e. the
Programming
Power [kW] (POWER [KW]) [8]
output frequency from the frequency converter.
Power [HP] (POWER [HP] [US]) [9]
Frequency x Scaling [-] corresponds to the present
Output energy [kWh]
motor frequency fM (without resonance dampening)
(OUTPUT ENERGY [KWH]) [10]
multiplied by a factor (scaling) set in parameter 008.
Motor voltage [V] (MOTOR VOLTAGE [V]) [11] Motor current [A] states the phase current of the
DC link voltage [V] (DC LINK VOLTAGE [V]) [12] motor measured as effective value.
Thermal load, motor [%] Torque [%] gives the current motor load in
(MOTOR THERMAL [%]) [13] relation to the rated motor torque.
Thermal load, VLT [%] (VLT THERMAL [%]) [14] Power [kW] states the actual power consumed
Hours run [Hours] (RUNNING HOURS) [15] by the motor in kW.
Digital input [Binary code] Power [HP] states the actual power consumed
(DIGITAL INPUT [BIN]) [16] by the motor in HP.
Analogue input 53 [V] (ANALOG INPUT 53 [V]) [17] Output energy [kWh] states the energy
Analogue input 54 [V] (ANALOG INPUT 54 [V]) [18] consumed by the motor since the latest reset
Analogue input 60 [mA] was made in parameter 618.
(ANALOG INPUT 60 [MA]) [19]
Pulse reference [Hz] (PULSE REF. [HZ]) [20]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 99
 VLT® 5000 Series

Motor voltage [V] states the voltage supplied Communication option card warning [Hex]
to the motor. gives a warning word if there is a fault on the
DC link voltage [V] states the intermediate circuit communication bus. Is only active if communication
voltage in the frequency converter. options have been installed. Without communication
Thermal load, motor [%] states the options, 0 Hex is displayed.
calculated/estimated thermal load on the RPM [min-1] indicates the motor speed. In speed
motor. 100% is the cut-out limit. closed loop, the value is measured. In other modes
Thermal load, VLT [%] states the calculated/estimated the value is calculated based on the motor slip.
thermal load on the frequency converter. RPM x scaling [-] indicates the motor RPM multiplied
100% is the cut-out limit. by a factor set in parameter 008.
Hours run [Hours] states the number of hours that the LCP display text shows the text programmed
motor has run since the latest reset in parameter 619. in parameter 553 Display text 1 and 554 Display
Digital input [Binary code] states the signal states text 2 via LCP or the serial communication port.
from the 8 digital terminals (16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, Not possible in parameter 011-012.
32 and 33) Input 16 corresponds to the bit at the far Display text 1 is only shown in full length if par
left. ’0’ = no signal, ’1’ = connected signal. 011 and 012 are set to None [0].
Analogue input 53 [V] states the signal
value on terminal 53.
Analogue input 54 [V] states the signal
010 Display line 1.1 (DISPLAY LINE 1.1)
value on terminal 54.
011 Display line 1.2 (DISPLAY LINE 1.2)
Analogue input 60 [V] states the signal
value on terminal 60. 012 Display line 1.3 (DISPLAY LINE 1.3)
Pulse reference [Hz] states the possible frequency Value:
in Hz connected to the terminals 17 or 29. See parameter 009.
External reference [%] gives the sum of the
Function:
external reference as a percentage (the sum
Parameter 010 - 012 enable a choice of three different
of analogue/pulse/bus).
data values to be shown on the display, line 1 position
Status word [Hex] gives the status word sent
1, line 1 position 2 and line 1 position 3, respectively.
via the serial communication port in Hex code
For display read-outs, press the [DIS-
from the frequency converter.
PLAY/STATUS] button.
Brake power/2 min. [KW] states the brake
The reading can be switched off.
power transferred to an external brake resistor.
The mean power is calculated continuously Description of choice:
for the latest 120 seconds.
The factory setting for each parameter is the following:
It is assumed that a resistor value has been
entered in parameter 401. Par. 010 Reference [%]
Brake power/sec. [kW] states the present brake Par. 011 Motor current [A]
power transferred to an external brake resistor. Par. 012 Power [kW]
Stated as an instantaneous value.
It is assumed that a resistor value has been
entered in parameter 401.
Heat sink temp. [°C] states the present heat sink 013 Local Control/Configuration as
temperature of the frequency converter. The cut-out parameter 100
limit is 90 ± 5°C; cutting back in occurs at 60 ± 5°C. (LOCAL CTRL/CONFIG.)
Alarm word [Hex] indicates one or several alarms Value:
in a Hex code. See Alarm word. Local not active (DISABLE) [0]
Control word. [Hex] indicates the control LCP control and open loop.
word for the frequency converter. See Serial (LCP CTRL/OPEN LOOP) [1]
communication in the Design Guide. LCP digital control and open loop.
Warning word 1. [Hex] indicates one or more (LCP+DIG CTRL/OP.LOOP) [2]
warnings in a Hex code. See Warning word. LCP control/as parameter 100.
Warning word 2. [Hex] indicates one or more status (LCP CTRL/AS P100) [3]
states in a Hex code. See Warning word. ✭LCP digital control/as parameter 100.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

100 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

(LCP+DIG CTRL/AS P100) [4] The present reference will be maintained. If the reference
signal is negative, the local reference will be set at 0.
Function:
This is where the desired function is to be selected if Shift from LCP control/as parameter 100 or LCP
Local control has been chosen in parameter 002. remote control as parameter 100 to Remote control.
See also the description of parameter 100. The reference will be replaced by the active reference
signal from the remote control.
Description of choice:
If Local not active [0] is selected, a possible setting of
Local reference via parameter 003 is blocked.
014 Local stop
It is only possible to change to Local not active [0]
(LOCAL STOP)
from one of the other setting options in parameter
013, when the frequency converter has been set Value:
to Remote control [0] in parameter 002. Disable (DISABLE) [0]
✭Enable (ENABLE) [1]
LCP control and open loop [1] is used when the
speed is to be adjustable (in Hz) via parameter Function:
003, when the frequency converter has been set This parameter disables/enables the local stop
to Local control [1] in parameter 002. function from the LCP.
This key is used when parameter 002 has been
If parameter 100 has not been set to Speed control set for Remote control [0] or Local [1].
open loop [0], switch to Speed control open loop [0]
Description of choice:
LCP digital control and open loop [2] functions as
If Disable [0] is selected, the [STOP] key will be inactive.
LCP control and open loop [1], the only difference
being that when parameter 002 has been set to NB!:
Local operation [1], the motor is controlled via the If Enable is selected, the [STOP] key
digital inputs, according to the list in section Shift overrules all Start commands.
between local and remote control.

LCP control/as parameter 100 [3] is selected if the

015 Local jog (LOCAL JOGGING)
reference is to be set via parameter 003.
Value:
LCP digital control/as parameter 100 [4] functions as ✭Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
LCP control/as parameter 100 [3], although, when Possible (ENABLE) [1]
parameter 002 has been set to Local operation
[1], the motor may be controlled via the digital Function:
inputs in accordance with the list in section Shift This parameter enables/disables the local jog
function on the LCP.
Programming
between local and remote control .
The key is used when parameter 002 has been
NB!: set for Remote control [0] or Local [1].
Shift from Remote control to LCP digital
control and open loop: Description of choice:
If Disable [0] is selected, the [JOG] key will be inactive.
The present motor frequency and direction of rotation
must be maintained. If the present direction of rotation
does not correspond to the reversing signal (negative 016 Local reversing
reference), the motor frequency fM will be set at 0 Hz.
(LOCAL REVERSING)
Shift from LCP digital control and open loop Value:
to Remote control: ✭Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
The selected configuration (parameter 100) Possible (ENABLE) [1]
will be active. Shifts are effected without
any abrupt movement. Function:
This parameter enables/disables the reversing
Shift from Remote control to LCP control/as parameter function on the LCP.
100 or LCP digital control/as parameter 100.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 101
 VLT® 5000 Series

This key can only be used if parameter 002 has Function:

been set to Local operation [1] and parameter Setting of the operating mode when the mains
013 to LCP control [3]. voltage is reconnected.
This function can only be active in connection with
Description of choice: Local control [1] in parameter 002.
If Disable [0] is selected, the [FWD/REV]
key will be inactive. Description of choice:
See parameter 200. Auto restart, use saved ref. [0] is selected if the unit
is to start up with the same local reference (set in
parameter 003) and the same start/stop conditions
(given via the [START/STOP] keys) that the frequency
017 Local reset of trip (LOCAL RESET)
converter had before it was switched off.
Value:
Forced stop, use saved ref. [1] is used if the
Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
unit is to remain stopped when the mains voltage
✭Possible (ENABLE) [1]
is connected, until the [START] key is pressed.
Function: After the start command, the local reference
In this parameter, the reset function can be used is set in parameter 003.
selected/removed from the keyboard. Forced stop, set ref. to 0 [2] is selected if the unit is to
This key can be used when parameter 002 has been remain stopped when the mains voltage is connected.
set for Remote control [0] or Local control [1]. Local reference (parameter 003) is reset.

Description of choice: NB!:

In remote controlled operation (parameter
If Disable [0] is selected in this parameter, the
002), the start/stop condition at power up
[RESET] key will be inactive.
will depend on the external control signals.
NB!: If Pulse start [2] is selected in parameter 302, the
Only select Disable [0] if an external reset signal motor will remain stopped at power-up.
has been connected via the digital inputs.

027 Warning readout line

018 Lock for data change (WARNING READOUT)

(DATA CHANGE LOCK) Value:

✭Warning in line 1/2 [0]
Value:
Warning in line 3/4 [1]
✭Not locked (NOT LOCKED) [0]
Locked (LOCKED) [1] Function:
In this parameter it is decided in which line the warning
Function:
is to appear in display mode. In programming mode
In this parameter, the software can "lock" the
(Menu or Quick menu) the warning will appear in line
control, which means that data changes cannot
1/2 to avoid disturbance of the programming.
be made via LCP (however, this is still possible
via the serial communication port). Description of choice:
Description of choice: Select the readout line.
If Locked [1] is selected, data changes cannot be made.

019 Operating state at Power up, local control

(POWER UP ACTION)
Value:
Auto restart, use saved ref. (AUTO RESTART) [0]
✭Forced stop, use saved ref. (LOCAL=STOP) [1]
Forced stop, set ref. to 0
(LOCAL=STOP, REF=0) [2]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

102 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Parameters - Load and motor

If Torque control, speed feedback [5] is selected, an
encoder speed feedback signal must be connected
100 Configuration
to the digital terminals 32/33.
(CONFIG. MODE)
Value: Parameter 205 Maximum reference and parameter
✭Speed control, open loop 415 Maximum feedback must be adapted to the
(SPEED OPEN LOOP) [0] application if [1], [3], [4] or [5] is selected.
Speed control, closed loop
(SPEED CLOSED LOOP) [1]
Process control, closed loop 101 Torque characteristics
(PROCESS CLOSED LOOP) [3] (TORQUE CHARACT)
Torque control, open loop
Value:
(TORQUE OPEN LOOP) [4]
✭High-constant torque (H-CONSTANT TORQUE) [1]
Torque control, speed feedback
High-variable torque low (H-VAR.TORQ.: LOW) [2]
(TORQUE CONTROL SPEED) [5]
High-variable torque medium
Function: (H-VAR.TORQ.: MEDIUM) [3]
This parameter is used for selecting the configuration High-variable torque high
to which the frequency converter is to be adapted. (H-VAR.TORQ.: HIGH) [4]
This makes adaptation to a given application simple, High-special motor characteristics
because the parameters that are not used in the given (H-SPEC.MOTOR CHARACT) [5]
configuration are covered up (not active). By changing High-variable torque with low starting torque
between the different application configurations, (H-VT LOW W. CT-START) [6]
bumpless transfer (frequency only) is ensured. High-variable torque with medium starting torque
(H-VT MED W. CT-START) [7]
Description of choice: High-variable torque with high starting torque
If Speed control, open loop [0] is selected, a normal (H-VT HIGH W. CT-START) [8]
speed control (without feedback signal) is obtained, Normal-constant torque
but with automatic slip compensation, ensuring a (N-CONSTANT TORQUE) [11]
nearly constant speed at varying loads. Normal-variable torque low
Compensations are active, but may be disabled (N-VAR.TORQ.: LOW) [12]
as required in parameter group 100. Normal-variable torque medium
(N-VAR.TORQ.: MEDIUM) [13]
If Speed control, closed loop [1] is selected, a full Normal-variable torque high
holding torque is obtained at 0 rpm, in addition to (N-VAR.TORQ.: HIGH) [14]
increased speed accuracy. A feedback signal must Normal-special motor characteristics
be provided and the PID regulator must be set. (See
Programming
(N-SPEC.MOTOR CHARACT) [15]
also connection examples in the Design Guide). Normal-variable torque with low constant
If Process control, closed loop [3] is selected, the starting torque (N-VT LOW W. CT-START) [16]
internal process regulator will be activated, thereby Normal-variable torque with medium constant
enabling accurate control of a process with respect starting torque (N-VT MED W. CT-START) [17]
to a given process signal. The process signal can be Normal-variable torque with high constant
set using the actual process unit or as a percentage. starting torque (N-VT HIGH W. CT-START) [18]
A feedback signal must be supplied from the process,
Function:
and the process setpoint must be adjusted (See also
In this parameter, the principle for adjusting the U/f
connection examples in the Design Guide).
characteristics of the frequency converter to the
If Torque control, open loop [4] is selected, the torque characteristics of the load is selected. By
speed is regulated and the torque is kept constant. changing between the different torque characteristics,
This is done without a feedback signal, since VLT bumpless transfer (voltage only) is ensured.
5000 accurately calculates the torque on the basis
of the current measurement (See also connection
examples in the Design Guide).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 103
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: 102 Motor power (MOTOR POWER)

Value:
NB!: 0.18 kW (0.18 KW) [18]
For VLT 5001-5006, 200-240 V, VLT 0.25 kW (0.25 KW) [25]
5001-5011, 380-500 V, and VLT 5011, 0.37 kW (0.37 KW) [37]
550-600 V it is only possible to choose 0.55 kW (0.55 KW) [55]
torque characteristics from [1] to [8]. 0.75 kW (0.75 KW) [75]
1.1 kW (1.10 KW) [110]
If a high torque characteristic [1]-[5] is selected, the
frequency converter is able to provide 160% torque. If 1.5 kW (1.50 KW) [150]
a normal torque characteristic [11]-[15] is selected, the 2.2 kW (2.20 KW) [220]
frequency converter is able to provide 110% torque. 3 kW (3.00 KW) [300]
The normal mode is used for oversize motors. 4 kW (4.00 KW) [400]
Please note that the torque can be limited 5.5 kW (5.50 KW) [550]
in parameter 221. 7.5 kW (7.50 KW) [750]
11 kW (11.00 KW) [1100]
If Constant torque is selected, a load-dependent U/f 15 kW (15.00 KW) [1500]
characteristic is obtained in which the output voltage is 18.5 kW (18.50 KW) [1850]
increased in the case of an increasing load (current) so 22 kW (22.00 KW) [2200]
as to maintain constant magnetisation of the motor. 30 kW (30.00 KW) [3000]
Select Variable torque low, Variable torque medium 37 kW (37.00 KW) [3700]
or Variable torque high if the load is variable 45 kW (45.00 KW) [4500]
(centrifugal pumps, fans). 55 kW (55.00 KW) [5500]
Select High-variable torque with low [6], medium 75 kW (75.00 KW) [7500]
[7] or high [8] starting torque if a higher breakaway 90 kW (90.00 KW) [9000]
torque is required than that obtainable with the three 110 kW (110.00 KW) [11000]
first-mentioned characteristics, see fig. below. 132 kW (132.00 KW) [13200]
160 kW (160.00 KW) [16000]
200 kW (200.00 KW) [20000]
250 kW (250.00 KW) [25000]
280 kW (280.00 KW) [28000]
315 kW (315.00 KW) [31500]
355 kW (355.00 KW) [35500]
400 kW (400.00 KW) [40000]
450 kW (450.00 KW) [45000]
500 kW (500.00 KW) [50000]
530 kW (530.00 KW) [53000]
560 kW (560.00 KW) [56000]
630 kW (630.00 KW) [63000]
Choose the torque characteristics giving the most
reliable operation, the lowest possible energy Depends on the unit
consumption and the lowest acoustic noise.
Select Special motor characteristics if a special U/f Function:
setting is required to match the motor in question. Selects the kW value that corresponds to the
Set the break points in parameters 422-432. rated power of the motor.
A rated kW value has been selected from the
NB!: factory that depends on the unit size.
Slip compensation is not active if a variable
torque or special motor characteristics are used. Description of choice:
Select a value that equals the nameplate data on the
motor. There are 4 possible undersizes or 1 oversize
in comparison with the factory setting.
Also, alternatively it is possible to set the value for
motor power as an infinitely variable value.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

104 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

The set value automatically changes the values of NB!:

the motor parameters in parameter 108-118. If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
NB!: setting. If using special motor characteristics a
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed, change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
parameter 110-118 will return to factory setting.

104 Motor frequency

103 Motor voltage (MOTOR VOLTAGE) (MOTOR FREQUENCY)
Value: Value:
200 V [200] ✭50 Hz (50 HZ) [50]
208 V [208] 60 Hz (60 HZ) [60]
220 V [220]
230 V [230] Max. motor frequency 1000 Hz.
240 V [240]
380 V [380] Function:
400 V [400] This is where the rated motor frequency fM,N
415 V [415] is selected (nameplate data).
440 V [440]
Description of choice:
460 V [460]
480 V [480] Select a value that equals the nameplate
500 V [500] data on the motor.
550 V [550] Alternatively it is also possible to set the value for
575 V [575] motor frequency infinitely variably , see chapter
660 V [660] Operation of the frequency converter.
690 V If a value different from 50 Hz or 60 Hz is selected, it
[690]
is necessary to correct parameters 108 and 109.
For 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set
Depends on the unit.
the nameplate data for 230 V. Adapt parameter
Function: 202 Output frequency high limit and parameter 205
Select a value that equals the nameplate Maximum reference to the 87 Hz application.
data on the motor.
NB!:
NB!: If a delta connection is used, the rated
The motor will always see the peak voltage, motor frequency for the delta connected
corresponding to the connected supply must be selected.
voltage, in case of regenerative operation,
Programming
NB!:
the voltage can be higher.
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
Description of choice: the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
Select a value that equals the nameplate data on the setting. If using special motor characteristics a
motor, regardless of the mains voltage of the frequency change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
converter. Furthermore, alternatively it is possible to set
the value of the motor voltage infinitely variable.
105 Motor current (MOTOR CURRENT)
The value set automatically changes values for the
Value:
motor parameters in parameters 108-118.
0.01 - IVLT,MAX [0.01 - XXX.X]
For 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set
the nameplate data for 230 V. Adapt parameter
202 Output frequency high limit and parameter 205 Depends on the choice of motor.
Maximum reference to the 87 Hz application.
Function:
NB!: The rated motor current IM,N forms part of the
If a delta connection is used, the rated frequency converter calculations i.a. of torque
motor frequency for the delta connection and motor thermal protection.
must be selected.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 105
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: (parameters 108/109) with the motor stationary.

Select a value that equals the nameplate Automatic motor adaptation ensures optimum
data on the motor. use of the motor.
Enter the value in Ampere. For the best possible adaptation of the frequency
converter, it is recommended to run AMA
NB!: on a cold motor.
It is important to enter the correct value, since
this forms part of the VVCplus control feature. The AMA function is activated by pressing the
[START] key after selecting [1] or [2].
NB!: See also section Automatic motor adaptation.
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed, The section Automatic motor adaption, AMA, via
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory VLT software dialog shows how automatic motor
setting. If using special motor characteristics a adaptation can be activated by means of VLT Software
change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422. Dialog. After a normal sequence, the display will read
"ALARM 21". Press the [STOP/RESET] key. The
frequency converter is now ready for operation.
106 Rated motor speed
Description of choice:
(MOTOR NOM. SPEED)
Select Enable, RS and XS [1] if the frequency
Value:
converter is to be able to carry out automatic
100 - 60000 rpm (RPM) [100 - 60000]
motor adaptation of both the stator resistance
RS and the stator reactance XS.
Depends on the choice of motor.
Select Optimisation on, RS [2] if a reduced test
Function: is to be carried out, in which only the ohmic
This is where the value is selected that corresponds resistance in the system is determined.
to the rated motor speed nM,N, which can be
seen from the nameplate data. NB!:
It is important to set motor parameters
Description of choice: 102-106 correctly, since these form part of
The rated motor speed nM,N is used i.a. for calculating the AMA algorithm. In most applications,
the optimal slip compensation. correct entering of motor parameters 102-106 is
sufficient. For optimum dynamic motor adaptation,
NB!:
an AMA must be carried out.
It is important to enter the correct value,
Motor adaptation may take up to 10 minutes,
since this forms part of the VVCplus control
depending on the output of the motor in question.
feature. The max. value equals fM,N x
60. Set fM,N in parameter 104. NB!:
There must not be any externally generating
NB!:
torque during automatic motor adaptation.
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
NB!:
setting. If using special motor characteristics a
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
setting. If using special motor characteristics a
107 Automatic motor adaptation, AMA change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
(AUTO MOTOR ADAPT)
Value: 108 Stator resistor (STATOR RESIST)
✭Adaptation off (OFF) [0] Value:
Adaptation on, RS and XS (ENABLE (RS,XS)) [1] ✭Depends on the choice of motor
Adaptation on, RS (ENABLE (RS)) [2]
Function:
Function: After setting motor data in parameters 102-106, a
If this function is used, the frequency converter number of adjustments of various parameters are
automatically sets the necessary control parameters

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

106 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

made automatically, including the stator resistance Alternatively, these values can be recorded
RS. A manually entered RS must apply to a cold during operation in idle running state at the
motor. The shaft performance can be improved by rated motor frequency fM,N, slip compensation
fine-tuning RS and XS, see procedure below. (par. 115) = 0% and load compensation at
high speed (par. 114) = 100%.
Description of choice:
RS can be set as follows:
1. Automatic motor adaptation, where the frequency
converter measures on the motor to determine the
value. All compensations are reset to 100%.
4. The factory settings of XS, selected by the
2. The values are stated by the motor supplier.
frequency converter itself on the basis of the
3. The values are obtained by means of
motor nameplate data, are used.
manual measurements:
- RS can be calculated by measuring the NB!:
resistance RPHASE-to-PHASE between two phase If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
terminals. If RPHASE-to-PHASE is lower than 1-2 ohm the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
(typically motors >4-5.5 kW, 400 V), a special setting. If using special motor characteristics a
ohm-meter should be used (Thomson bridge or change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
similar). RS = 0.5 x RPHASE-to-PHASE

4. The factory settings of RS, selected by the 110 Motor magnetizing, 0 rpm
frequency converter itself on the basis of the (MOT. MAGNETIZING)
motor nameplate data, are used.
Value:
NB!: 0 - 300 % ✭ 100 %
If the setting in parameter 102-109 is changed,
Function:
the parameters 110-118 will return to factory
This parameter can be used if a different thermal load
setting. If using special motor characteristics a
on the motor is desired when running at low speed.
change in parameter 102-109 affects parameter 422.
This parameter is used in connection with
parameter 111.
109 Stator reactance
(STATOR REACT.)
Value:
✭depends on the choice of motor

Function: Programming
After setting motor data in parameters 102-106, a
number of adjustments of various parameters are Description of choice:
made automatically, including the stator reactance Enter a value stated as a percentage of the
XS. The shaft performance can be improved by rated magnetizing current.
fine-tuning R S and XS, see procedure below. Too low setting may lead to a reduced torque
on the motor shaft.
Description of choice:
XS can be set as follows:

1. Automatic motor adaptation, where the frequency 111 Min. frequency normal magnetizing
converter measures on the motor to determine the (MIN FR NORM MAGN)
value. All compensations are reset to 100%.
Value:
2. The values are stated by the motor supplier.
0.1 - 10.0 Hz ✭ 1.0 Hz
3. These values are obtained by means of
manual measurements: Function:
- XS can be calculated by connecting a motor to This parameter is used in connection with parameter
mains and measuring the phase-to-phase voltage 110. See drawing in parameter 110.
UL as well as the idling current I.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 107
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: where Load compensation at low speed stopped

Set the required frequency (for normal magnetizing working to max. frequency.
current). If the frequency is set lower than
This function is active for:
the motor slip frequency, parameters 110 and
111 are of no significance. Motor size Change-over
0.5 kW - 7.5 kW >10 Hz
11 kW - 45 kW >5 Hz
113 Load compensation at low speed 55 kW - 355 kW >3-4 Hz
(LO SPD LOAD COMP)
Value:
0 - 300 % ✭ 100 %
115 Slip compensation
Function: (SLIP COMPENSAT.)
This parameter enables compensation of voltage in Value:
relation to load when the motor is running at low speed. -500 - 500 % ✭ 100 %
Description of choice: Function:
Optimum U/f characteristics are obtained, i.e. Slip compensation is calculated automatically, i.e. on
compensation for the load at low speed. The frequency the basis of the rated motor speed nM,N.
range within which Load compensation at low speed In parameter 115, slip compensation can be
is active, depends on the motor size. adjusted in detail, which compensates for
This function is active for: tolerances in the value of nM,N.
Motor size Change-over This function is not active together with Variable
0.5 kW - 7.5 kW < 10 Hz torque (parameter 101 - variable torque graphs),
11 kW - 45 kW < 5 Hz Torque control, Speed feedback and Special
55 kW - 355 kW < 3-4 Hz motor characteristics.

Description of choice:
Enter a %-value of the rated motor frequency
(parameter 104).

116 Slip compensation time constant

(SLIP TIME CONST.)
Value:
0.05 - 5.00 sec. ✭ 0.50 sec.

Function:
This parameter determines the slip compensation
reaction speed.
114 Load compensation at high speed Description of choice:
(HI SPD LOAD COMP) A high value results in slow reaction. Conversely,
Value: a low value results in quick reaction.
0 - 300 % ✭ 100 % If low-frequency resonance problems are encountered,
the time set must be longer.
Function:
This parameter enables compensation of voltage in
relation to load when the motor is running at high speed.

Description of choice:
In Load compensation at high speed it is possible
to compensate for the load from the frequency

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

108 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

117 Resonance dampening Description of choice:

(RESONANCE DAMP.) Set the desired time until acceleration is to begin.
Value:
0 - 500 % ✭ 100 %
121 Start function (START FUNCTION)
Function:
Value:
High-frequency resonance problems can be eliminated
DC hold in start delay time
by setting parameters 117 and 118.
(DC HOLD/DELAY TIME) [0]
Description of choice: DC brake in start delay time
For less resonance oscillation, the value of (DC BRAKE/DELAY TIME) [1]
parameter 118 must be increased. ✭Coasting in start delay time
(COAST/DELAY TIME) [2]
Start frequency/voltage clockwise.
(CLOCKWISE OPERATION) [3]
118 Resonance dampening time constant
Start frequency/voltage in reference direction
(DAMP.TIME CONST.) (HORIZONTAL OPERATION) [4]
Value: VVCplus clockwise
5 - 50 ms ✭ 5 ms (VVC+ CLOCKWISE) [5]

Function: Function:
High-frequency resonance problems can be eliminated This is where the desired state during start delay
by setting parameters 117 and 118. (parameter 120) is selected.

Description of choice: Description of choice:

Choose the time constant that provides the Select DC hold in the start delay time [0] so as
best dampening. to energize the motor with a DC holding current
(parameter 124) in the start delay time.

Select DC brake in the start delay time [1] so as

119 High starting torque to energize the motor with a DC braking current
(HIGH START TORQ.) (parameter 125) in the start delay time.
Value: Select Coasting in the start delay time [2] and the
0.0 - 0.5 sec. ✭ 0.0 sec. motor will not be controlled by the frequency converter
during the start delay time (inverter off).
Function:
In order to secure a high starting torque, approx. Start frequency/voltage clockwise [3] and VVCplus
clockwise [5] is typically used in hoisting applications.
Programming
2 x IVLT,N for max. 0.5 sec. is allowed. However,
the current is limited by the protection limit of Start frequency/voltage in reference direction [4] is
the frequency converter (inverter). used especially in applications with counterweight.

Description of choice: Select Start frequency/voltage clockwise [3] so as

Set the necessary time in which a high starting to have the function described in parameter 130
torque is desired. and 131 in the start delay time.
The output frequency will equal the setting of the
start frequency in parameter 130, and the output
voltage will equal the setting of the start voltage in
120 Start delay (START DELAY) parameter 131. Regardless of the value assumed
Value: by the reference signal, the output frequency will
0.0 - 10.0 sec. ✭ 0.0 sec. equal the setting of the start frequency in parameter
130 and the output voltage will correspond to the
Function:
setting of the start voltage in parameter 131.
This parameter enables a delay of the starting time.
This functionality is used typically in hoisting
The frequency converter begins with the start
applications.
function selected in parameter 121.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 109
 VLT® 5000 Series

This is used especially in applications with a cone 123 Min. frequency for activating
armature motor, where the start is to be clockwise, function at stop
followed by rotation in the reference direction. (MIN.F. FUNC.STOP)

Select Start frequency/voltage in reference direction [4] Value:

in order to obtain the function described in parameters 0.0 - 10.0 Hz ✭ 0.0 Hz
130 and 131 during the start delay time. The motor
Function:
will always rotate in the reference direction.
This parameter sets the frequency at which the function
If the reference signal equals zero (0) parameter
selected in parameter 122 is to be activated.
130 Start frequency will be ignored and the output
frequency will equal zero (0). The output voltage Description of choice:
will correspond to the setting of the start voltage Enter the desired frequency.
in parameter 131 Start voltage.
NB!:
Select VVCplus clockwise [5] so as to have only the If parameter 123 is set higher than parameter
function described in parameter 130 Start frequency in 130, the start delay function (parameters
the start delay time. The start voltage will be calculated 120 and 121) will be skipped.
automatic. Notice that this function only uses the
start frequency in the start delay time. NB!:
Regardless of the value assumed by the reference If parameter 123 is set too high, and DC
signal, the output frequency will equal the setting hold has been chosen in parameter 122,
of the start frequency in parameter 130. the output frequency will jump to the value
in parameter 123 without ramping up. This may
cause an overcurrent warning/alarm.
122 Function at stop
(FUNCTION AT STOP) 124 DC holding current
Value: (DC-HOLD CURRENT)
✭Coasting (COAST) [0] Value:
DC hold (DC-HOLD) [1]
✭ 50 %
Motor check (MOTOR CHECK) [2]
Pre-magnetizing (PREMAGNETIZING) [3] Function:
This parameter is used to uphold the motor function
Function: (holding torque) or to pre-heat the motor.
Here it is possible to select the function of the frequency
converter after a stop command or when the frequency NB!:
has been ramped down to 0 Hz. See parameter 123 The maximum value depends on the rated
with respect to activation of this parameter regardless motor current. If the DC holding current
of whether the stop command is active. is active, the frequency converter has a
switching frequency of 4 kHz.
Description of choice:
Select Coasting [0] if the frequency converter is to Description of choice:
’let go’ of the motor (inverter closed). This parameter can only be used if DC hold [1] has
Select DC hold [1] when a DC holding current set been selected in parameter 121 or 122. Set it as
in parameter 124 is to be activated. a percentage value in relation to the rated motor
Select Motor check [2] if the frequency converter is to current IM,N set in parameter 105.
check whether or not a motor has been connected. 100% DC holding current corresponds to IM,N.
Select Pre-magnetizing [3]. The magnetic field
is built up in the motor while it remains stopped. Warning: 100 % supply for too long
This ensures that the motor can produce torque may damage the motor.
as quickly as possible on starting.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

110 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

VLT 5122-5552, 380-500 V and VLT 5042-5602, 127 DC brake cut-in frequency
525-690 V work with a reduced DC current rated (DC BRAKE CUT-IN)
as 80% of IVLT,N at 110% overload. Value:
0.0 - parameter 202 ✭ 0.0 Hz (OFF)

125 DC braking current Function:

This parameter is for setting the DC brake cut-in
(DC BRAKE CURRENT)
frequency at which the DC braking current (parameter
Value:
125) is to be active, in connection with a stop command.
✭ 50 %
Description of choice:
Function:
Set the desired frequency.
This parameter is used for setting the DC brake
current that is activated upon a stop when the DC
brake frequency set in parameter 127 has been
reached, or if the DC brake inverse is active via digital 128 Motor thermal protection
terminal 27 or via a serial communication port. The (MOT.THERM PROTEC)
DC braking current will be active for the duration of Value:
the DC braking time set in parameter 126. ✭No protection (NO PROTECTION) [0]
Thermistor warning (THERMISTOR WARN) [1]
NB!:
Thermistor trip (THERMISTOR TRIP) [2]
The maximum value depends on the rated
ETR Warning 1 (ETR WARNING1) [3]
motor current. If the DC braking current
ETR Trip 1 (ETR TRIP1) [4]
is active, the frequency converter has a
ETR Warning 2 (ETR WARNING2) [5]
switching frequency of 4.5 kHz.
ETR Trip 2 (ETR TRIP2) [6]
Description of choice: ETR Warning 3 (ETR WARNING3) [7]
To be set as a percentage value of the rated motor ETR Trip 3 (ETR TRIP3) [8]
current IM,N set in parameter 105. ETR Warning 4 (ETR WARNING 4) [9]
100% DC braking current corresponds to IM,N. ETR Trip 4 (ETR TRIP4) [10]

Warning: 100 % supply for too long Function:

may damage the motor. The frequency converter is able to monitor the motor
temperature in two different ways:

- Via a thermistor sensor connected to one

VLT 5122-5552, 380-500 V and VLT 5042-5602,
of the analogue inputs, terminals 53 and 54
525-690 V work with a reduced DC current rated
(parameters 308 and 311).
as 80% of IVLT,N at 110% overload.
Programming
- Calculation of the thermal load, based on the
current load and the time. This is compared with
the rated motor current IM,N and the rated motor
126 DC braking time frequency fM,N. The calculations made take into
(DC BRAKING TIME) account the need for a lower load at lower speeds
Value: because of less cooling from the fan.
0.0 (OFF) - 60.0 sec. ✭ 10.0 sec.
ETR functions 1-4 do not start calculating the load
Function: until there is a switch-over to the Setup in which
This parameter is for setting the DC braking time they were selected. This enables the use of the
for which the DC braking current (parameter ETR function, even where two or several motors
125) is to be active. alternate. For the North American market: The ETR
functions provide class 10 or 20 motor overload
Description of choice: protection in accordance with NEC.
Set the desired time.
Description of choice:
Select No protection if no warning or tripping is
required when the motor is overloaded.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 111
 VLT® 5000 Series

Select Thermistor warning if a warning is desired when

the connected thermistor - and thus the motor
- gets too hot.
Select Thermistor trip if cutting out (trip) is desired when
the connected thermistor - and thus the motor
- overheats.

Select ETR Warning 1-4, if a warning is to come

up on the display when the motor is overloaded
according to the calculations.
Select ETR Trip 1-4 if tripping is desired when the
motor is overloaded according to the calculations.
The frequency converter can also be programmed
to give off a warning signal via one of the digital
outputs, in which case the signal is given both for 130 Start frequency (START FREQUENCY)
warning and for trip (thermal warning). Value:
0.0 - 10.0 Hz ✭ 0.0 Hz

Function:
This parameter allows setting of the output frequency
at which the motor is to start.
The output frequency ’leaps’ to the set value.
This parameter can be used e.g. for hoist
applications (cone rotor motors).

Description of choice:
Set the desired start frequency.
It is assumed that the start function in parameter
129 External motor fan 121 has been set to [3] or [4] and that a start
(MOTOR EXTERN FAN) delay time has been set in parameter 120; also,
Value: a reference signal must be present.
✭No (NO) [0]
Yes (YES) [1]

Function: NB!:
This parameter informs the frequency converter If parameter 123 is set higher than parameter
whether the motor has an external separately 130, the start delay function (parameters
supplied fan (external ventilation), indicating that 120 and 121) will be skipped.
derating at low speed is unnecessary.
131 Initial voltage (INITIAL VOLTAGE)
Description of choice: Value:
If Yes [1] is selected, the graph below is followed 0.0 - parameter 103 ✭ 0.0 Volt
if the motor frequency is lower. If the motor
Function:
frequency is higher, the time will still derate as
Some motors, such as cone rotor motors, need extra
if no fan had been installed.
voltage/starting frequency (boost) when starting, so
as to disengage the mechanical brake.
For this purpose use parameters 130/131.

Description of choice:
Set the desired value required to disengage
the mechanical brake.
It is assumed that the start function in parameter
121 has been set to [3] or [4] and that a start

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

112 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

delay time has been set in parameter 120; also,

a reference signal must be present.

145 Minimum DC brake time

(DC BRK MIN. TIME)
Value:
0 - 10 sec. ✭ 0 sec.

Function:
If a minimum DC brake time is necessary before a new
start is possible, this parameter can be set.

Description of choice:
Select the desired time.

Programming

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 113
 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Parameters - References and limits

200 Output frequency range/direction

(OUT FREQ RNG/ROT)
Value:
✭Only clockwise, 0-132 Hz
(132 HZ CLOCK WISE) [0]
Both directions, 0-132 Hz
(132 HZ BOTH DIRECT.) [1]
Only clockwise, 0-1000 Hz
(1000 HZ CLOCK WISE) [2]
Both directions, 0-1000 Hz
(1000 HZ BOTH DIRECT.) [3]
Only counter clockwise, 0-132 Hz
(132 HZ COUNTERCLOCK) [4]
Parameter 200 Output frequency range/direction
Only counter clockwise, 0-1000 Hz
= both directions.
(1000 HZ COUNTERCLOCK) [5]

Function:
This parameter guarantees protection against 201 Output frequency low limit (FMIN)
unwanted reversing. Furthermore, the maximum (OUT FREQ LOW LIM)
output frequency can be selected that is to apply,
Value:
regardless of the settings of other parameters.
0.0 - fMAX ✭ 0.0 Hz
NB!:
Function:
The output frequency of the frequency converter
In this parameter, a minimum motor frequency limit
can never assume a value higher than 1/10 of
can be selected that corresponds to the minimum
the switching frequency, see parameter 411.
frequency at which the motor is to run.
Is not to be used together with Process control, The minimum frequency can never be higher than
closed loop (parameter 100). the maximum frequency, fMAX .
If Both directions has been selected in parameter 200,
Description of choice: the minimum frequency is of no significance.
Select the desired direction as well as output frequency.
Note that if Clockwise, 0-132 Hz [0], Clockwise, 0-1000 Description of choice:
Hz [2], Counter clockwise, 0-132 Hz [4] or Counter A value from 0.0 Hz to the max. frequency selected
clockwise, 0-1000 Hz [5] is selected, the output in parameter 202 (fMAX) can be chosen.
frequency will be limited to the range fMIN - fMAX.
If Both directions, 0-132 Hz [1] or Both directions,
0-1000 Hz [3] is selected, the output frequency 202 Output frequency high limit (FMAX)
will be limited to the range ± fMAX (the minimum
(OUT FREQ HI LIM)
frequency is of no significance).
Example: Value:
fMIN - 132/1000 Hz (parameter 200)
✭ depends on unit

Function:
In this parameter, a maximum motor frequency can be
selected that corresponds to the highest frequency
at which the motor is to run. The factory setting is
132 Hz for VLT 5001-5027 200-240V; VLT 5001-5102
380-500 V; and VLT 5001-5062 525-600 V.
For VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V; VLT 5122-5552
380-500 V; and 5042-5602 525-690 V the
factory setting is 66 Hz.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

114 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

The unit follows the choice of configuration

See also parameter 205.
in parameter 100.
NB!: Speed control, open loop: Hz
The output frequency of the frequency converter
Speed control, closed loop: rpm
can never assume a value higher than 1/10
Torque control, open loop: Nm
of the switching frequency.
Torque control, speed feedback: Nm
Description of choice: Process control, closed loop: Process units
A value from fMIN to the choice made in parameter (par. 416)
200 can be selected.

NB!: Special motor characteristics, activated in parameter

If the maximum motor frequency is set at 101, use the unit selected in parameter 100.
more than 500 Hz, parameter 446 must be
set at 60° AVM [0] switching pattern.
205 Maximum reference
(MAX. REFERENCE)
203 Reference/feedback area
Value:
(REF/FEEDB. RANGE)
RefMIN - 100,000.000 ✭ 50.000
Value:
✭Min - Max (MIN - MAX) [0] Function:
- Max - + Max (-MAX-+MAX) [1] The Maximum reference gives the highest value that
can be assumed by the sum of all references. If
Function: closed loop has been selected in parameter 100,
This parameter decides whether the reference the maximum reference cannot be set higher than
signal and the feedback signal are to be positive the maximum feedback (parameter 415).
or can be both positive and negative.
The minimum limit may be a negative value, unless Description of choice:
Speed control, closed loop has been selected Set the desired value.
(parameter 100). The unit follows the choice of configuration
Choose Min - Max [0] if Process control, closed loop in parameter 100.
has been selected in parameter 100.
Speed control, open loop: Hz
Description of choice: Speed control, closed loop: rpm
Choose the desired range. Torque control, open loop: Nm
Torque control, speed feedback: Nm
Process control, closed loop: Process units Programming
204 Minimum reference (par. 416)
(MIN. REFERENCE)
Value: Special motor characteristics, activated in parameter
-100,000.000 - RefMAX ✭ 0.000 101, use the unit selected in parameter 100.
Depends on parameter 100.

Function:
The Minimum reference gives the minimum value 206 Ramp type (RAMP TYPE)
that can be assumed by the sum of all references. Value:
Minimum reference is only active if Min - Max [0] has ✭Linear (LINEAR) [0]
been set in parameter 203; however, it is always active Sinusoidal (S1) [1]
in Process control, closed loop (parameter 100). Sin2 (S2) [2]
Sin3 (S3) [3]
Description of choice: Sin 2 filter (S2 FILTER) [4]
Is only active when parameter 203 has been
set to Min - Max [0]. Function:
Set the desired value. There is a choice of 4 different ramp types.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 115
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: 208 Ramp-down time 1

Select the desired ramp type, depending on (RAMP DOWN TIME 1)
requirements concerning acceleration/deceleration. Value:
The ramp is recalculated if the reference is 0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit
changed during ramping, resulting in an increase
of the ramping time. Function:
Selection S2 filter [4] is not recalculated if the The ramp-down time is the deceleration timefrom the
reference is changed during ramping. rated motor frequency f M,N (parameter 104) to 0 Hz or
from the rated motor speed nM,N , provided there is
no over-voltage in the inverter because of regenerative
operation of the motor, or if the generated current
reaches the torque limit (to be set in parameter 222).

Description of choice:
Program the desired ramp-down time.

209 Ramp-up time 2

(RAMP UP TIME 2)

207 Ramp-up time 1 Value:

0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit
(RAMP UP TIME 1)
Value: Function:
0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit See description of parameter 207.

Function: Description of choice:

The ramp-up time is the acceleration time from 0 Hz Program the desired ramp-up time.
to the rated motor frequency fM,N (parameter 104) or Switching from ramp 1 to ramp 2 is effected via a signal
the rated motor speed nM,N (if Speed control, closed on digital input terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33.
loop has been selected in parameter 100). This
presupposes that the output current does not reach
the torque limit (to be set in parameter 221).
210 Ramp-down time 2
(RAMP DOWN TIME 2)
Value:
0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit

Function:
See description of parameter 208.

Description of choice:
Program the desired ramp-down time.
Switching from ramp 1 to ramp 2 is effected via a signal
Description of choice: on digital input terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33.
Program the desired ramp-up time.

211 Jog ramp time (JOG RAMP TIME)

Value:
0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit

Function:
The jog ramp time is the acceleration/deceleration time
from 0 Hz to the rated motor frequency fM,N (parameter

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

116 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

104). It is assumed that the output current is not higher 214 Reference function
than the torque limit (set in parameter 221). (REF FUNCTION)
Value:
✭Sum. (SUM) [0]
Relative (RELATIVE) [1]
External/preset (EXTERNAL/PRESET) [2]

Function:
It is possible to define how the preset references
are to be added to the other references. For
this purpose, Sum or Relative is used. It is also
possible - by using the External/preset function - to
select whether a shift between external references
The jog ramp time starts if a jog signal is given
and preset references is desired.
via the control panel, the digital inputs or the
serial communication port. Description of choice:
If Sum [0] is selected, one of the adjusted preset
Description of choice:
references (parameters 215-218) is added as a
Set the desired ramp time.
percentage of the maximum possible reference.
If Relative [1] is selected, one of the adjusted
preset references (parameters 215-218) is added
212 Quick stop ramp-down time to the external references as a percentage
(Q STOP RAMP TIME) of the actual reference.
Value: In addition, it is possible to use parameter 308 to select
0.05 - 3600 sec. ✭ depends on unit whether the signals on terminals 54 and 60 are to be
added to the sum of the active references.
Function: If External/preset [2] is selected, it is possible to shift
The ramp-down time is the deceleration time between external references or preset references
from the rated motor frequency to 0 Hz, provided via terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or 33 (parameter 300,
no over- voltage arises in the inverter because 301, 305, 306 or 307). Preset references will be a
of generating operation of the motor or if the percentage value of the reference range.
generated current becomes higher than the torque External reference is the sum of the analogue
limit (set in parameter 222). references, pulses and bus references. See also
Quick-stop is activated by means of a signal on digital drawings in section Handling of multi-references .
input terminal 27, or via the serial communication port.
NB!:
Description of choice: If Sum or Relative is selected, one of the preset Programming

Program the desired ramp-down time. references will always be active. If the preset
references are to be without influence, they
should be set to 0 % (as in the factory setting).

213 Jog frequency (JOG FREQUENCY) The example shows how to calculate the output
Value: frequency if using Preset references together with
0.0 - parameter 202 ✭ 10.0 Hz Sum and Relative in parameter 214.
Parameter 205 Maximum reference has been
Function: set to 50 Hz.
The jog frequency fJOG is the fixed output frequency
at which the frequency converter is running when
the jog function is activated.

Description of choice:
Set the desired frequency.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 117
 VLT® 5000 Series

Par. 204 Increase Frequency Par. 215 Par. 214 Reference Par. 214 Reference
Min. [Hz/V] by 4.0 V Preset ref. type = Sum [0] type = Relative [1]
reference
1) 0 5 20 Hz 15 % Output frequency Output frequency
00+20+7.5 = 27.5 Hz 00+20+3 = 23.0 Hz
2) 10 4 16 Hz 15 % 10+16+6.0 = 32.0 Hz 10+16+2.4 = 28.4 Hz
3) 20 3 12 Hz 15 % 20+12+4.5 = 36.5 Hz 20+12+1.8 = 33.8 Hz
4) 30 2 8 Hz 15 % 30+8+3.0 = 41.0 Hz 30+8+1.2 = 39.2 Hz
5) 40 1 4 Hz 15 % 40+4+1.5 = 45.5 Hz 40+4+0.6 = 44.6 Hz

Terminals 17/29/33 Terminals 16/29/32

preset ref. msb preset ref. lsb
0 0 Preset ref. 1
0 1 Preset ref. 2
1 0 Preset ref. 3
1 1 Preset ref. 4

See drawings in section Handling of multi-references.

219 Catch up/slow down value

(CATCH UP/SLW DWN)
215 Preset reference 1 (PRESET REF. 1) Value:
216 Preset reference 2 (PRESET REF. 2) 0.00-100% of the current reference ✭ 0.00%
217 Preset reference 3 (PRESET REF. 3)
Function:
218 Preset reference 4 (PRESET REF. 4)
This parameter enables the entry of a percentage
Value:
value (relative) which will either be added to or
-100.00 % - +100.00 % ✭ 0.00% deducted from the actual reference.
of the reference range/external reference
Description of choice:
Function:
If Catch up has been selected via one of the terminals
Four different preset references can be programmed
16, 29 or 32 (parameters 300, 305 and 306), the
in parameters 215-218.
percentage (relative) value selected in parameter
The preset reference is stated as a percentage of
219 will be added to the total reference.
the value RefMAX or as a percentage of the other
If Slow down has been selected via one of the terminals
external references, depending on the choice made in
17, 29 or 33 (parameters 301, 305 and 307), the
parameter 214. If a RefMIN ≠ 0 has been programmed,
percentage (relative) value selected in parameter 219
the preset reference as a percentage will be calculated
will be deducted from the total reference.
on the basis of the difference between Ref MAX and
RefMIN, following which the value is added to Ref MIN.

Description of choice: 221 Torque limit for motor mode

Set the fixed reference(s) that is/are to be the options. (TORQ LIMIT MOTOR)

To use the fixed references, it is necessary to Value:

have selected Preset ref. enable on terminal 0.0 % - xxx.x % of TM,N ✭ 160 % of TM,N
16, 17, 29, 32 or 33.
Function:
Choices between fixed references can be
This function is relevant for all application
made by activating terminal 16, 17, 29, 32 or
configurations; speed, process and torque control.
33 - see the table below.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

118 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

This is where to set the torque limit for motor operation. 222 Torque limit for generating operation
The torque limiter is active in the frequency range up (TORQ LIMIT GENER)
to the rated motor frequency (parameter 104). Value:
In the oversynchronous range, where the frequency
0.0 % - xxx.x % of TM,N ✭ 160 %
is higher than the rated motor frequency, this
The max. torque depends on the unit and
function acts as a current limiter.
the motor size selected.
See fig. below.
Function:
This function is relevant for all application
configurations; speed, process and torque control.
This is where to set the torque limit for generating
operation. The torque limiter is active in the frequency
range up to the rated motor frequency (parameter 104).
In the oversynchronous range, where the frequency
is higher than the rated motor frequency, this
function acts as a current limiter.
See fig. for parameter 221 as well as parameter
409 for further details.

Description of choice:
If Resistor brake [1] has been selected in
parameter 400, the torque limit is changed to
1.6 x the rated motor torque.

223 Warning: Low current

(WARN. CURRENT LO)
Value:
0.0 - parameter 224 ✭ 0.2 A

Function:
When the motor current is below the limit,
ILOW, programmed in this parameter, the display
Description of choice:
indicates CURRENT LOW.
See also parameter 409 for further details.
The signal outputs can be programmed to transmit a
In order to protect the motor from reaching pull-out status signal via terminal 42 or 45 as well as via relay
Programming

torque, the factory setting is 1.6 x the rated output 01 or 04 (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326).
motor torque (calculated value).
Description of choice:
If a synchronous motor is used, the torque limit must
The lower signal limit ILOW of the motor current
be increased in relation to the factory setting.
must be programmed within the normal working
If a setting in parameters 101-106 is changed,
range of the frequency converter.
parameters 221/222 are not automatically
reversed to the factory setting.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 119
 VLT® 5000 Series

226 Warning: High frequency

(WARN. FREQ. HIGH)
Value:
parameter 225 - parameter 202 ✭ 132.0 Hz

Function:
When the motor frequency is above the limit
programmed in this parameter, fHIGH, the display
will indicate FREQUENCY HIGH.
The signal outputs can be programmed to transmit a
status signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output
01 or 04 (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326).

Description of choice:
The upper signal limit of the motor frequency, fHIGH,
must be programmed within the normal working
224 Warning: High current
range of the frequency converter.
(WARN. CURRENT HI)
See drawing at parameter 223.
Value:
Parameter 223 - IVLT,MAX ✭ IVLT,MAX

Function: 227 Warning: Low feedback

f the motor current gets above the limit programmed (WARN. FEEDB. LOW)
in this parameter, IHIGH, the display will indicate Value:
CURRENT HIGH. -100,000.000 - parameter 228. ✭ -4000.000
The signal outputs can be programmed to transmit a
status signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output Function:
01 or 04 (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326). If the connected feedback signal gets below the
value set in this parameter, the signal outputs can
Description of choice: be programmed to transmit a status signal via
The upper signal limit of the motor current, IHIGH, must terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output 01 or 04
be programmed within the normal working range of the (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326).
frequency converter. See drawing at parameter 223.
Description of choice:
Set the desired value.
225 Warning: Low frequency
(WARN. FREQ. LOW)
228 Warning: High feedback
Value:
0.0 - parameter 226 ✭ 0.0 Hz (WARN. FEEDB HIGH)
Value:
Function: parameter 227 - 100,000.000 ✭ 4000.000
When the motor frequency is below the limit
programmed in this parameter, fLOW, the display Function:
indicates FREQUENCY LOW. If the connected feedback signal gets above the
The signal outputs can be programmed to transmit a value set in this parameter, the signal outputs can
status signal via terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output be programmed to transmit a status signal via
01 or 04 (parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326). terminal 42 or 45 and via relay output 01 or 04
(parameter 319, 321, 323 or 326).
Description of choice:
The lower signal limit of the motor frequency, fLOW, Description of choice:
is to be programmed within the normal working Set the desired value.
range of the frequency converter.
See drawing at parameter 223.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

120 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

229 Frequency bypass, bandwidth Function:

(FREQ BYPASS B.W.) In this parameter it is possible to select monitoring
Value: of the motor phases.
0 (OFF) - 100% ✭ 0 (OFF) % Description of choice:

Function: If Enable is selected, the frequency converter

Some systems call for some output frequencies to be will react on a missing motor phase which will
avoided because of resonance problems in the system. result in alarm 30, 31 or 32.
In parameters 230-233 these output frequencies can If Disable is selected, no alarm is given if a motor phase
be programmed for bypassing (Frequency bypass). is missing. The motor can be damaged/overheated if it
In this parameter (229), a bandwidth can be defined runs on only two phases. It is therefore recommended
on either side of these frequency bypasses. to keep the missing motor phase function ENABLED.
The frequency bypass function is not active if par.
002 is set to Local and par. 013 is set to LCP
ctrl/Open loop or LCP+dig ctrl/Open loop.

Description of choice:
The bypass bandwidth is set as a percentage
of the bypass frequency which is selected
in parameter 230-233.
The bypass bandwidth indicates max. variation
of the bypass frequency.

Example: A bypass frequency of 100 Hz and a

bypass bandwidth of 1% are selected. In this case
the bypass frequency can vary between 99.5 Hz
and 100.5 Hz i.e. 1% of 100 Hz.

230 Frequency bypass 1 (FREQ. BYPASS 1)

231 Frequency bypass 2 (FREQ. BYPASS 2)
232 Frequency bypass 3 (FREQ. BYPASS 3)
233 Frequency bypass 4 (FREQ. BYPASS 4)
Value:
0.0 - parameter 200 ✭ 0.0 Hz
Programming
Function:
Some systems call for some output frequencies to be
avoided because of resonance problems in the system.

Description of choice:
Enter the frequencies to be avoided.
See also parameter 229.

234 Motor phase monitor

(MOTOR PHASE MON)
Value:
✭Enable (ENABLE) [0]
Disable (DISABLE) [1]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 121
 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Parameters - Inputs and outputs

Digital inputs Terminal no. 16 17 18 19 27 29 32 33

parameter 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307
Value:
No function (NO OPERATION) [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0]
Reset (RESET) [1]* [1] [1] [1] [1]
Coasting stop, inverse (COAST INVERSE) [0]*
Reset and coasting stop, inverse (COAST & RESET INVERS) [1]
Quick-stop, inverse (QSTOP INVERSE) [2]
DC-braking, inverse (DCBRAKE INVERSE) [3]
Stop inverse (STOP INVERSE) [2] [2] [4] [2] [2] [2]
Start (START) [1]*
Latched start (LATCHED START) [2]
Reversing (REVERSING) [1]*
Start reversing (START REVERSE) [2]
Only start clockwise, on (ENABLE START FWD.) [3] [3] [3] [3]
Only start anti-clockwise, on (ENABLE START REV) [3] [3] [4] [3]
Jog (JOGGING) [4] [4] [5]* [4] [4]
Preset reference, on (PRESET REF. ON) [5] [5] [5] [5] [5]
Preset reference, lsb (PRESET REF. SEL. LSB) [5] [7] [6]
Preset reference, msb (PRESET REF. MSB) [6] [8] [6]
Freeze reference (FREEZE REFERENCE) [7] [7]* [9] [7] [7]
Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [8] [8] [10] [8] [8]
Speed up (SPEED UP) [9] [11] [9]
Speed down (SPEED DOWN) [9] [12] [9]
Choice of Setup, lsb (SETUP SELECT LSB) [10] [13] [10]
Choice of Setup, msb (SETUP SELECT MSB) [10] [14] [10]
Choice of Setup, msb/speed up (SETUP MSB/SPEED UP) [11]*
Choice of Setup, lsb/speed down (SETUP LSB/SPEED DOWN) [11]*
Catch-up (CATCH UP) [11] [15] [12]
Slow-down (SLOW DOWN) [11] [16] [12]
Ramp 2 (RAMP 2) [12] [12] [17] [13] [13]
Mains failure inverted (MAINS FAILURE INVERSE) [13] [13] [18] [14] [14]
Pulse reference (PULSE REFERENCE) [23] [28]1
Pulse feedback (PULSE FEEDBACK) [24]
Encoder feedback input, A (ENCODER INPUT 2A) [25]
Encoder feedback input, B (ENCODER INPUT 2B) [24]
Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK) [24] [5]
Data change lock (PROGRAMMING LOCK) [29] [29] [29] [29] [29]

1) If this function is selected for terminal 29, the same function for terminal 17 will not be valid, even if it has been selected
to be active.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

122 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

300 Terminal 16, input Start, is selected if a start/stop (operating

(DIGITAL INPUT 16) command, group 2) command is desired. Logic
Function: ’1’ = start, logic ’0’ = stop.
In this and the following parameters it is possible
to choose between the different possible functions
related to the inputs on terminals 16-33.
The function options are shown in the table on page
111. The maximum frequency for terminal 16, 17,
18 and 19 is 5 kHz. The maximum frequency for
terminals 29, 32 and 33 is 65 kHz.

Description of choice: Latched start - if a pulse is applied for min. 3 ms,

No function is selected if the frequency converter is the motor will start, provided no stop command
not to react to signals transmitted to the terminal. (operating command, group 2). The motor stops
if Stop inverse is activated briefly.
Reset zeroes the frequency converter after an alarm;
however, not all alarms can be reset. Reversing is used for changing the direction of
rotation of the motor shaft. Logic "0" will not lead
Coasting stop inverse is used for making the to reversing. Logic "1" will lead to reversing. The
frequency converter let go of the motor to make it coast reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation;
freely to stop. Logic ’0’ leads to coasting stop and reset. it does not activate the start function.
Reversing requires that Both directions has been
Reset and coasting stop inverse, is used for
selected in parameter 200.
activating coasting stop at the same time as reset.
Is not active if Process control, closed loop,
Logic ‘0’ leads to coasting stop and reset
Torque control open loop or Torque control, speed
Quick-stop inverse is used for stopping the motor in feedback has been selected.
accordance with the quick-stop ramp (set in parameter
Start reversing, is used for start/stop (operating
212). Logic ’0’ leads to a quick-stop.
command, group 2) and for reversing with the same
DC braking inverse is used for stopping the signal. No signal is allowed on terminal 18 at the
motor by energizing it with a DC voltage for a same time. Acts as latch start reversing, provided
given time, see parameters 125-127. latch start has been chosen for terminal 18.
Please note that this function is only active if the Is not active if Process control, closed loop
value of parameters 126-127 is different from 0. has been selected.
Logic ’0’ leads to DC braking.
Start clockwise only, on is used if the motor shaft is
Stop inverse is activated by interrupting the voltage only to be able to rotate clockwise when starting. Programming
to the terminal. This means that if the terminal Should not be used with Process control, closed loop.
has no voltage, the motor cannot run. The stop
Start anti-clockwise only , is used if the motor shaft
will be effected in accordance with the selected
is to rotate anti-clockwise when started.
ramp (parameters 207/208/209/210).
Should not be used with Process control, closed loop.
None of the above-mentioned stop
Jog is used for overriding the output frequency to the
commands (start-disable) are to be used
jog frequency set in parameter 213. The ramp time
as disconnection switch in connection
can be set in parameter 211. Jog is not active if a
with repairs. Cut mains instead.
stop command has been given (start-disable). Jog
NB!: overrides stop (operating command, group 2).
It must be noted that when the frequency
Preset reference, on is used for shifting between
converter is at the torque limit and has received
external reference and preset reference. It is assumed
a stop command, it will only stop if terminal
that External/preset [2] has been selected in parameter
42, 45, 01 or 04 has been connected to terminal
214. Logic ’0’ = external references active; logic
27. The data choice on terminal 42, 45, 01 or 04
’1’ = one of the four preset references is active
must be Torque limit and stop [27].
in accordance with the table below.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 123
 VLT® 5000 Series

Preset reference, lsb and Preset reference, msb

enables a choice of one of the four preset references, Example:
in accordance with the table below. Terminal Freeze ref./
Preset ref. msb Preset ref. lsb (16) (17) Freeze output
Preset ref. 1 0 0 No speed change 0 0 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 Speed down 0 1 1
Preset ref. 3 1 0 Speed up 1 0 1
Preset ref. 4 1 1 Speed down 1 1 1

Freeze reference - freezes the actual reference. The The speed reference frozen via the control panel
frozen reference is now the point of enable/condition can be changed even if the frequency converter has
for Speed up and Speed down to be used. stopped. The frozen reference will be remembered
If speed up/down is used, the speed change in case of a mains drop-out.
always follows ramp 2 (parameters 209/210)
Selection of Setup, lsb and Selection of Setup,
in the range 0 - Ref MAX.
msb enables a choice of one of the four Setups;
Freeze output - freezes the actual motor however, this presupposes that parameter 004
frequency (Hz). The frozen motor frequency is has been set at Multi Setup.
now the point of enable/condition for Speed up
Selection of Setup, msb/Speed up and Selection
and Speed down to be used.
of Setup, lsb/Speed down - together with
If speed up/down is used, the speed change
the use of Freeze reference or Freeze output -
always follows ramp 2 (parameters 209/210)
enable up/down speed change.
in the range 0 - fM,N.
The selection of Setup occurs in accordance
NB!:
with the below verification table:
If Freeze output is active, the frequency
converter cannot be stopped via terminals Selection of Setup Freeze ref/
18 and 19, but only via terminal 27 (to (32)msb (33)lsb Freeze output
be programmed for Coasting stop, inverse [0] or Setup 1 0 0 0
Reset and coasting stop, inverse [1]). Setup 2 0 1 0
Setup 3 1 0 0
After Freeze output, the PID integrators are reset. Setup 4 1 1 0
No speed change 0 0 1
Speed up and Speed down are selected if digital Speed down 0 1 1
control of the up/down speed is desired (motor Speed up 1 0 1
potentiometer). This function is only active if Freeze Speed down 1 1 1
reference or Freeze output has been selected. As long
as there is a logic ‘1‘ on the terminal selected for speed Catch-up/Slow-down is selected if the reference
up, the reference or the output frequency will increase. value is to be increased or reduced by a programmable
Follow ramp 2 (parameter 209) in the range 0 - fMIN. percentage value set in parameter 219.
As long as there is a logic ‘1‘ on the terminal Slow-down Catch-up
selected for speed down, the reference or the
output frequency will be reduced. Follow ramp 2 Unchanged speed 0 0
(parameter 210) in the range 0 - fMIN. Reduced by %-value 1 0
Pulses (logic ‘1‘ minimum high for 3 ms and a minimum Increased by %-value 0 1
pause of 3 ms) will lead to a change of speed of 0.1% Reduced by %-value 1 1
(reference) or 0.1 Hz (output frequency).
Ramp 2 is selected if a change between ramp 1
(parameters 207-208) and ramp 2 (209-210) is desired.
Logic ’0’ leads to ramp 1, while logic ’1’ leads to ramp 2.

Mains failure inverted is to be selected if parameter

407 Mains failure and/or parameter 408 Quick

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

124 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

discharge is to be activated. Mains failure inverted Description of choice:

is active in the logical ‘0’ situation. See parameter 300.
See also Mains fault/quick discharge on
page 66, if required.

NB!: 302 Terminal 18 Start, input

The frequency converter can be totally (DIGITAL INPUT 18)
damaged by repeating the Quick discharge Value:
function on the digital input with mains See parameter 300.
voltage connected to the system.
Function:
Pulse reference is selected if a pulse sequence This parameter allows a choice between the different
(frequency) of 0 Hz is used, corresponding to RefMIN, options on terminal 18. The enabled functions are
parameter 204. The frequency is set in parameter shown in the table at the beginning of the section
327, corresponding to RefMAX. Parameters - Inputs and Outputs.
Maximum frequency for terminal 18 is 5 kHz.
Pulse feedback is selected if a pulse sequence
(frequency) is selected as a feedback signal. Description of choice:
Select Encoder feedback, input A, if encoder See parameter 300.
feedback is to be used after choosing Speed control,
closed loop or Torque control, speed feedback in
parameter 100. Set Pulse/rpm in parameter 329. 303 Terminal 19, input
(DIGITAL INPUT 19)
Select Encoder feedback, input B, if encoder
feedback is to be used with a 90° pulse to Value:
register the direction of rotation. See parameter 300.

Safety interlock has the same function as Coasting Function:

stop, inverse, but Safety interlock generates the alarm This parameter allows a choice between the
message "external fault" on the display when the different options on terminal 19. The functions are
selected terminal is logic "0". The alarm message will shown in the table at the beginning of the section
also be active via digital outputs 42/45 and relay outputs Parameters - Inputs and Outputs.
01/04 if programmed for Safety interlock. The alarm Maximum frequency for terminal 19 is 5 kHz.
can be reset using a digital input or the [OFF/STOP] key.
Description of choice:
Data change lock is selected if data changes See parameter 300.
to parameters are not to be made via the control
unit; however, it will still be possible to carry
Programming

out data changes via the bus.

304 Terminal 27, input
(DIGITAL INPUT 27)
Value:
301 Terminal 17, input
See parameter 300.
(DIGITAL INPUT 17)
Value: Function:
See parameter 300. This parameter allows a choice between the
different options on terminal 27.
Function: Functions are shown in the table at the beginning of
This parameter allows a choice between the the section Parameters - Inputs and Outputs.
different options on terminal 17. Maximum frequency for terminal 27 is 5 kHz.
The functions are shown in the table at the beginning
of the section Parameters - Inputs and Outputs.
Maximum frequency for terminal 17 is 5 kHz.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 125
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: shown in the table at the beginning of the section

See parameter 300. Parameters - Inputs and Outputs.
Maximum frequency for terminal 32 is 65 kHz.

Description of choice:
305 Terminal 29, input See parameter 300.
(DIGITAL INPUT 29)
Value:
See parameter 300. 307 Terminal 33, input
Function: (DIGITAL INPUT 33)
This parameter allows a choice between the Value:
different options on terminal 29. The functions are See parameter 300.
shown in the table at the beginning of the section
Parameters - Inputs and Outputs. Function:
Maximum frequency for terminal 29 is 65 kHz. This parameter allows a choice between the
different options on terminal 33. The functions are
Description of choice: shown in the table at the beginning of the section
See parameter 300. Parameters - Inputs and Outputs.
Maximum frequency for terminal 33 is 65 kHz.

Description of choice:
306 Terminal 32, input See parameter 300.
(DIGITAL INPUT 32)
Value:
See parameter 300.

Function:
This parameter allows a choice between the
different options on terminal 32. The functions are

Analogue inputs terminal no. 53(voltage) 54(voltage) 60(current)

parameter 308 311 314
Value:
No operation (NO OPERATION) [0] [0]✭ [0]
Reference (REFERENCE) [1] ✭ [1] [1] ✭
Feedback signal (FEEDBACK) [2] [2]
Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT CTRL) [3] [2] [3]
Thermistor (THERMISTOR INPUT) [4] [3]
Relative reference (RELATIVE REFERENCE) [4] [4]
Max. torque frequency (MAX. TORQUE FREQ.) [5]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

126 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

308 Terminal 53, analog input voltage This function is only active if Relative has been selected
(AI [V ] 53 FUNCT.) (parameter 214). The relative reference on terminal
Function: 54/60 is a percentage of the full range of the terminal
in question. This will be added to the sum of the other
This parameter allows a choice of the desired
references. If several relative references have been
option on terminal 53.
selected (preset reference 215-218, 311 and 314),
Scaling of the input signal is effected in
these will be added first, following which this sum will
parameters 309 and 310.
be added to the sum of the active references.
Description of choice:
NB!:
No operation. Is selected if the frequency converter is
If Reference or Feedback signal has been
not to react to signals connected to the terminal.
selected on more than one terminal, these
Reference. Is selected to enable change of reference
signals will be added with signs.
by means of an analogue reference signal.
If other inputs are connected, these are added Max. torque frequency. This is only used in Torque
up, taking account of their signs. control, open loop (parameter 100) for limiting the
Feedback-signal. Is selected if closed loop control output frequency. Selected if the max. output
with an analogue signal is used. frequency is to be controlled by an analogue input
Torque limit. Is used if the torque limit value signal. The frequency range goes from Output
set in parameter 221 is to be changed by frequency low limit (parameter 201) to Output
means of an analogue signal. frequency high limit (parameter 202).
Thermistor. Is selected if a motor-integrated thermistor
(according to DIN44080/81) should stop the frequency
converter in case of motor overtemperature. The
309 Terminal 53, min. scaling
cut-out value is > 3 k . The thermistor is connected to
terminal 50 and the actual input selected (53 or 54). (AI 53 SCALE LOW)
Value:
NB!: 0.0 - 10.0 Volt ✭ 0.0 Volt
If the temperature of the motor is utilized
through a thermistor via the frequency converter, Function:
the following most be noted: This parameter is used for setting the signal
In case of short circuits between motorwinding value that corresponds to the maximum reference
and thermistor, PELV is not complied with. value set in parameter 204.
In order to comply with PELV, the thermistor
must be utilized externally. Description of choice:
Set the desired voltage value.
See also section Handling of single references.
Programming

310 Terminal 53, max. scaling

(AI 53 SCALE HIGH)
Value:
0.0 - 10.0 Volt ✭ 10.0 Volt

Function:
This parameter is used for setting the signal
value that corresponds to the maximum reference
If a motor features a thermal switch instead, this value set in parameter 205.
can also be connected to the input. If motors run
Description of choice:
in parallel, the thermistors/thermal switches can
be connected in series (total resistance < 3 k ). Set the desired voltage value.
Parameter 128 must be programmed for Thermistor See also section Handling of single references.
warning [1] or Thermistor trip [2].
Relative reference is selected if a relative adjustment
of the reference sum is required.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 127
 VLT® 5000 Series

311 Terminal 54, analogue input voltage Scaling of the input signal is effected in
(AI [V] 54 FUNCT.) parameters 315 and 316.
Value: Description of choice:
See description of parameter 308
See description of parameter 308.
Function:
This parameter chooses between the different functions
available for the input, terminal 54. 315 Terminal 60, min. scaling
Scaling of the input signal is effected in (AI 60 SCALE LOW)
parameters 312 and 313.
Value:
Description of choice: 0.0 - 20.0 mA ✭ 4 mA
See description of parameter 308.
Function:
This parameter determines the value of the reference
signal that is to correspond to the minimum
312 Terminal 54, min. scaling reference value set in parameter 204.
(AI 54 SCALE LOW) If the Time-out function of parameter 317 is used,
Value: the value must be set at >2 mA.
0.0 - 10.0 Volt ✭ 0.0 Volt Description of choice:
Function: Set the desired current value.
This parameter is used for setting the scaling See also section Handling of single references.
value that corresponds to the minimum reference
value set in parameter 204.
316 Terminal 60, max. scaling
Description of choice:
(AI 60 SCALE HIGH)
Set the desired voltage value.
See also section Handling of single references. Value:
0.0 - 20.0 mA ✭ 20.0 mA

Function:
313 Terminal 54, max. scaling This parameter sets the value of the reference
(AI 54 SCALE HIGH) signal that is to correspond to the maximum
Value: reference value set in parameter 205.
0.0 - 10.0 Volt ✭ 10.0 Volt Description of choice:
Function: Set the desired current value.
This parameter is used for setting the signal See also section Handling of single references .
value that corresponds to the maximum reference
value set in parameter 205.
317 Time out
Description of choice:
(LIVE ZERO TIME O)
Set the desired voltage value.
Value:
See also section Handling of single references.
0 - 99 sec. ✭ 10 sec.

Function:
314 Terminal 60, analogue input current If the signal value of the reference signal connected
(AI [MA] 60 FUNCT) to the input, terminal 60, falls below 50% of the
value set in parameter 315 for a period longer than
Value:
the time set in parameter 317, the function selected
See description of parameter 308
in parameter 318 will be activated.
Function:
This parameter allows a choice between the different
functions available for the input, terminal 60.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

128 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice:
Set the desired time.

318 Function after time out

(LIVE ZERO FUNCT.)
Value:
✭Off (OFF) [0]
Freeze output frequency (FREEZE OUTPUT FREQ.) [1]
Stop (STOP) [2]
Jog (JOGGING) [3]
Max. speed (MAX SPEED) [4]
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5]

Function:
This parameter allows a choice of the function to
be activated if the input signal on terminal 60 drops
below 2 mA, provided parameter 315 has been set
higher than 2 mA and that the preset time for time-out
(parameter 317) has been exceeded.

If more time-outs occur at the same time the

frequency converter will give the following priority
to the time-out function:
1. Parameter 318 Function after time out
2. Parameter 346 Function after encoder loss
3. Parameter 514 Bus time interval function

Description of choice:
The output frequency of the frequency converter can be:
- frozen at the present value
- overruled to stop
- overruled to jog frequency
- overruled to max. frequency
- overruled to stop with subsequent trip.
Programming

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 129
 VLT® 5000 Series

Outputs terminal no. 42 45 01(re- 04

lay) (relay)
parameter 319 321 323 326
Value:
No function (NO OPERATION) [0] [0] [0] [0]
Control ready (CONTROL READY) [1] [1] [1] [1]
Ready signal (UNIT READY) [2] [2] [2] [2]
Ready - remote control (UNIT READY/REM CTRL) [3] [3] [3] [3] ✭
Enable, no warning (ENABLE/NO WARNING) [4] [4] [4] [4]
Running (VLT RUNNING) [5] [5] [5] [5]
Running, no warning (RUNNING/NO WARNING) [6] [6] [6] [6]
Running within range, no warning (RUN IN RANGE/NO WARN) [7] [7] [7] [7]
Running at reference value, no warning (RUN ON REF/NO WARN) [8] [8] [8] [8]
Fault (ALARM) [9] [9] [9] [9]
Fault or warning (ALARM OR WARNING) [10] [10] [10] [10]
Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT) [11] [11] [11] [11]
Out of current range (OUT OF CURRENT RANGE) [12] [12] [12] [12]
Over I low (ABOVE CURRENT,LOW) [13] [13] [13] [13]
Under I high (BELOW CURRENT,HIGH) [14] [14] [14] [14]
Out of frequency range (OUT OF FREQ RANGE) [15] [15] [15] [15]
Over f low (ABOVE FREQUENCY LOW) [16] [16] [16] [16]
Under f high (BELOW FREQUENCY HIGH) [17] [17] [17] [17]
Out of feedback range (OUT OF FDBK RANGE) [18] [18] [18] [18]
Over feedback low (ABOVE FDBK, LOW) [19] [19] [19] [19]
Under feedback high (BELOW FDBK, HIGH) [20] [20] [20] [20]
Thermal warning (THERMAL WARNING) [21] [21] [21] [21]
Ready - no thermal warning (READY & NOTHERM WARN) [22] [22] [22] ✭ [22]
Ready - remote control - no therm. (REM RDY & NO THERMWAR) [23] [23] [23] [23]
warn.
Ready - mains voltage within range (RDY NO OVER/UNDERVOL) [24] [24] [24] [24]
Reversing (REVERSE) [25] [25] [25] [25]
Bus ok (BUS OK) [26] [26] [26] [26]
Torque limit and stop (TORQUE LIMIT AND STOP) [27] [27] [27] [27]
Brake, no brake warning (BRAKE NO BRAKE WARNING) [28] [28] [28] [28]
Brake ready, no fault (BRAKE RDY (NO FAULT)) [29] [29] [29] [29]
Brake fault (BRAKE FAULT (IGBT)) [30] [30] [30] [30]
Relay 123 (RELAY 123) [31] [31] [31] [31]
Mechanical brake control (MECH. BRAKE CONTROL) [32] [32] [32] [32]
Control word bit 11/12 (CTRL WORD BIT 11/12) [33] [33]
Extended mechanical brake control (EXT. MECH. BRAKE) [34] [34] [34] [34]
Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK) [35] [35] [35] [35]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

130 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Outputs terminal no. 42 45 01(relay) 04

(relay)

parameter 319 321 323 326

Value:
0-100 Hz 0-20 mA (0-100 Hz = 0-20 mA) [36] [36]
0-100 Hz 4-20 mA (0-100 Hz = 4-20 mA) [37] [37]
0-100 Hz 0-32000 p (0-100 Hz = 0-32000P) [38] [38]
0 - fMAX 0-20 mA (0-FMAX = 0-20 mA) [39] [39] ✭
0 - fMAX 4-20 mA (0-FMAX = 4-20 mA) [40] [40]
0 - fMAX 0-32000 p (0-FMAX = 0-32000P) [41] [41]
RefMIN - RefMAX 0-20 mA (REF MIN-MAX = 0-20 mA) [42] [42]
RefMIN - RefMAX 4-20 mA (REF MIN-MAX = 4-20 mA) [43] [43]
RefMIN - RefMAX 0-32000 p (REF MIN-MAX = 0-32000P) [44] [44]
FBMIN - FBMAX 0-20 mA (FB MIN-MAX = 0-20 mA) [45] [45]
FBMIN - FBMAX 4-20 mA (FB MIN-MAX = 4-20 mA) [46] [46]
FBMIN - FBMAX 0-32000 p (FB MIN-MAX = 0-32000P) [47] [47]
0 - IMAX 0-20 mA (0-IMAX = 0-20 mA) [48] ✭ [48]
0 - IMAX 4-20 mA (0-IMAX = 4-20 mA) [49] [49]
0 - IMAX 0-32000 p (0-IMAX = 0-32000P) [50] [50]
0 - TLIM 0-20 mA (0-TLIM = 0-20 mA) [51] [51]
0 - TLIM 4-20 mA (0-TLIM = 4-20 mA) [52] [52]
0 - TLIM 0-32000 p (0-TLIM = 0-32000P) [53] [53]
0 - TNOM 0-20 mA (0-TNOM = 0-20 mA) [54] [54]
0 - TNOM 4-20 mA (0-TNOM = 4-20 mA) [55] [55]
0 - TNOM 0-32000 p (0-TNOM = 0-32000P) [56] [56]
0 - PNOM 0-20 mA (0-PNOM = 0-20 mA) [57] [57]
0 - PNOM 4-20 mA (0-PNOM = 4-20 mA) [58] [58]
0 - PNOM 0-32000 p (0-PNOM = 0-32000P) [59] [59]
0 - SyncRPM 0-20 mA (0-SYNCRPM = 0-20 mA) [60] [60]

0 -SyncRPM 4-20 mA (0-SYNCRPM = 4-20 mA) [61] [61]

0 - SyncRPM 0-32000 p (0-0-SYNCRPM = 0-32000 p) [62] [62]
0 - RPM at FMAX 0-20 mA (0-RPMFMAX = 0-20 mA) [63] [63]
0 - RPM at FMAX 4-20 mA (0-RPMFMAX = 4-20 mA) [64] [64]
0 - RPM at FMAX 0-32000 p (0-RPMFMAX = 0-32000 p) [65] [65]

319 Terminal 42, output

Ready, remote control, the frequency converter control
Programming
(AO 42 FUNCT.)
card is receiving a supply signal and parameter
Function: 002 has been set to remote control.
This output can act both as a digital and an analogue
output. If used as a digital output (data value Enable, no warning, the frequency converter is
[0]-[65]), a 24 V DC signal is transmitted; if used as ready for use; no start or stop command has been
an analogue output either a 0-20 mA signal, a 4-20 given (start/disable). No warning.
mA signal or a pulse output is transmitted.
Running is active when there is a start command
Description of choice: or the output frequency is above 0.1 Hz. Is
Control ready, the frequency converter is ready for also active during ramp down.
use; the control card receives supply voltage. Running, no warning , the output frequency is higher
Ready signal, the frequency converter control card than the frequency set in parameter 123. A start
is receiving a supply signal and the frequency command has been given. No warning.
converter is ready for operation.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 131
 VLT® 5000 Series

on the inputs. The mains voltage is within the

Runs in range, no warning, runs within the programmed
permitted voltage range (see chapter 8).
current/frequency ranges set in parameters 223-226.
Reversing. Logic ’1’ = relay activated, 24 V DC
Runs on reference, no warning, speed according
on the output when the direction of rotation of the
to reference. No warning.
motor is clockwise. Logic ’0’ = relay not activated,
Fault, output is activated by alarm. no signal on the output, when the direction of
rotation of the motor is anti-clockwise.
Fault or warning, the output is activated by
alarm or warning. Bus-ok, active communication (no time-out) via
the serial communication port.
Torque limit, the torque limit in parameter
221 has been exceeded. Torque limit and stop is used in connection with
coasting stop (terminal 27), where it is possible to
Out of current range, the motor current is outside the give a stop even if the frequency converter is at
range programmed in parameters 223 and 224. the torque limit. The signal is inverted, i.e. a logic
‘0’ when the frequency converter has received a
Over I low, the motor current is higher than
stop signal and is at the torque limit.
set in parameter 223.
Brake, no brake warning, the brake is active
Under I high, the motor current is lower than
and there are no warnings.
set in parameter 224.
Brake ready, no fault, the brake is ready for
Out of frequency range, the output frequency
operation and there are no faults.
is outside the frequency range programmed in
parameters 225 and 226. Brake fault, the output is a logical "1" when the brake
IGBT has short-circuited. This function is used to
Over f low, the output frequency is higher than
protect the frequency converter if there is a fault on the
the value set in parameter 225.
brake modules. To avoid a potential fire in the brake
Under f high, the output frequency is lower than resistor, the output/relay can be used to cut out the
the value set in parameter 226. supply voltage from the frequency converter.

Out of feedback range, the feedback signal is outside Relay 123, if Fieldbus profile [0] has been selected in
the range programmed in parameters 227 and 228. parameter 512, the relay is activated. If either OFF1,
OFF2 or OFF3 (bit in the control word) is logic ’1’.
Over feedback low, the feedback signal is higher
than the value set in parameter 227. Mechanical brake control, enables control of
an external mechanical brake, see also section
Under feedback high, the feedback signal is lower Mechanical brake control.
that the value set in parameter 228.
Control word bits 11/12, relay controlled via bits 11/12
Thermal warning, above the temperature limit in serial control word. Bit 11 relates to relay 01 and
in either the motor, the frequency converter, the bit 12 to relay 04. If parameter 514 Bus time interval
brake resistor or the thermistor. function is active, relays 01 and 04 will be voltage-free.
See section on Serial communication in the
Ready - no thermal warning, the frequency converter
Design Guide.
is ready for use, the control card receives supply
voltage and there are no control signals on the Extended mechanical brake control, enables
inputs. No over-temperature. control of an external mechanical brake, see also
section Mechanical brake control.
Ready - remote control - no thermal warning , the
frequency converter is ready for use and set at Safety interlock The output is active when Safety
remote control, the control card receives supply interlock has been selected on an input and
voltage. No over-temperature. the input is a logic "1".
Ready - mains voltage within range, the frequency 0-100 Hz 0-20 mA and
converter is ready for use, the control card receives 0-100 Hz 4-20 mA and
supply voltage and there are no control signals

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

132 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

0-100 Hz 0-32000 p, a pulse output 0 - RPM at F MAX 0-32000 p, n output signal

signal proportional to the output frequency proportional to the synchronous motor RPM at
in the range 0-100 Hz. FMAX (parameter 202) is obtained.

0-fMAX 0-20 mA and

0-fMAX 4-20 mA and
0-fMAX 0-32000 p, an output signal proportional 320 Terminal 42, output, pulse scaling
to the output frequency range in the range (AO 42 PULS SCALE)
0 - fMAX (parameter 202). Value:
1 - 32000 Hz ✭ 5000 Hz
RefMIN - RefMAX 0-20 mA and
RefMIN - RefMAX 4-20 mA and Function:
RefMIN - RefMAX 0-32000 p, an output signal This parameter allows scaling of the pulse output signal.
proportional to the reference value in the interval RefMIN
- RefMAX (parameters 204/205) is obtained. Description of choice:
Set the desired value.
BMIN -FBMAX 0-20 mA and
FBMIN -FB MAX 4-20 mA and
FBMIN -FBMAX 0-32000 p, an output signal
proportional to the feedback value in the interval FBMIN
-FBMAX (parameters 414/415) is obtained.

0 - IVLT, MAX 0-20 mA or

0 - IVLT, MAX 4-20 mA and
0 - IVLT, MAX 0-32000 p, an output signal proportional
to the output current in the interval 0 - IVLT,MAX
is obtained. IVLT,MAX depends on the settings in
parameter 101 and 103 and can be seen from
the Technical data (IVLT,MAX (60 s).

0 - MLIM 0-20 mA and

321 Terminal 45, output
0 - MLIM 4-20 mA and
(AO 45 FUNCT.)
0 - MLIM 0-32000 p, an output proportional to
the output torque in the interval 0 - TLIM (parameter Value:
221) is obtained. 20 mA corresponds to the See description for parameter 319.
value set in parameter 221.
Function:
0 - MNOM 0-20 mA and This output can function both as a digital and an Programming
0 - MNOM 4-20 mA and analogue output. Used as a digital output (data value
0 - MNOM 0-32000 p, an output signal proportional [0]-[35]) it generates a 24 V (max. 40 mA) signal; on the
to the output torque of the motor. 20 mA corresponds analogue outputs (data value [36]-[59]) there is a choice
to the rated torque for the motor. of 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or a scalable pulse output.

0 - PNOM 0-20 mA and Description of choice:

0 - PNOM 4-20 mA and See description for parameter 319.
0 - PNOM 0-32000 p, 0 - PNOM 0-32000 p,
an output signal proportional to the rated motor
output is obtained. 20 mA corresponds to the
322 Terminal 45, output, pulse scaling
value set in parameter 102.
(AO 45 PULS SCALE)
0 - SyncRPM 0-20 mA and Value:
0 - SyncRPM 4-20 mA and 1 - 32000 Hz ✭ 5000 Hz
0 - SyncRPM 0-32000 p, an output signal
proportional to the synchronous motor RPM is obtained. Function:
This parameter allows scaling of the pulse output signal.
0 - RPM at FMAX 0-20 mA and
0 - RPM at FMAX 4-20 mA and

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 133
 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: Description of choice:

Set the desired value. Enter the desired value (can be set at intervals
of 0.02 sec.).

323 Relay 01, output

(RELAY 1-3 FUNCT.) 326 Relay 04, output
Value: (RELAY 4-5 FUNCT.)
See description of parameter 319. Value:
See description of parameter 319.
Function:
This output activates a relay switch. Function:
Relay switch 01 can be used for bringing status and This output activates a relay switch.
warnings. The relay is activated when the conditions Relay switch 04 can be used for bringing status and
for the relevant data values have been fulfilled. warnings. The relay is activated when the conditions
Activation/deactivation can be delayed in for the relevant data values have been fulfilled.
parameter 324/325.
Description of choice:
Description of choice: See description of parameter 319.
See description of parameter 319. Connections - see the below drawing.
Connections - see the below drawing.

327 Pulse reference, max. frequency

324 Relay 01, ON delay (PULSE REF MAX)

(RELAY 1-3 ON DL) Value:

100 - 65000 Hz at terminal 29
Value:
100 - 5000 Hz at terminal 17 ✭ 5000 Hz
0.00 - 600.00. ✭ 0.00 sec.
Function:
Function:
In this parameter, the signal value is set that
This parameter allows a delay of the cut-in time
corresponds to the maximum reference value set
of relay 01 (terminals 01-02).
in parameter 205. Setting of this parameter affects
Description of choice: an internal filter constant, i.e. at 100 Hz = 5 sec;
Enter the desired value (can be set at intervals 1 kHz = 0.5 sec. and at 10 kHz = 50 msec. To
of 0.02 sec.). avoid a too long filter time constant at low pulse
resolution, the reference (parameter 205) and this
parameter can be multiplied by the same factor and
in this way use the lower reference range.
325 Relay 01, OFF delay
(RELAY 1-3 OFF DL) Description of choice:
Value: Set the desired pulse reference.
0.00 - 600.00 ✭ 0.00 sec.

Function:
This parameter makes it possible to delay the cut-out
time of relay 01 (terminals 01-03).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

134 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

328 Pulse feedback, max. frequency 330 Freeze reference/output function

(PULSE FEEDB MAX) (FREEZE REF/OUTP.)
Value: Value:
100 - 65000 Hz at terminal 33 ✭ 25000 Hz ✭No operation (NO OPERATION) [0]
Freeze reference (FREEZE REFERENCE) [1]
Function: Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [2]
This is where to set the feedback value that is to
correspond to the maximum feed back value. Function:
In this parameter it is possible to freeze either
Description of choice: the reference or the output.
Set the desired feedback value.
Description of choice:
Freeze reference [1] freezes the actual reference.
The frozen reference is now the basis for Speed
329 Encoder feedback pulse/rev.
up and Speed down.
(ENCODER PULSES)
Freeze output [2] freezes the actual motor frequency
Value: (Hz). The frozen frequency is now the basis for
128 pulses /rev. (128) [128] Speed up and Speed down.
256 pulses /rev. (256) [256]
512 pulses /rev. (512) [512] NB!:
✭1024 pulses /rev. (1024) [1024] If Freeze output is active, the frequency
2048 pulses /rev. (2048) [2048] converter cannot be stopped via terminals
4096 pulses /rev. (4096) [4096] 18 and 19, but only via terminal 27 (to
be programmed for Coasting stop, inverse [0] or
This value can also be set between 1-4096 pulses/rev. Reset and coasting stop, inverse [1]).

Function: After Freeze output, the PID integrators are reset.

This is where to set the encoder pulses per revolution
that correspond to the motor rpm.
This parameter is only available in Speed control, 345 Encoder loss timeout
closed loop and in Torque control, speed (ENC LOSS TIMEOUT)
feedback (parameter 100). Value:
Description of choice: 0 - 60 sec. ✭ 1 sec.
Read the correct value from the encoder. Pay attention Function:
to the speed limitation (rpm) for a given number of If the encoder signal is interrupted from terminal 32 or 33
pulses/rpm, see the drawing below: the function selected in parameter 346 will be activated.
Programming

If the encoder feedback signal is different from the

output frequency +/- 3 x nominal motor slip the
encoder loss function will be activated.
An encoder loss timeout can occur even if the encoder
works all right. Check the motor parameter in group
100 if no error can be found on the encoder.
The Encoder loss function is only active in Speed
control, closed loop [1] and Torque control, speed
feedback [5], see parameter 100 Configuration.

Description of choice:
Set the required time.
The encoder used is to be of the Open Collector
PNP 0/24 V DC type (max. 20 kHz) or a Push-Pull
circuit 0/24 V DC (max. 65 kHz).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 135
 VLT® 5000 Series

346 Encoder loss function

(ENC. LOSS FUNC)
Value:
✭Off (OFF) [0]
Freeze output frequency (FREEZE OUTPUT FREQ.) [1]
Jog (JOGGING) [3]
Max. speed (MAX SPEED) [4]
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5]
Select Setup 4 (SELECT SETUP 4) [7]

Function:
In this parameter the function can be activated if the
encoder signal is disconnected from terminal 32 or 33.

If more time-outs occur at the same time the

frequency converter will give the following priority
358 Terminal 42, Output maximum scaling
to the time-out function:
1. Parameter 318 Function after time out (OUT 42 SCAL MAX)
2. Parameter 346 Function after encoder loss 360 Terminal 45, Output maximum scaling
3. Parameter 514 Bus time interval function. (OUT 45 SCAL MAX)

Description of choice: Value:

000 - 500% ✭ 100%
The output frequency of the frequency converter can be:
- frozen at the present value Function:
- overruled to jog frequency These parameters are to scale the maximum
- overruled to max. frequency output of the selected analogue/pulse signal
- overruled to stop with subsequent trip on terminals 42 and 45.
- overruled to Setup 4.
Description of choice:
Set the value to the desired maximum value
357 Terminal 42, Output minimum scaling of the current signal output.

(OUT 42 SCAL MIN)

359 Terminal 45, Output minimum scaling
(OUT 45 SCAL MIN)
Value:
000 - 100% ✭ 0%

Function:
These parameters are to scale the minimum
output of the selected analogue/pulse signal
on terminals 42 and 45.

Description of choice:
The minimum value is to be scaled as a percentage
of the maximum signal value, i.e. 0mA (or 0 Hz)
is desired at 25% of the maximum output value,
and then 25% is programmed.
The value can never be higher than the corresponding
setting of Output maximum scaling if this
value is below 100%.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

136 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice:

Maximum value: Set the desired threshold level.

The output can be scaled to give a lower current

than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an output
below 100% of the maximum signal value.
If 20 mA is the desired output current at a value
between 0 - 100% of the full-scale output, program the
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20 mA.
If a current between 4 and 20 mA is desired at
maximum output (100%), the percentage value to
program in the drive is calculated as:

i.e.

A similar scaling is possible on the pulse output.

The value (pulse scale value) in parameter 320
(output 42) and 321 (output 45) is the basis of
the scaling. If the pulse scale value is the desired
output at a value between 0 - 100% of the full
scale output, program the percentage, i.e. 50%
for pulse scale value at 50% output.
If a pulse frequency between 0,2 x pulse scale Programming
value and pulse scale value, the percentage
is calculated as follows:

361 Encoder loss threshold

(ENCODER MAX ERR.)
Value:
0 - 600% ✭ 300%

Function:
This parameter adjusts the threshold level for detection
of encoder loss in speed closed loop mode. The value
equals a percentage of the nominal slip of the motor.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 137
 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Parameters - Special functions

Warning: If Overvoltage control [2] is used
at the same time as the supply voltage
400 Brake function/overvoltage control
to the frequency converter is close to or
(BRAKE FUNCTION) above the maximum limit, there is a risk that the motor
Value: frequency will increase and that, consequently, the
✭Off (OFF) [0] frequency converter will not stop the motor when
Resistor brake (RESISTOR) [1] stop is pressed. If the supply voltage is higher than
Overvoltage control (OVERVOLTAGE CONTROL) [2] 264 V for 200-240 V units, higher than:
Overvoltage control and stop • 264 V for 200-240 V units
(OVERVOLT CTRL. & STOP) [3] • 550 V for 380-500 V units
• 660 V for 525-600 V units
Function: • 759 V for 525-690 V units
The factory setting is Off [0] for VLT 5001-5027
200-240 V, VLT 5001-5102 380-500 V and VLT Overvoltage control and stop [3] should be selected
5001-5062 525-600 V. For VLT 5032-5052 200-240 V, so that the motor can be stopped.
5122-5552 380-500 V, and VLT 5042-5602 525-690
V the factory setting is Overvoltage control [2].
Resistor brake [1] is used for programming the 401 Brake resistor, ohm
frequency converter for connection of a brake resistor. (BRAKE RES. (OHM))
The connection of a brake resistor allows a Value:
higher intermediate circuit voltage during braking Depends on the unit ✭ Depends on the unit
(generating operation).
The Resistor brake [1] function is only active in units Function:
with an integral dynamic brake (SB and EB units). This parameter gives the ohmic value of the brake
resistor. This value is used for monitoring the
Overvoltage control (excl. brake resistor) can power to the brake resistor provided this function
be selected as an alternative. This function has been selected in parameter 403.
is available in all variants.
Description of choice:
The function ensures that a trip can be avoided if the Set the present resistor value.
intermediate circuit voltage increases. This is done
by increasing the output frequency to limit the voltage
from the intermediate circuit. This is a very useful
function, e.g. if the ramp-down time is too short, since 402 Brake power limit, kW
tripping of the frequency converter is avoided. In this (BR.POWER. LIM.KW)
situation, the ramp-down time is extended. Value:
Depends on the unit ✭ Depends on the unit
NB!:
Please note that the ramp-down time is extended Function:
in the case of overvoltage control, which in This parameter gives the monitoring limit of the
some applications may not be appropriate. power transmitted to the brake resistor.

Description of choice: Description of choice:

Select Resistor brake [1] if a brake resistor The monitoring limit is determined as a product of
is part of the system. the maximum duty cycle (120 sec.) that will occur
Select Overvoltage control [2] if the overvoltage control and the maximum power of the brake resistor at that
function is required in all cases - also if stop is pressed. duty cycle according to the following formula.
The frequency converter will not stop in the case of a For 200 - 240 V units: P =
stop command when the overvoltage control is active.
Select Overvoltage control and stop [3] if the For 380 - 500 V units: P =
overvoltage control function is not required during
For 525 - 600 V units: P =
ramp-down after stop has been pressed.
For 525 - 690 V units: P =

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

138 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

403 Power monitoring is carried out when there is no braking. A warning

(POWER MONITORING) or trip disconnects the brake function.
Value: The testing sequence is as follows:
1. If the intermediate circuit voltage is higher than the
Off (OFF) [0]
brake starting voltage, discontinue the brake check.
✭Warning (WARNING) [1]
2. If the intermediate circuit voltage is unstable,
Trip (TRIP) [2]
discontinue the brake check.
Function: 3. Carry out a brake test.
This parameter allows monitoring of the power 4. If the intermediate circuit voltage is lower than the
transmitted to the brake resistor. The power is starting voltage, discontinue the brake check.
calculated on the basis of the resistor ohm value 5. If the intermediate circuit voltage is unstable,
(parameter 401), the intermediate circuit voltage and discontinue the brake check.
the resistor running time. If the power transmitted 6. If the braking power is higher than 100%,
over 120 sec. exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit discontinue the brake check.
(parameter 402) and Warning [1] has been selected, 7. If the intermediate circuit voltage is higher than
a warning will come up on the display. The warning the intermediate circuit voltage -2% before the
will disappear if the power goes below 80%. If the brake test, discontinue the brake check and
calculated power exceeds 100% of the monitoring give off a warning or alarm.
limit and Trip [2] has been selected in parameter 403 8. Brake check OK.
Power monitoring, the frequency converter will cut out
Description of choice:
while giving an alarm. If power monitoring has been
selected as Off [0] or Warning [1], the brake function If Off [0] is selected, this function will still monitor whether
will remain active, even if the monitoring limit has been the brake resistor and the brake IGBT short-circuit
exceeded.This may lead to thermal overload of the during operation, in which case it will give off a warning.
resis tor. It is also possible to have a warning via the If Warning [1] is selected, the brake resistor and brake
relay/digital outputs. The typical measuring accuracy IGBT will be monitored with respect to short-circuiting.
of the power monitoring depends on the accuracy of In addition, on power-up it will be checked whether
the resistor ohmic value (better than ± 20%). the brake resistor has been disconnected.

NB!: NB!:
The power dissipation during quick A warning in connection with Off [0] or Warning
discharge does not form part of the power [1] can only be removed by disconnecting the
monitoring function. mains supply and turning it back on, provided
the fault has been corrected. Please note that in
Description of choice: connection with Off [0] or Warning [1] the frequency
Select whether this function is to be active ( converter will continue even if a fault has been found.
Warning/Alarm) or inactive (Off).
Programming
In the case of Trip [2], the frequency converter will
cut out while giving an alarm (trip locked) if the brake
resistor has short-circuited or been disconnected
404 Brake check or if the brake IGBT has short-circuited.
(BRAKE TEST)
Value:
✭Off (OFF) [0] 405 Reset function (RESET MODE)
Warning (WARNING) [1]
Value:
Trip (TRIP) [2]
✭Manual reset (MANUAL RESET) [0]
Function: Automatic reset x 1 (AUTOMATIC X 1) [1]
In this parameter a testing and monitoring function Automatic reset x 2 (AUTOMATIC X 2) [2]
can be integrated which will give a warning or an Automatic reset x 3 (AUTOMATIC X 3) [3]
alarm. On power-up it will be tested whether the brake Automatic reset x 4 (AUTOMATIC X 4) [4]
resistor is disconnected. The test of whether the brake Automatic reset x 5 (AUTOMATIC X 5) [5]
resistor is disconnected is carried out during braking, Automatic reset x 6 (AUTOMATIC X 6) [6]
while the test of whether the IGBT is disconnected Automatic reset x 7 (AUTOMATIC X 7) [7]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 139
 VLT® 5000 Series

Automatic reset x 8 (AUTOMATIC X 8) [8] Function:

Automatic reset x 9 (AUTOMATIC X 9) [9] Using the mains failure function, it is possible to
Automatic reset x 10 (AUTOMATIC X 10) [10] ramp down the load to 0 Hz if the mains supply
to the frequency converter fails.
Function: In parameter 450 Mains voltage during mains
This parameter makes it possible to select the fault, the voltage limit must be set at which the
reset function desired after tripping. Mains fault function is to be active.
After reset, the frequency converter can be restarted. This function can also be activated by selecting
Mains failure inverted on a digital input.
Description of choice:
When Kinetic backup [4] is selected, the ramp function
If Manual reset [0] is selected, reset must be effected
in parameter 206-212 is deactivated.
via the [RESET] key or via the digital inputs.
Controlled ramp down and kinetic back up have
If the frequency converter is to carry out an
limited perfomance above 70% load.
automatic reset (1-10 times) after tripping,
select data value [1]-[10]. Description of choice:
Select No function [0] if this function is not required. If
NB!:
Controlled ramp-down [1] is selected, the motor will
The internal AUTOMATIC RESET counter is
ramp via the quick-stop ramp set in parameter 212. If
reset 10 minutes after the first AUTOMATIC
the supply voltage is re-established during ramp-down,
RESET has occurred.
the frequency converter will start up again. If Controlled
Warning: The motor may start ramp-down and trip [2] is selected, the motor will ramp
without warning. via the quick-stop ramp set in parameter 212.
At 0 Hz the frequency converter will trip (ALARM 36,
mains failure). If the supply voltage is re-established
during ramp-down, the frequency converter will
406 Automatic restart time continue the quick-stop ramp and trip. If Coasting [3]
(AUT RESTART TIME) is selected, the frequency converter will turn off the
inverters and the motor will start coasting.
Value:
Parameter 445 Flying motor must be active,
0 - 10 sec. ✭ 5 sec.
so that if the supply voltage is re-established,
Function: the frequency converter will be able to catch
This parameter allows setting of the time from tripping the motor and start up again.
until the automatic reset function begins. If Kinetic back-up [4] is selected, the frequency
It is assumed that automatic reset has been converter will try to utilise the energy from the
selected in parameter 405. load to maintain a constant intermediate circuit
voltage. If the supply voltage is re-established, the
Description of choice: frequency converter will start up again.
Set the desired time. If Controlled alarm suppression [5] is selected, the
frequency converter will trip if there is a mains failure
and the unit is not stopped by OFF1, OFF2 or OFF3
407 Mains failure via the Profibus. Only active with Fieldbus profile
(par. 512) selected and Profibus installed.
(MAINS FAILURE)
Value:
✭No function (NO FUNCTION) [0]
Controlled ramp-down 408 Quick discharge
(CONTROL RAMP DOWN) [1] (QUICK DISCHARGE)
Controlled ramp-down and trip Value:
(CTRL. RAMP DOWN-TRIP) [2] ✭Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
Coasting (COASTING) [3] Possible (ENABLE) [1]
Kinetic back-up (KINETIC BACKUP) [4]
Controlled alarm suppression Function:
(CTRL ALARM SUPP) [5] The option is given of quickly discharging
the intermediate circuit capacitors by means
of an external resistor.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

140 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: 411 Switching frequency

This function is only active in extended units, since (SWITCH FREQ.)
it requires the connection of external 24 V DC and a Value:
brake resistor or discharge resistor; otherwise, the ✭Depends on the unit output.
data selection is limited to Disable [0].
This function can be activated by selecting a digital Function:
input signal for Mains failure inverted . Select Disable if The set value determines the switching frequency of
this function is not required. Select Enable and connect the frequency converter. If the switching frequency
24 V DC external supply and a brake/discharge resistor. is changed, this may help to minimise possible
See section Quick discharge. acoustic noise from the motor.

NB!:
The output frequency of the frequency converter
409 Trip delay torque can never assume a value higher than 1/10
(TRIP DELAY TORQ.) of the switching frequency.
Value:
Description of choice:
0 - 60 sec. (OFF) ✭ OFF
When the motor is running, the switching frequency is
Function: adjusted in parameter 411 until the frequency has been
When the frequency converter registers that the obtained at which the motor is as low-noise as possible.
output torque has increased up to the torque limits See also parameter 446 - switching pattern. See
(parameters 221 and 222) in the set time, cutting out derating in the Design Guide.
is effected when that time has passed.
NB!:
Description of choice: Switching frequencies higher than 3.0 kHz (4.5
Select how long the frequency converter is to be kHz for 60°C AVM) lead to automatic derating of
able to run at the torque limit before cutting out. 60 the maximum output of the frequency converter.
sec. = OFF means that the time is infinite; however,
the thermal monitoring will still be active.
412 Output frequency dependent switching
frequency
(VAR CARRIER FREQ)
410 Trip delay-inverter
Value:
(INV.FAULT DELAY)
✭Not possible (DISABLE) [0]
Value: Possible (ENABLE) [1]
0 - 35 sec. ✭ Depends on type of unit
Function: Programming
Function: This function makes it possible to increase the
When the frequency converter registers an switching frequency at a falling output frequency. Used
overvoltage in the set time, cutting out is effected in applications with square torque characteristics
after that time has passed. (centrifugal pumps and fans) in which the load
declines depending on the output frequency. However,
Description of choice:
the maximum switching frequency is determined
Select how long the frequency converter is to be able by the value set in parameter 411.
to run at overvoltage before cutting out.
Description of choice:
NB!:
Select Not possible [0] if a permanent switching
If this value is reduced from the factory
frequency is desired.
setting, the unit may report a fault when the
Set the switching frequency in parameter 411. If
mains voltage is turned on.
Possible [1] is selected the switching frequency will
decline at an increasing output frequency.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 141
 VLT® 5000 Series

413 Overmodulation function 415 Maximum feedback

(OVERMODUL) (MAX. FEEDBACK)
Value: Value:
Off (OFF) [0] Min. feedback - 100,000.000 ✭ 1,500.000
✭On (ON) [1]
Function:
Function: This value should be 10% higher than par. 205
This parameter allows connection of the Maximum reference, to keep the frequency converter
overmodulation function for the output voltage. from integrating as a response to a possible offset fault.
For further description, see parameter 414.
Description of choice:
Off means that there is no overmodulation of the Description of choice:
output voltage, which means that torque ripple on Set the value to be shown on the display when
the motor shaft is avoided. This can be a good Maximum feedback is obtained on the selected
feature, e.g. on grinding machines. feedback input (parameter 308 or 314). The
On means that an output voltage can be obtained maximum value can be limited by the choice of
which is greater than the mains voltage (up to 15%). configuration (parameter 100).

414 Minimum feedback 416 Reference/feedback unit

(MIN. FEEDBACK) (REF/FEEDB. UNIT)
Value: Value:
-100,000.000 - Max. feedback ✭ 0.000 NO UNIT [0]
✭% [1]
Function: PPM [2]
Parameters 414 and 415 are used to scale the display RPM [3]
text to make it show the feedback signal as the actual bar [4]
unit proportional to the signal on the input. This value CYCLE/min [5]
will be displayed if Feedback [unit] [3] has been selected PULSE/s [6]
in one of parameters 009-012 and in the display mode. UNITSS/s [7]
Choose the feedback signal unit in parameter 416.
UNITS/min [8]
Used together with Speed control, closed loop;
UNITS/h [9]
Process control, closed loop and Torque control
°C [10]
speed feedback, (parameter 100).
Pa [11]
Description of choice: l/s [12]
m3 /s [13]
Is only active when parameter 203 has been
set to Min-Max [0]. l/min [14]
Set the value to be shown on the display when m3 /min [15]
Minimum feedback is obtained on the selected l/h [16]
feedback input (parameter 308 or 314). m3 /h [17]
The minimum value can be limited by the choice of kg/s [18]
configuration (parameter 100) and reference/feedback kg/min [19]
range (parameter 203). kg/h [20]
If Speed control, closed loop [1] has been t/min [21]
selected in parameter 100, minimum feedback t/h [22]
cannot be set under 0. m [23]
N m [24]
m/s [25]
m/min [26]
°F [27]
in wg [28]
gal/s [29]
ft3 /s [30]

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

142 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

gal/min [31] process signal connected to terminal 53, 60 or 33

ft3 /min [32] (pulse), will, however, be displayed in the form of the
gal/h [33] unit selected in parameter 416. If parameter 013 is
ft3 /h [34] chosen as LCP control/as par. 100 or LCP digital
lb/s [35] control/as par. 100, the unit will be as described
lb/min [36] above under parameter 002, Remote-control.
lb/h [37]
NB!:
lb ft [38]
The above applies to display of Reference
ft/s [39]
[unit] and Feedback [unit]. If Reference [%] or
ft/min [40]
Feedback [%] is selected, the value displayed will
Function: be in the form of a percentage of the selected range.
Choose among different units to be shown
Description of choice:
on the display.
This unit is also used directly in Process control, Select the desired unit for the reference/feedback signal.
closed loop as a unit for Minimum/Maximum
reference (parameters 204/205) and i.
The possibility of choosing a unit in parameter 417 Speed PID proportional gain
416 will depend on the choices made in the (SPEED PROP GAIN)
following parameters:
Value:
Par. 002 Local/remote control.
0.000 (OFF) - 0.150 ✭ 0.015
Par. 013 Local control/config. as par. 100.
Par. 100 Configuration. Function:
Proportional gain indicates how many times the
Select parameter 002 as Remote control
fault (deviation between the feedback signal and
If parameter 100 is selected as Speed control, open
the setpoint) is to be amplified. Used together with
loop or Torque control, open loop , the unit selected in
Speed control, closed loop (parameter 100).
parameter 416 can be used in displays (par. 009-12
Feedback [unit]) of process parameters. Description of choice:

The process parameter to be displayed can be Quick control is obtained at high amplification, but
connected in the form of an external analogue signal to if the amplification is too high, the process may
terminal 53 (par. 308: Feedback signal) or terminal 60 become unstable in the case of overshoot.
(par. 314: Feedback signal), as well as in the form of a
pulse signal on terminal 33 (par. 307: Pulse feedback).
Note: The reference can only be shown in Hz ( Speed 418 Speed PID integral time
control, open loop) or Nm (Torque control, open loop). (SPEED INT. TIME) Programming
If par. 100 is selected as Speed control, closed loop,
Value:
parameter 416 is not active, since both reference
2.00 - 999.99 ms (1000 = OFF) ✭ 8 ms
and feedback are always shown as RPM.
If parameter 100 is selected as Process control, closed Function:
loop, the unit selected in parameter 416 will be used The integral time determines how long the PID
when displaying both reference (par. 009-12: Reference regulator takes to correct the error. The greater the
[unit]) and feedbac k (par. 009-12: Feedback [unit]). error, the quicker the gain increases. The integral
Scaling of the display indication as a function of the time results in a delay of the signal and thus has
selected range (par. 309/310, 312/313, 315/316, 327 a dampening effect. Used together with Speed
and 328) for a connected, external signal is effected control, closed loop (parameter 100).
for a reference in parameters 204 and 205 and for
feedback in parameters 414 and 415. Description of choice:
Quick control is obtained through a short integral time.
Select parameter 002 as Local control However, if this time is too short, it can make
If parameter 013 is chosen as LCP control and the process unstable.
open loop or LCP digital control and open loop , If the integral time is long, major deviations
the reference will be given in Hz, regardless of the from the required reference may occur, since
choice made in parameter 416. A feedback or

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 143
 VLT® 5000 Series

the process regulator will take long to regulate

if an error has occurred.

419 Speed PID differential time

(SPEED DIFF. TIME)
Value:
0.00 (OFF) - 200.00 ms ✭ 30 ms

Function:
The differentiator does not react to a constant
error. It only provides a gain if the error changes.
The quicker the error changes, the stronger the
gain from the differentiator will be.
The gain is proportional to the speed at
which errors change.
Used together with Speed control, closed
loop (parameter 100).

Description of choice:
Select the desired gain limit.

Description of choice:
420 Speed PID D-gain limit If a time constant (τ) e.g. of 100 ms is programmed,
(SPEED D-GAIN LIMIT) the cut-off frequency for the lowpass filter will be 1/0.1
Value: = 10 RAD/sec., corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz.
5.0 - 50.0 ✭ 5.0 This means that the PID regulator will only regulate
a feedback signal that varies by a frequency of less
Function: than 1.6 Hz. If the feedback signal varies by a higher
It is possible to set a limit for the gain provided by the frequency than 1.6 Hz, the PID regulator will not react.
differentiator. Since the D-gain increases at higher
frequencies, limiting the gain may be useful.
This enables obtaining a pure D-link at low frequencies
422 U 0 voltage at 0 Hz
and a constant D-link at higher frequencies.
Used together with Speed control, closed (U0 VOLTAGE (0HZ))
loop (parameter 100). Value:
0.0 - parameter 103 ✭ 20.0 volt
Description of choice:
Select the desired gain limit. Function:
Parameters 422-432 can be used together with Special
motor characteristics (par. 101). It is possible to
make a U/f characteristic on the basis of six definable
421 Speed PID lowpass filter time
voltages and frequencies. Change of motor nameplate
(SPEED FILT. TIME) data (parameter 102 - 106) affects parameter 422.
Value:
5 - 200 ms ✭ 10 ms Description of choice:
Set the desired voltage at 0 Hz.
Function: See the below drawing.
Oscillations on the feedback signal are dampened
by a lowpass filter so as to reduce their influence on
control. This might be an advantage, e.g. if there is a
great amount on noise on the system. See drawing.
Used together with Speed control, closed loop and
Torque control, speed feedback (parameter 100).
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

144 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

426 F 2 frequency
(F2 FREQUENCY)
Value:
par. 424 - par. 428 Factory setting of par. 104

Function:
This parameter sets the X-value of the 2nd break point.

Description of choice:
Set the frequency desired at the U2 voltage
set in parameter 425.
See drawing for parameter 422.
423 U 1 voltage
(U1 VOLTAGE)
Value:
427 U 3 voltage
0.0 - UVLT,MAX Factory setting of par. 103
(U3 VOLTAGE)
Function: Value:
This parameter sets the Y-value of the 1st break point. 0.0 - UVLT,MAX Factory setting of par. 103

Description of choice: Function:

Set the voltage desired at the F1 frequency This parameter sets the Y-value of the 3rd break point.
set in parameter 424.
See drawing for parameter 422. Description of choice:
Set the voltage desired at the F3 frequency
set in parameter 428.
See drawing for parameter 422.
424 F 1 frequency
(F1 FREQUENCY)
Value:
428 F 3 frequency
0.0 - par. 426 Factory setting of par. 104
(F3 FREQUENCY)
Function: Value:
This parameter sets the X-value of the 1st break point. par. 426 - par. 430 Factory setting of par. 104

Description of choice: Function:

Set the frequency desired at the U1 voltage This parameter sets the X-value of the 3rd break point.
set in parameter 423.
Programming
See drawing for parameter 422. Description of choice:
Set the frequency desired at the U3 voltage
set in parameter 427.
See drawing for parameter 422.
425 U 2 voltage
(U2 VOLTAGE)
Value:
429 U 4 voltage
0.0 - UVLT, MAX Factory setting of par. 103
(U4 VOLTAGE)
Function: Value:
This parameter sets the Y-value of the 2nd break point. 0.0 - UVLT,MAX Factory setting of par. 103

Description of choice: Function:

Set the voltage desired at the F2 frequency This parameter sets the Y-value of the 4th break point.
set in parameter 426.
See drawing for parameter 422. Description of choice:
Set the voltage desired at the F4 frequency
set in parameter 430.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 145
 VLT® 5000 Series

See drawing for parameter 422. 433 Torque control, open loop proportional gain
(TOR-OL PROP. GAIN)
Value:
430 F 4 frequency 0 (Off) - 500% ✭ 100%
(F4 FREQUENCY)
Function:
Value:
The proportional gain indicates how many times
par. 428 - par. 432 Factory setting of par. 104
the error (the deviation between feedback signal
Function: and set point) is to be applied.
This parameter sets the X-value of the 4th break point Used together with Torque control, open
loop (parameter 100).
Description of choice:
Description of choice:
Set the frequency desired at the U4 voltage
set in parameter 429. Fast control is obtained with a high gain, but if the gain
See drawing for parameter 422. is too high, the process may become unstable.

431 U 5 voltage 434 Torque control, open loop Integration time

(U5 VOLTAGE) (TOR-OL INT.TIME)

Value: Value:
0.0 - UVLT, MAX Factory setting of par. 103 0.002 - 2.000 sec. ✭ 0.02 sec.

Function: Function:
This parameter sets the Y-value of the 5th break point. The integrator provides an increasing gain if there
is a constant error between reference and current
Description of choice: measuring signal. The greater the error, the
Set the voltage desired at the F5 frequency quicker the gain increases. The integral time is
set in parameter 432. the time required by the integrator to reach the
same gain as the proportional gain.
Used together with Torque control, open
loop (parameter 100).
432 F 5 frequency
(F5 FREQUENCY) Description of choice:
Value: Fast control is obtained if the integral time is short.
par. 430 - 1000 Hz Factory setting of par. 104 However, this time may become too short, in which
case the process may become unstable.
Function:
This parameter sets the X-value of the 5th break point.
This parameter is not limited by parameter 200.
437 Process PID Normal/inverse control
Description of choice: (PROC NO/INV CTRL)
Set the frequency desired at the U5 voltage Value:
set in parameter 431. Normal (NORMAL) [0]
See drawing for parameter 422. ✭Inverse (INVERSE) [1]

Function:
It is possible to choose whether the process regulator
is to increase/reduce the output frequency. This is
done by having a difference between the reference
signal and the feedback signal.
Used together with Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100).

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

146 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice: which the process normally runs, which will enable the
If the frequency converter is to reduce the required process conditions to be reached sooner.
output frequency in case the feedback signal Used together with Process control, closed
increases, select Normal [0]. loop (parameter 100).
If the frequency converter is to increase the
Description of choice:
output frequency in case the feedback signal
increases, select Inverse [1]. Set the required start frequency.

NB!:
If the frequency converter is running at the
438 Process PID anti windup current limit before the desired start frequency
(PROC ANTI WINDUP) is obtained, the process regulator will not be
activated. For the regulator to be activated anyway, the
Value:
start frequency must be lowered to the required output
Off (DISABLE) [0]
frequency. This can be done during operation.
✭On (ENABLE) [1]

Function:
440 Process PID proportional gain
It is possible to select whether the process regulator
is to continue regulating on an error even if it is not (PROC. PROP. GAIN)
possible to increase/reduce the output frequency. Value:
Used together with Process control, closed 0.00 - 10.00 ✭ 0.01
loop (parameter 100).
Function:
Description of choice: The proportional gain indicates the number of
The factory setting is Enable [1], which means that times the error between the set point and the
the integration link is adjusted in relation to the feedback signal is to be applied.
actual output frequency if either the current limit or Used together with Process control, closed
the max./min. frequency has been reached. The loop (parameter 100).
process regulator will not engage again until either
Description of choice:
the error is zero or its sign has changed.
Select Disable [0] if the integrator is to continue Quick control is obtained by a high gain, but if the gain
integrating on an error, even if it is not possible is too high, the process may become unstable.
to remove the fault by such control.

NB!:
441 Process PID integral time
If Disable [0] is selected, it will mean that when
(PROC. INTEGR. T.)
the error changes its sign, the integrator will Programming
first have to integrate down from the level Value:
obtained as a result of the former error, before any 0.01 - 9999.99 sec. (OFF) ✭ OFF
change to the output frequency occurs.
Function:
The integrator provides an increasing gain at a constant
439 Process PID start frequency error between the set point and the feedback signal.
(PROC START VALUE) The greater the error, the quicker the gain will increase.
The integral time is the time needed by the integrator
Value:
to reach the same gain as the proportional gain.
fMIN -fMAX
The gain is proportional to the speed at which
(parameter 201 and 202) ✭ parameter 201
the error changes.
Function: Used together with Process control, closed
When the start signal comes, the frequency converter loop (parameter 100).
will react in the form of Speed control, open loop Description of choice:
following the ramp. Only when the programmed start
Quick control is obtained at a short integral time.
frequency has been obtained, will it change over to
However, this time may become too short, which
Process control, closed loop. In addition, it is possible
can make the process unstable.
to set a frequency that corresponds to the speed at
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 147
 VLT® 5000 Series

If the integral time is long, major deviations from 444 Process PID lowpass filter time
the required set point may occur, since the (PROC FILTER TIME)
process regulator will take a long time to regulate Value:
in relation to a given error. 0.01 - 10.00 ✭ 0.01

Function:
442 Process PID differentiation time Oscillations on the feedback signal are dampened
(PROC. DIFF. TIME) by the lowpass filter in order to reduce their impact
on the process control. This can be an advantage
Value:
e.g. if there is a lot of noise on the signal.
0.00 (OFF) - 10.00 sec. ✭ 0.00 sec.
Used together with Process control, closed
Function: loop (parameter 100).
The differentiator does not react to a constant error.
Description of choice:
It only provides a gain when the error changes.
Select the desired time constant (τ). If a time constant
The quicker the error changes, the stronger the
(τ) of 100 ms is programmed, the break frequency
gain from the differentiator.
for the lowpass filter will be 1/0.1 = 10 RAD/sec.,
The gain is proportional to the speed at which
corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz.
the error changes.
The process regulator will thus only regulate a feedback
Used together with Process control, closed
signal that varies by a frequency lower than 1.6 Hz. If
loop (parameter 100).
the feedback signal varies by a higher frequency than
Description of choice: 1.6 Hz, the Process regulator will not react.
Quick control is obtained with a long differentiation
time. However, this time may become too long,
which can make the process unstable. 445 Flying start
(FLYING START)
Value:
443 Process PID diff. gain limit ✭Off (DISABLE) [0]
(PROC. DIFF. GAIN) On (ENABLE) [1]
Value:
Function:
5.0 - 50.0 ✭ 5.0
This function makes it possible to catch spinning motor,
Function: which is spinning freely because of a mains drop-out.
It is possible to set a limit for the differentiator gain.
Description of choice:
The differentiator gain will increase if there are fast
Select Disable if this function is not required. Select
changes, which is why it can be beneficial to limit
Enable if the frequency converter is to be able to
this gain, thereby obtaining a pure differentiator gain
‘catch’ and control a spinning motor.
at slow changes and a constant differentiator gain
where quick changes to the error occur.
Used together with Process control, closed
loop (parameter 100). 446 Switching pattern
(SWITCH PATTERN)
Description of choice:
Value:
Select a limit to differentiator gain as required.
60° AVM (60° AVM) [0]
✭SFAVM (SFAVM) [1]

Function:
Choose between two different switching patterns:
60° AVM and SFAVM.

Description of choice:
Select60° AVM if the option of using a switching
frequency up to 14/10 kHz is required. Derating

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

148 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

of the rated output current IVLT.N is effected from 449 Torque, speed feedback Friction loss
a switching frequency of 4.5 kHz. (TOR-SF FRIC. LOSS)
SelectSFAVM if the option of using a switching Value:
frequency up to 5/10 kHz is required. Derating 0.00 - 50.00% of rated motor torque ✭ 0.00%
of the rated output current IVLT.N is effected from
a switching frequency of 3.0 kHz. Function:
This parameter is only used if Torque control, speed
feedback [5] has been selected in parameter 100.
447 Torque, speed feedback Torque
Set the friction loss as a fixed percentage loss of rated
compensation
torque. In motor operation, the friction loss will be
(TOR-SF COMP.) added to the torque, while in generating operation
Value: it will be deducted from the torque.
-100 - 100% ✭ 0% See section Setting of parameters, torque
regulation, speed feedback.
Function:
This parameter is only used if Torque control, Description of choice:
speed feedback [5] has been selected in parameter Set the required value.
100. Torque compensation is used in connection
with calibration of the frequency converter. By
adjusting parameter 447, Torque compensation,
450 Mains voltage at mains fault
the output torque can be calibrated.
(MAINS FAIL VOLT.)
See section Setting of parameters, torque
regulation, speed feedback. Value:
180-240 V for 200-240 V units ✭ 180
Description of choice: 342-500 V for 380-500 V units ✭ 342
Set the required value. 473-600 V for 525-600 V units ✭ 495
473-690 V for 525-690 V units ✭ 495

Function:
448 Torque, speed feedback Gear ratio
Set the voltage level at which parameter 407 Mains
with encoder
fault is to be activated. The voltage level for activating
(TOR-SF GEARRATIO)
the mains fault functions must be lower than the rated
Value: mains voltage supplied to the frequency converter.
0.001 - 100.000 ✭ 1.000 As a rule of thumb, parameter 450 can be set to
10% below the rated mains voltage.
Function:
This parameter is only used if Torque control, speed
Programming
Description of choice:
feedback [5] has been selected in parameter 100. If an Set the level for activating mains fault functions.
encoder has been fitted to the gearshaft, a gear ratio
must be set - otherwise the frequency converter will not NB!:
be able to calculate the output frequency correctly. If this value is set at too high a level, the mains
For a gear ratio of 1:10 (gearing down of motor fault function set in parameter 407 can be
rpm), set the parameter value to 10. activated, even if the mains voltage is present.
If the encoder has been fitted directly on the motor
shaft, set the gear ratio to 1.00.
453 Speed closed loop gear ratio
Description of choice: (SPEED GEARRATIO)
Set the required value. Value:
0.01 - 100.00 ✭ 1.00

Function:
This parameter is only used if Speed control, closed loop
[1] has been selected in parameter 100 Configuration.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 149
 VLT® 5000 Series

If the feedback has been fitted to the gearshaft, a gear 457 Phase loss function
ratio must be set - otherwise the frequency converter (PHASE LOSS FUNCT)
will not be able to detect an encoder loss. Value:
For a gear ratio of 1:10 (gearing down of motor ✭Trip (TRIP) [0]
rpm), set the parameter value to 10. Warning (WARNING) [1]
If the encoder has been fitted directly on the motor
shaft, set the gear ratio to 1.00. Function:
Please note, that this parameter only has influence Select the function which is to be activated if the mains
on the encoder loss function. imbalance becomes too high or if a phase is missing.

Description of choice: Description of choice:

Set the required value. At Trip [0] the frequency converter will stop the motor
within a few seconds (depending on drive size).
At Warning [1] only a warning will be exported when
a mains failure occurs, but in severe cases, other
454 Dead time compensation
extreme conditions might result in a trip.
(DEADTIME COMP.)
Value: NB!:
Off (OFF) [0] If Warning has been selected, the life
✭On (ON) [1] expectancy of the drive will be reduced
when the mains failure persists.
Function:
The active inverter dead time compensation which is NB!:
part of the VLT 5000 control algorithm (VVC+) is causing At phase loss, the internal cooling fans
instability at standstill when working in closed loop of some drive types cannot be powered.
control. The purpose of this parameter is switching off In order to avoid overheating, an external
the active dead time compensation to avoid instability. power supply can be connected.
IP00/IP20/NEMA
Description of choice: - VLT 5032-5052, 200-240 V
Select Off [0] to inactivate the dead time compensation. - VLT 5122-5552, 380-500 V
Select On [1] to activate the dead time compensation. - VLT 5042-5602, 525-690 V
- IP54
- VLT 5006-5052, 200-240 V
455 Frequency range monitor - VLT 5016-5552, 380-500 V
- VLT 5042-5602, 525-690 V
(MON. FREQ. RANGE)
See also Electrical Installation.
Value:
Disable [0]
✭Enable [1] 483 Dynamic DC link compensation
(DC LINK COMP.)
Function:
Value:
This parameter is used if warning 35 Out of frequency
Off [0]
range must be turned off in the display in process
✭On [1]
control closed loop. This parameter does not
affect the extended status word.
Function:
Description of choice: The frequency converter includes a feature, which
ensures that the output voltage is independent of
Select Enable [1] to enable the readout in the display
any voltage fluctuation in the DC link, e.g. caused
if warning 35 Out of frequency range occurs. Select
by fast fluctuation in the mains supply voltage. The
Disable [0] to disable the readout in the display if
benefit is a very steady torque on motor shaft (low
warning 35 Out of frequency range occurs.
torque ripple) under most mains conditions.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

150 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice:
In some cases this dynamic compensation can
cause resonance’s in the DC link and should then
be disabled. Typical cases are where a line choke or
a passive harmonic filter (e.g. filters AHF005/010)
is mounted in the mains supply to the frequency
converter to suppress harmonics. Can also occur
on mains with low short circuit ratio.

Programming

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 151
 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Parameters - Serial communication 502 Coasting

(COASTING SELECT)
500 Address 503 Quick-stop
(BUS ADDRESS)
(Q STOP SELECT)
Value:
504 DC-brake
1 - 126 ✭ 1
(DC BRAKE SELECT)
Function: 505 Start
This parameter allows specification of the address (START SELECT)
of each frequency converter. This feature is used 507 Selection of Setup
in connection with PLC/PC connection. (SETUP SELECT)

Description of choice: 508 Selection of speed

The individual frequency converters can be given an (PRES.REF. SELECT)
address between 1 and 126. The address 0 is used Value:
if a master (PLC or PC) wishes to send a telegram Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) [0]
that is to be received by all frequency converters Bus (SERIAL PORT) [1]
connected to the serial communication port at the Logic and (LOGIC AND) [2]
same time. In this case, the frequency converter ✭Logic or (LOGIC OR) [3]
will not acknowledge receipt. If the number of units
connected (frequency converters + master) exceeds Function:
31, a repeater is required. Parameter 500 cannot be Parameters 502-508 allow a choice between
selected via the serial communication port. controlling the frequency converter via the terminals
(digital input) and/or via the bus.
If Logic and or Bus is selected, the command
in question can only be activated if transmitted
501 Baudrate via the serial communication port. In the case
(BAUDRATE) of Logic and, the command must additionally be
Value: activated via one of the digital inputs.
300 Baud (300 BAUD) [0]
600 Baud (600 BAUD) [1] Description of choice:
1200 Baud (1200 BAUD) [2] Digital input [0] is selected if the control command in
2400 Baud (2400 BAUD) [3] question is only to be activated via a digital input.
4800 Baud (4800 BAUD) [4] Bus [1] is selected if the control command in
✭9600 Baud (9600 BAUD) [5] question is only to be activated via a bit in the
control word (serial communication).
Function: Logic and [2] is selected if the control command
This parameter is for programming the speed in question is only to be activated when a signal
at which data is to be transmitted via the serial is transmitted (active signal = 1) via both a
connection. Baud rate is defined as the number control word and a digital input.
of bits transferred per second.

Description of choice:
Digital input Bus Control
The transmission speed of the frequency converter
505-508 command
is to be set at a value that corresponds to the
0 0 0
transmission speed of the PLC/PC. Parameter 501 0 1 0
cannot be selected via the serial port, RS 485. The data 1 0 0
transmission time proper, which is determined by the set 1 1 1
baud rate, is only part of the total communication time.

Logic or [3] is selected if the control command in

question is to be activated when a signal is given (active
signal = 1) either via a control word or via a digital input.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

152 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Digital input Bus Control Description of choice:

505-508 command The jog frequency fJOG can be selected in the range
0 0 0 between fMIN (parameter 201) and fMAX (parameter 202).
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
510 Bus jog 2
(BUS JOG 2 FREQ.)
NB!:
Value:
Parameters 502-504 deal with stop functions
0.0 - parameter 202 ✭ 10.0 Hz
- see examples regarding 502 (coasting)
below. Active stop command "0". Function:
This is where to set a fixed speed (jog) that is activated
Parameter 502 = Logic and
via the serial communication port.
Digital input Bus Control command This function is the same as in parameter 213.
0 0 1 Coasting
0 1 0 Motor running Description of choice:
1 0 0 Motor running The jog frequency fJOG can be selected in the range
1 1 0 Motor running between fMIN (parameter 201) and fMAX (parameter 202).

Parameter 502 = Logic or

Digital input Bus Control command 512 Telegram profile
0 0 1 Coasting (TELEGRAM PROFILE)
0 1 1 Motor running Value:
1 0 1 Motor running
Fieldbus profile (FIELDBUS PROFILE) [0]
1 1 0 Motor running
✭FC Drive (FC DRIVE) [1]

506 Reversing Function:

(REVERSING SELECT) There is a choice of two different control word profiles.
Value: Description of choice:
✭Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) [0]
Select the desired control word profile.
Bus (SERIAL PORT) [1]
See Serial communication , in the Design Guide for
Logic and (LOGIC AND) [2]
further information about the control word profiles. See
Logic or (LOGIC OR) [3] also the dedicated fieldbus manuals for further details.
Function: Programming
See description under parameter 502.
513 Bus time interval
Description of choice: (BUS TIMEOUT TIME)
See description under parameter 502.
Value:
1 - 99 sec. ✭ 1 sec.

509 Bus jog 1 Function:

This parameter sets the maximum time expected
(BUS JOG 1 FREQ.)
to pass between the receipt of two consecutive
Value:
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, the serial
0.0 - parameter 202 ✭ 10.0 Hz
communication is assumed to have stopped and the
Function: desired reaction is set in parameter 514.
This is where to set a fixed speed (jog) that is activated Description of choice:
via the serial communication port.
Set the desired time.
This function is the same as in parameter 213.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 153
 VLT® 5000 Series

514 Bus time interval function

If more time-outs occur at the same time the
(BUS TIMEOUT FUNC)
frequency converter will give the following priority
Value: to the time-out function:
Off (OFF) [0] 1. Parameter 318 Function after time out
Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT) [1] 2. Parameter 346 Function after encoder loss
Stop (STOP) [2] 3. Parameter 514 Bus time interval function.
Jogging (JOGGING) [3]
Max. speed (MAX SPEED) [4] Description of choice:
Stop and trip (STOP AND TRIP) [5] The output frequency of the frequency converter
can: be frozen at the present value, be frozen at
Function: the reference, go to stop, go to jogging frequency
This parameter selects the desired reaction of the (parameter 213), go to max. output frequency
frequency converter when the set time for bus timeout (parameter 202) or stop and activate a trip.
(parameter 513) has been exceeded.
If choices [1] to [5] are activated, relay 01 and
relay 04 will be de-activated.

Parameter Description Display Unit Updating

no. text interval
515 Reference % (REFERENCE) % 80 msec.
516 Reference Unit (REFERENCE [UNIT]) Hz, Nm or rpm 80 msec.
517 Feedback (FEEDBACK) To be selected 80 msec.
via par. 416
518 Frequency (FREQUENCY) Hz 80 msec.
519 Frequency x Scaling (FREQUENCY X SCALE) - 80 msec.
520 Current (MOTOR CURRENT) Amp x 100 80 msec.
521 Torque (TORQUE) % 80 msec.
522 Power, kW (POWER (KW) kW 80 msec.
523 Power, HP (POWER (HP) HP (US) 80 msec.
524 Motor voltage (MOTOR VOLTAGE) V 80 msec.
525 DC link voltage (DC LNK VOLTAGE) V 80 msec.
526 Motor temp. (MOTOR THERMAL) % 80 msec.
527 VLT temp. (VLT THERMAL) % 80 msec.
528 Digital input (DIGITAL INPUT) Binary code 2 msec.
529 Terminal 53, analogue (ANALOG INPUT 53) V 20 msec.
input
530 Terminal 54, analogue (ANALOG INPUT 54) V 20 msec.
input
531 Terminal 60, analogue (ANALOG INPUT 60) mA 20 msec.
input
532 Pulse reference (PULSE REFERENCE) Hz 20 msec.
533 External reference % (EXT. REFERENCE) 20 msec.
534 Status word (STATUS WORD [HEX]) Hex code 20 msec.
535 Brake power/2 min. (BR. ENERGY/2 MIN) kW
536 Brake power/sec. (BRAKE ENERGY/S) kW
537 Heat sink temperature (HEATSINK TEMP.) °C 1.2 sec.
538 Alarm word (ALARM WORD [HEX]) Hex code 20 msec.
539 VLT control word (CONTROLWORD [HEX]) Hex code 2 msec.
540 Warning word, 1 (WARN. WORD 1) Hex code 20 msec.
541 Extended status word (EXT. STATUS WORD) Hex code 20 msec.
Hex
557 Motor RPM (MOTOR RPM) RPM 80 msec.
558 Motor RPM x scaling (MOTOR RPM X SCALE) - 80 msec.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

154 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Function: Power, (kW), parameter 522:

These parameters can be read out via the serial The value shown is calculated on the basis of the
communication port and via the display in Display actual motor voltage and motor current.
mode, see also parameters 009 - 012. The value is filtered, which means that it may take
approx. 1.3 seconds from an input value changes
Description of choice: until the data read-out changes values.
Reference %, parameter 515:
The value shown corresponds to rhe total Power (HP), parameter 523:
reference (sum of digital/analogue/preset/bus/freeze The value shown is calculated on the basis of the
ref./catch-up and slow-down). actual motor voltage and motor current.
The value is indicated in the form of HP.
Reference Unit, parameter 516: The value is filtered, which means that approx. 1.3
Gives the present value of terminals 17/29/53/54/60 in seconds may pass from an input value changes
the unit resulting from the choice of configuration in until the data read-out changes values.
parameter 100 (Hz, Nm or rpm) or in parameter 416.
See also parameters 205 and 416, if required. Motor voltage, parameter 524:
The value shown is a calculated value used
Feedback, parameter 517: for controlling the motor.
Indicates the status value of terminals 33/53/60 at the
unit/scale selected in parameters 414, 416 and 416. DC link voltage, parameter 525:
The value shown is a measured value.
Frequency, parameter 518: The value is filtered, which means that approx. 1.3
The value shown corresponds to the actual motor seconds may pass from an input value changes
frequency fM (without resonance dampening). until the data read-out changes values.

Frequency x scale, parameter 519: Motor temp., parameter 526:

The value shown corresponds to the actual motor
frequency fM (without resonance dampening) multiplied VLT temp., parameter 527:
by a factor (scaling) set in parameter 008. Only whole numbers are displayed.

Motor current, parameter 520: Digital input, parameter 528:

The value shown corresponds to the given motor The value shown indicates the signal status from the 8
current measured as a mean value IRMS. digital terminals (16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33).
The value is filtered, which means that approx. 1.3 The read-out is binary and the digit at the extreme left
seconds may pass from an input value changes gives the status of terminal 16, while the digit at the
until the data read-out changes values. extreme right gives the status of terminal 33.

Torque, parameter 521: Terminal 53, analogue input, parameter 529:

The value shown is the torque, with sign, supplied The value shown indicates the signal value
Programming

to the motor shaft. The value is given as a on terminal 53.

percentage of the rated torque. The scaling (parameters 309 and 310) does not
There is not exact linearity between 160% motor influence the read-out. Min. and max. are determined
current and torque in relation to the rated torque. Some by the offset and gain adjustment of the AD-converter.
motors supply more torque than that. Consequently,
Terminal 54, analogue input, parameter 530:
the min. value and the max. value will depend on the
The value shown indicates the signal value
max. motor current as well as the motor used.
on terminal 54.
The value is filtered, which means that approx. 1.3
The scaling (parameters 312 and 313) does not
seconds may pass from an input changes value
influence the read-out. Min. and max. are determined
until the data read-out changes values.
by the offset and gain adjustment of the AD-converter.
NB!:
Terminal 60, analogue input, parameter 531:
If the setting of the motor parameters does
The value shown indicates the signal value
not match the motor applied, the read-out
on terminal 60.
values will be inaccurate and may become
negative, even if the motor is not running or is
producing a positive torque.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 155
 VLT® 5000 Series

The scaling (parameters 315 and 316) does not

influence the read-out. Min. and max. are determined
by the offset and gain adjustment of the AD-converter. Motor RPM, parameter 557:
The displayed value corresponds to the actual
Pulse reference, parameter 532: motor RPM. In open loop or closed loop process
The value shown indicates any pulse reference in control, the motor RPM is estimated. In speed
Hz connected to one of the digital inputs. closed loop modes, it is measured.

External reference %, parameter 533: Motor RPM x scaling, parameter 558:

The value stated gives, as a percentage, the sum of The displayed value corresponds to the actual
external references (sum of analogue/bus/pulse). motor RPM multiplied by a factor (scaling)
set in parameter 008.
Status word, parameter 534:
Indicates the status word transmitted via the serial
communication port in Hex code from the frequency
converter. See the Design Guide. ■ LCP procedure for entering text
After selecting Display Text in parameter 009 and 010,
Brake power/2min., parameter 535: select display line parameter (553 or 554) and press
the CHANGE DATA key. Enter text directly into the
Indicates the brake power transmitted to an external
selected line by using UP, DN & LEFT, RIGHT arrow
brake resistor. The mean power is calculated on
keys on the LCP. The UP and DN arrow keys scroll
an ongoing basis for the latest 120 sec.
through the available characters. The Left and Right
Brake power/sec., parameter 536: arrow keys move the cursor through the line of text.
Indicates the given brake power transmitted
To lock in the text, press the OK key when the line of text
to an external brake resistor. Stated as an
is completed. The CANCEL key will cancel the text.
instantaneous value.
The available characters are:
Heat sink temperature, parameter 537:
States the given heat sink temperature of the ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
frequency converter. The cut-out limit is 90 ± 5°C, Æ Ø Å Ä Ö Ü É Ì Ù è . / - ( ) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ’space’
while the unit cuts back in at 60 ± 5°C.
’space’ is the default value of parameter 553 &
Alarm word, parameter 538: 554. To erase a character that has been entered,
States in Hex format whether there is an alarm it must be replaced with ’space’.
on the frequency converter.See section Warning
word 1, Extended status word and Alarm word 553 Display text 1
for further information. (DISPLAY TEXT ARRAY 1)
Value:
VLT control word, parameter 539:
Max. 20 characters [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Gives the control word sent via the serial communication
port in Hex code to the frequency converter. See Function:
the Design Guide for further information. Here, a text of max. 20 characters can be written
that will be shown in display line 1, provided LCP
Warning word, 1, parameter 540:
display text [27] has been selected in parameter 010
States in Hex format whether there is a warning
Display line 1.1. Example of display text:
on the frequency converter. See section Warning
word 1, Extended status word and Alarm word
175ZA792.10

for further information. CLEANING SYSTEM NO.2

Extended status word Hex, parameter 541:

States in Hex format whether there is a warning VLT NO.8 SETUP

1
on the frequency converter.

See section Warning word 1, Extended status word AUTO REMOTE RUNNING
and Alarm word for further information.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

156 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Description of choice:
The required text can be written via serial
communication or by means of the arrow
keypads on the LCP.

554 Display text 2

(DISPLAY TEXT ARRAY 2)
Value:
Max. 8 characters [XXXXXXXX]

Function:
Here, a text of max. 8 characters can be written that will
be shown in display line 2, provided LCP Display Text
[29] has been selected in parameter 009 Display line 2

Description of choice:
The required text can be written via serial
communication or by means of the arrow
keypads on the LCP.

580–582 Defined parameters

(DEFINED PARAM.)
Value:
Read only

Function:
The three parameters contain a list of all parameters
defined in the VLT. Each parameter contains up to
116 elements (parameter numbers). The number of
parameters that are in use (580, 581, 582) depends
on the respective VLT configuration. When a 0 is
used as a parameter number, the list ends.

Description of choice:
Programming

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 157
 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Parameters - Technical functions and diagnostics

Parameter no. Description Display text Unit Range

Operating data
600 Operating hours (OPERATING Hours 0 - 130,000.0
HOURS)
601 Hours run (RUNNING HOURS) Hours 0 - 130,000.0
602 kWh counter (KWH COUNTER) kWh 0 - 9999
603 No. of cut-ins (POWER UP’s) Nos. 0 - 9999
604 No. of overtemps (OVER TEMP’s) Nos. 0 - 9999
605 No. of overvoltages (OVER VOLT’S) Nos. 0 - 9999

Function:
These parameters can be read out via the kWh counter, parameter 602:
serial communication port and via the display States the power consumption from mains in
in the parameters. kWh as a mean value over one hour. Reset
counter: Parameter 618.
Description of choice:
No. of cut-ins, parameter 603:
Operating hours, parameter 600:
States the number of power-ups of the supply
Indicates the number of hours in which the frequency
voltage to the frequency converter.
converter has been in operation.
The value is updated in the frequency converter every No. of overtemps, parameter 604:
hour and saved when the unit is turned off. States the number of temperature faults there has
been on the frequency converter.
Hours run, parameter 601:
Indicates the number of hours in which the No. of overvoltages, parameter 605:
frequency converter has been in operation since States the number of overvoltages there has
reset in parameter 619. been on the frequency converter.
The value is updated in the frequency converter every
hour and saved when the unit is turned off.

Parameter no. Description Display text Unit Range

Data log
606 Digital inputs (LOG: DIGITAL INP) Decimal 0 - 255
607 Control word (LOG: CONTROL Decimal 0 - 65535
WORD
608 Status word (LOG: BUS STAT WD) Decimal 0 - 65535
609 Reference (LOG: REFERENCE) % 0 - 100
610 Feedback (LOG: FEEDBACK) Par. 416 999,999.99 -
999,999.99
611 Output frequency (LOG: MOTOR Hz. 0.0 - 999.9
FREQ.)
612 Output voltage (LOG: MOTOR VOLT) Volt 50 - 1000
613 Output current (LOG: MOTOR Amp 0.0 - 999.9
CURR.)
614 DC link voltage (LOG: DC LINK VOLT) Volt 0.0 - 999.9

Function: This parameter can be read out via the serial

Via this parameter it is possible to see up to 20 communication port or via the display.
data-logs, where [0] is the latest log and [19] the
oldest. Each data-log is made every 160 ms as long Description of choice:
as a start signal has been given. If a stop signal is The data-log number is stated in square brackets: [1].
given, the latest 20 data-logs will be saved and the Data-logs are frozen if there is a trip and released when
values will be available on the display. This is useful, the frequency converter is subsequently reset.
e.g. when carrying out service after a trip. Data-logging is active while the motor is running.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

158 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

10 (0-10) log values are stored.

Free a data-log if there is a trip and release it when
The lowest log number (1) contains the latest/most
resetting the frequency converter. Data-logging
recently saved data value; the highest log number
is active when the motor is running.
(10) contains the oldest data value.
Digital inputs, parameter 606:
Description of choice:
The value for the digital inputs is given as a decimal
figure within the range of 0-255. Given as a number code in which the trip number
The data-log number is stated in square brackets: [1] refers to an alarm code that can be seen in the
table in sectionWarnings and Alarms.

175ZA449.10
Reset the fault log after manual initialisation.
EXT. REFERENCE, %

63.0 %
606 DATALOG:DIGITALINPUT
616 Fault log: Time
(F.LOG: TIME)
[0] 40
Value:
[Index 1 - 10]
Control word, parameter 607:
The value for the control word is given as a decimal Function:
figure within the range of 0-65535. This parameter makes it possible to see the total
number of operating hours before the trip occurred.
Status word, parameter 608: 10 (0-10) log values are stored.
The value for the bus status word is given as a The lowest log number [1] contains the latest/most
decimal figure within the range of 0-65535. recently saved data value, while the highest log
Reference, parameter 609: number [10] contains the oldest data value.
The value of the reference is stated as a % Description of choice:
in the interval 0 - 100%.
Read out as an option.
Feedback, parameter 610: Indication range: 0.0 - 9999.9.
The value is stated as the parameterised feedback. Reset the fault log after manual initialisation.

Output frequency, parameter 611:

The value of the motor frequency is stated as a
617 Fault log: Value
frequency in the interval 0.0 - 999.9 Hz.
(F.LOG: VALUE)
Output voltage, parameter 612: Value:
The value of the motor voltage is stated as Volts [Index 1 - 10]
in the interval 50 - 1000 V.
Programming
Function:
Output current, parameter 613: This parameter makes it possible to see at what
The value for the motor current is stated as Amps current or voltage a given trip occurred.
in the interval 0.0 - 999.9 A.
Description of choice:
DC link voltage, parameter 614:
Read out as one value.
The value of the DC link voltage is stated as
Indication range: 0.0 - 999.9.
Volts in the interval 0.0 - 999.9 V.
Reset the fault log after manual initialisation.

615 Fault log: Error code

618 Reset of kWh counter
(F.LOG: ERROR COD) (RESET KWH COUNT)
Value: Value:
[Index 1 - 10] Error code 0 - 44 No reset (DO NOT RESET) [0]
Function: Reset (RESET COUNTER) [1]
This parameter makes it possible to see the
reason why a trip occurs.
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 159
 VLT® 5000 Series

Function: Description of choice:

Reset to zero of kWh hour counter (parameter 602). Normal function [0] is selected for normal operation
with the motor in the selected application.
Description of choice:
Function with deactivated inverter [1] is selected if
If Reset [1] has been selected and when the [OK] control is desired over the influence of the control
key is pressed, the kWh counter of the frequency signal over the control card and its functions -
converter is reset. This parameter cannot be without the inverter driving the motor.
selected via the serial port, RS 485. Control card test [2] is selected if control of
NB!: the analogue and digital inputs, as well as the
When the [OK] key has been activated, the analogue, digital relay outputs and the +10 V control
reset has been carried out. voltage is desired. A test connector with internal
connections is required for this test.

Use the following procedure for the control card test:

619 Reset of hours-run counter
(RESET RUN. HOUR) 1. Select Control card test.
Value: 2. Cut off the mains supply and wait for the
No reset (DO NOT RESET) [0] light in the display to go out.
Reset (RESET COUNTER) [1] 3. Insert the test plug (see below).
4. Connect to mains.
Function: 5. The frequency converter expects the [OK] key to be
Reset to zero of hours-run counter (parameter 601). pressed (if no LCP, set to Normal operation, when
the frequency converter will start up as usual).
Description of choice: 6. Carry out various tests.
If Reset [1] has been selected and when the [OK] key 7. Press the [OK] key.
is pressed, the hours-run counter of the frequency 8. Parameter 620 is automatically set to
converter is reset. This parameter cannot be Normal operation.
selected via the serial port, RS 485.
If a test fails, the frequency converter will move into
NB!: an infinite loop. Replace control card.
When the [OK] key has been activated, the
reset has been carried out. Test plugs:

620 Operating mode

(OPERATION MODE)
Value:
✭Normal function (NORMAL OPERATION) [0]
Function with de-activated inverter
(OPER. W/INVERT.DISAB) [1]
Control card test (CONTROL CARD TEST) [2]
Initialisation (INITIALIZE) [3]

Function:
In addition to its normal function, this parameter
can be used for two different tests. Inialisation [3] is selected if the factory setting of
Also, all parameters (except parameters the unit is desired without resetting parameters
603-605) can be initialised. 500, 501 + 600 - 605 + 615 - 617.

NB!: NB!:
This function will not become active until the The motor must be stopped before initialisation
mains supply to the frequency converter has can be carried out.
been turned off and then turned on again.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

160 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Procedure for initializing: the factory setting, except 600-605. The procedure
for manual initialisation is as follows:
1. Select Initialisation.
2. Press the [OK] key. 1. Disconnect the mains voltage and wait for the
3. Cut off the mains supply and wait for the light in the display to disappear.
light in the display to go out. 2. Hold down [DISPLAY/STATUS]+[MENU]+[OK] while
4. Connect to mains. at the same time connecting the mains supply. The
display will now read MANUAL INITIALIZE.
Manual initialisation can be carried out by holding down 3. When the display reads UNIT READY, the frequency
three keys at the same time as the mains voltage is converter has been initialized.
connected. Manual initialisation sets all parameters to

Parameter no. Description Display text

Nameplate
621 VLT type (VLT TYPE)
622 Power section (POWER SECTION)
623 VLT ordering number (VLT ORDERING NO)
624 Software version number (SOFTWARE VERSION)
625 LCP identification number (LCP ID NO)
626 Database identification number (PARAM DB ID)
627 Power section identification number (POWER UNIT DB ID)
628 Application option type (APP. OPTION)
629 Application option ordering number (APP. ORDER NO)
630 Communication option type (COM. OPTION)
631 Communication option ordering number (COM. ORDER NO)

Function:
The key data of the unit can be read out via the
Database identification number, parameter 626:
display or the serial communication port.
The key data of the unit can be read out via the
Description of choice: display or the serial communication port.
VLT type, parameter 621: For example: ID 1,14.
VLT Type indicates the unit size and basic Power section identification number,
function concerned. parameter 627:
For example: VLT 5008 380-500 V. The key data of the unit can be read out via the
Power section, parameter 622: display or the serial communication port.
The power section states the given power For example: ID 1,15.
Programming
section being used. Application option type, parameter 628:
For example: Extended with brake. This gives the type of application options fitted
VLT ordering number, parameter 623: with the frequency converter.
Ordering number gives the ordering number Application option ordering number,
of the VLT type in question. parameter 629:
For example: 175Z0072. This gives the ordering number for the
Software version number, parameter 624: application option.
Software version gives the version number. Communication option type, parameter 630:
For example: V 3,10. This gives the type of communication options
LCP identification number, parameter 625: fitted with the frequency converter
The key data of the unit can be read out via the Communication option ordering number,
display or the serial communication port. parameter 631:
For example:ID 1,42 2 kB. This gives the ordering number for the
communication option.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 161
 VLT® 5000 Series

NB!: 702 Relay 6, OFF delay

Parameters 700-711 for the relay card (RELAY6 OFF DELAY)
are only activatedif a relay option card is 705 Relay 7, OFF delay
installed in the VLT 5000.
(RELAY7 OFF DELAY)
700 Relay 6, function 708 Relay 8, OFF delay
(RELAY6 FUNCTION) (RELAY8 OFF DELAY)
703 Relay 7, function 711 Relay 9, OFF delay
(RELAY7 FUNCTION) (RELAY9 OFF DELAY)
706 Relay 8, function Value:
(RELAY8 FUNCTION) 0 - 600 sec. ✭ 0 sec.
709 Relay 9, function
Function:
(RELAY9 FUNCTION) This parameter is used to delay the cut-out time
Function: of relays 6/7/8/9 (terminals 1-2).
This output activates a relay switch. Relay outputs
6/7/8/9 can be used for showing status and warnings. Description of choice:
The relay is activated when the conditions for the Enter the required value.
relevant data values have been fulfilled.
Activation/deactivation can be programmed in
parameters 701/704/707/710 Relay 6/7/8/9, ■ Electrical installation of the relay card
ON delay and parameters 702/705/708/711 The relays are connected as shown below.
Relay 6/7/8/9, OFF delay.
Relay 6-9:
Description of choice: A-B make, A-C break
For data choice and connections see Max. 240 V AC, 2 Amp.
parameter 319 - 326.

701 Relay 6, ON delay

(RELAY6 ON DELAY)
704 Relay 7, ON delay
(RELAY7 ON DELAY)
707 Relay 8, ON delay
(RELAY8 ON DELAY)
710 Relay 9, ON delay
(RELAY9 ON DELAY)
Value: To achieve double isolation, the plastic foil must be
0 - 600 sec. ✭ 0 sec. mounted as shown in the drawing below.

Function:
This parameter allows a delay of the cut-in time
of relays 6/7/8/9 (terminals 1-2).

Description of choice:
Enter the required value.

✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port

162 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Outputs terminal no. Relay Relay Relay 08 Relay

06 07 09
parameter 700 703 706 709
Value:
No function (NO OPERATION) [0] [0] [0] [0]
Control ready (CONTROL READY) [1] [1] [1] [1]
Ready signal (UNIT READY) [2] ✭ [2] [2] [2]
Ready - remote control (UNIT READY/REM CTRL) [3] [3] [3] [3]
Enable, no warning (ENABLE/NO WARNING) [4] [4] [4] [4]
Running (VLT RUNNING) [5] [5] [5] [5]
Running, no warning (RUNNING/NO WARNING) [6] [6] [6] [6]
Running within range, no warning (RUN IN RANGE/NO WARN) [7] [7] [7] [7]
Running at reference value, no warning (RUN ON REF/NO WARN) [8] [8] [8] [8]
Fault (ALARM) [9] [9] [9] [9] ✭

Fault or warning (ALARM OR WARNING) [10] [10] [10] [10]

Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT) [11] [11] [11] [11]
Out of current range (OUT OF CURRENT RANGE) [12] [12] [12] [12]
Over I low (ABOVE CURRENT, LOW) [13] [13] [13] [13]
Under I high (BELOW CURRENT, HIGH) [14] [14] [14] [14]
Out of frequency range (OUT OF FREQ RANGE) [15] [15] [15] [15]
Over f low (ABOVE FREQUENCY LOW) [16] [16] [16] [16]
Under f high (BELOW FREQUENCY HIGH) [17] [17] [17] [17]
Out of feedback range (OUT OF FDBK RANGE) [18] [18] [18] [18]
Over feedback low (ABOVE FDBK, LOW) [19] [19] [19] [19]
Under feedback high (BELOW FDBK, HIGH) [20] [20] [20] [20]
Thermal warning (THERMAL WARNING) [21] [21] [21] [21]
Ready - no thermal warning (READY &NOTHERM WARN) [22] [22] [22] [22]
Ready - remote control - no therm. warn. (REM RDY&NO THERMWAR) [23] [23] [23] [23]
Ready - mains voltage within range (RDY NO OVER/UNDERVOL) [24] [24] [24] [24]
Reversing (REVERSE) [25] [25] [25] [25]
Bus ok (BUS OK) [26] [26] [26] [26]
Torque limit and stop (TORQUE LIMIT AND STOP) [27] [27] [27] [27] Programming
Brake, no brake warning (BRAKE NO WARNING) [28] [28] [28] [28]
Brake ready, no fault (BRAKE RDY (NO FAULT)) [29] [29] [29] [29]
Brake fault (BRAKE FAULT (IGBT)) [30] [30] [30] [30]
Relay 123 (RELAY 123) [31] [31] [31] [31]
Mechanical brake control (MECH. BRAKE CONTROL) [32] [32] [32] [32]
Control word bit 11/12 (CTRL WORD BIT 11/12) [33] [33] [33] [33]
Extended mechanical brake control (EXT. MECH. BRAKE) [34] [34] [34] [34]
Safety interlock (SAFETY INTERLOCK) [35] [35] [35] [35]
Mains ON (MAINS ON) [50] [50] [50] ✭ [50]
Motor running (MOTOR RUNNING) [51] [51] ✭ [51] [51]

Function:
Motor running [51], has the same logical function
Description of choice: as Mechanical brake control [32]
For description of choice please see parameter 319.

Mains ON [50], has the same logical function

as Running [5].
✭ = factory setting. () = display text [] = value for use in communication via serial communication port
MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 163
 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Trouble-shooting

Symptom How to handle

1. Motor runs unevenly If the motor runs unevenly, but no fault is given, this may be because
the frequency converter has been wrongly set.
Adjust the motor data settings.
Contact Danfoss if the new setting does not make the motor run
evenly.

2. Motor does not run Check if there is a backlight in the display.

If there is a backlight, please check if a fault message is displayed.
If yes, please consult the Warnings-section, if no, please refer to
symptom 5.
If there is no backlight, check if the frequency converter is connected
to mains supply. If yes, please refer to symptom 4.

3. Motor does not brake Please refer to Control with brake function.

4. No message or backlight in Check if the prefuses for the frequency converter have blown.
display If yes, call Danfoss for assistance.
If no, check if the control card is overloaded.
If so, disconnect all control signal plugs on the control card and
check if the fault disappears.
If yes, make sure that the 24 V supply is not short-circuited.
If no, call Danfoss for assistance.

5. Motor stopped, light in display, Start the frequency converter by pressing [START] on the control
but no fault report panel.
Check if the display is frozen, ie. the display cannot be changed
or is indefineable.
If yes, check if screened cables have been used and are connected
correctly.
If no, check that the motor is connected and that all motor phases
are OK.
The frequency converter must be set to run using local references:
Parameter 002 = Local operation
Parameter 003 = desired reference value
Connect 24 V DC to terminal 27.
The reference is changed by pressing ’+’ or ’-’.
Is the motor running?
If yes, check whether control signals to the control card are OK.
If no, call Danfoss for assistance.

164 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Display - Status messages

Status messages appear in the 4th line of the display,
Output current low (CURRENT LOW):
see the below example. The status message will
The output current is lower than the value set
be on the display for approx. 3 seconds.
in parameter 223. This message is only shown
when the motor is running.

FREQUENCY Braking max. (BRAKING MAX):

The brake is functioning.

20.0Hz Optimum braking is effected when the value in

parameter 402 Braking power limit, KW is exceeded.

Braking (BRAKING):
The brake is functioning.
SLOW DOWN
Ramp operation (REM/ RAMPING):
Remote has been selected in parameter 002 and
the output frequency is changed in accordance
Start clockwise/anti-clockwise
with the ramps set.
(START FORW./REV):
Input on digital inputs and parameter data are in conflict. Ramp operation (LOCAL/ RAMPING):
Local has been selected in parameter 002 and
Slow-down (SLOW DOWN):
the output frequency is changed in accordance
The output frequency of the frequency converter
with the ramps set.
is reduced by the percentage value chosen
in parameter 219. Running, local control (LOCAL/RUN OK):
Local control has been selected in parameter 002
Catch-up (CATCH UP):
and a start command is given on either terminal 18
The output frequency of the frequency converter
(START or LATCHED START in parameter 302) or
is increased by the percentage value chosen
terminal 19 (START REVERSE parameter 303).
in parameter 219.
Running, remote control (REM/RUN OK):
Feedback high (FEEDBACK HIGH):
Remote control has been selected in parameter 002 and
The FB value is higher than the value set in
a start command is given on either terminal 18 (START
parameter 228. This message is only shown
or LATCHED START in parameter 302), terminal 19
when the motor is running.
(START REVERSE parameter 303) or via the serial bus.
Feedback low (FEEDBACK LOW):
VLT ready, remote control (REM/UNIT READY):
The FB value is lower than the value set in
Remote control has been selected in parameter
parameter 227. This message is only shown
002 and Coasting stop inverse in parameter 304,
when the motor is running.
and there is 0 V on terminal 27.
Output frequency high (FREQUENCY HIGH):
VLT ready, local control (LOCAL/ UNIT READY):
The output frequency is higher than the value set
Local has been selected in parameter 002
in parameter 226. This message is only shown
and Coasting inverse in parameter 304, and
when the motor is running.
there is 0 V on terminal 27.
Output frequency low (FREQUENCY LOW):
Quick-stop, remote control (REM/QSTOP):
The output frequency is lower than the value set
Remote control has been selected in parameter
in parameter 225. This message is only shown
Miscellaneous

002 and the frequency converter has stopped via

when the motor is running.
a quick-stop signal on terminal 27 (or possibly
Output current high (CURRENT HIGH): via the serial communication port).
The output current is higher than the value set
in parameter 224. This message is only shown
when the motor is running.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 165

 VLT® 5000 Series

Quick-stop, local (LOCAL/ QSTOP): Jog operation, remote controlled

Local has been selected in parameter 002 and (REM/RUN JOG):
the frequency converter has stopped via a Remote control has been selected in parameter 002
quick-stop signal on terminal 27 (or possibly via and Jog in parameter 300, 301, 305, 306 or 307, and
the serial communication port). the terminal in question (16, 17, 29, 32 or 33) has been
activated (or possibly via the serial communication port).
DC stop, remote control (REM/DC STOP):
Remote control has been selected in parameter Jog operation, local (LOCAL/ RUN JOG):
002 and the frequency converter has stopped via Local has been selected in parameter 002 and Jog in
a DC stop signal on a digital input (or possibly parameter 300, 301, 305, 306 or 307, and the terminal
via the serial communication port). in question (16, 17, 29, 32 or 33) has been activated
(or possibly via the serial communication port).
DC braking, local (LOCAL/ DC STOP):
Local has been selected in parameter 002 and Overvoltage control (OVER VOLTAGE CONTROL):
the frequency converter has stopped via a DC The intermediate circuit voltage of the frequency
braking signal on terminal 27 (or possibly via converter is too high. The frequency converter is trying
the serial communication port). to avoid a trip by increasing the output frequency.
This function is activated in parameter 400.
Stop, remote controlled (REM/STOP):
Remote control has been selected in parameter Automatic Motor Adaptation (AUTO
002 and the frequency converter has stopped MOTOR ADAPT):
via the control panel or a digital input (or possibly Automatic Motor adaptation is running.
via the serial communication port).
Brake check finished (BRAKECHECK OK):
Stop, local (LOCAL/ STOP): Brake check of brake resistor and brake
Local has been selected in parameter 002 and transistor tested successfully.
the frequency converter has stopped via the
control panel or the digital input (or possibly via Quick Discharge finished (QUICK
the serial communication port). DISCHARGE OK):
Quick discharge has been completed successfully.
LCP stop, remote (REM/LCP STOP):
Remote has been selected in parameter 002 and Exceptions XXXX (EXCEPTIONS XXXX):
the frequency converter has via the control panel. The microprocessor of the control card has stopped and
The coast signal on terminal 27 is high. the frequency converter is out of operation. The cause
may be noise on the mains, motor or control cables,
LCP stop, local (LOCAL/LCP STOP): leading to a stop of the control card microprocessor.
Local has been selected in parameter 002 and the Check for EMC-correct connection of these cables.
frequency converter has stopped via the control panel.
The coast signal on terminal 27 is high. Ramp stop in fieldbus mode (OFF1):
OFF1 means that the drive is stopped by ramp down.
Stand by (STAND BY): The command to stop has been given over a fieldbus or
Remote control has been selected in parameter the RS485 serial port (select fieldbus in parameter 512).
002. The frequency converter will start when
it receives a start signal via a digital input (or Coast stop in fieldbus mode (OFF2):
the serial communication port). OFF2 means that the drive is stopped by coast. The
command to stop has been given over a fieldbus or the
Freeze output (FREEZE OUTPUT): RS485 serial port (select fieldbus in parameter 512).
Remote control has been selected in parameter 002
together with Freeze reference in parameter 300, Quick stop in fieldbus mode (OFF3):
301, 305, 306 or 307, and the terminal in question OFF3 means that the drive is stopped by quick stop.
(16, 17, 29, 32 or 33) has been activated (or possibly The command to stop has been given over a fieldbus or
via the serial communication port). the RS485 serial port (select fieldbus in parameter 512).

166 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Start not possible (START INHIBIT):

The drive is in fieldbus profile mode. OFF1, OFF2 or
OFF3 have been activated. OFF1 must be toggled
to be able to start (OFF1 set from 1 to 0 to 1).

Not ready for operation (UNIT NOT READY):

The drive is in Fieldbus profile mode (parameter
512). The drive is not ready for operation as bit
00, 01 or 02 in the control word is "0", the drive
has tripped or there is no mains supply (only seen
on units with 24 V DC supply).

Ready for operation (CONTROL READY):

The drive is ready for operation. For extended units
supplied with a 24 V DC supply the message also
comes up when there is not mains supply.

Bus jog, remote controlled (REM/RUN BUS JOG1):

Remote control has been selected in parameter 002
and the Fieldbus has been selected in parameter 512.
Bus Jog has been selected by the fieldbus or serial bus.

Bus jog, remote controlled (REM/RUN BUS JOG2):

Remote control has been selected in parameter 002
and Fieldbus has been selected in parameter 512. Bus
Jog has been selected by the fieldbus or serial bus.

Miscellaneous

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 167

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Warnings and alarms

The table gives the different warnings and alarms
Wherever a cross is placed under both Warning
and indicates whether the fault locks the frequency
and Alarm, this can mean that a warning precedes
converter. After Trip locked , the mains supply
the alarm. It can also mean that it is possible to
must be cut and the fault must be corrected.
program whether a given fault is to result in a warning
Reconnect the mains supply and reset the frequency
or an alarm. This is possible, e.g. in parameter
converter before being ready.
404 Brake check. After a trip, alarm and warning
will flash, but if the fault is removed, only alarm
will flash. After a reset, the frequency converter
will be ready to start operation again.
No. Description Warning Alarm Trip
locked
1 10 Volts low (10 VOLT LOW) X
2 Live zero fault (LIVE ZERO ERROR) X X
3 No motor (NO MOTOR) X
4 Phase fault (MAINS PHASE LOSS) X X X
5 Voltage warning high (DC LINK VOLTAGE HIGH) X
6 Voltage warning low (DC LINK VOLTAGE LOW) X
7 Overvoltage (DC LINK OVERVOLT) X X
8 Undervoltage (DC LINK UNDERVOLT) X X
9 Inverter overladed (INVERTER TIME) X X
10 Motor overloaded (MOTOR TIME) X X
11 Motor thermistor (MOTOR THERMISTOR) X X
12 Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT) X X
13 Overcurrent (OVERCURRENT) X X X
14 Earth fault (EARTH FAULT) X X
15 Switch mode fault (SWITCH MODE FAULT) X X
16 Short-circuit (CURR.SHORT CIRCUIT) X X
17 Standard bus timeout (STD BUS TIMEOUT) X X
18 HPFB bus timeout (HPFB TIMEOUT) X X
19 Fault in EEprom on power card (EE ERROR POWER CARD) X
20 Fault in EEprom on conrol card (EE ERROR CTRL. CARD) X
21 Auto-optimisation OK (AUTO MOTOR ADAPT OK) X
22 Auto-optimisation not OK (AUTO MOT ADAPT FAIL) X
23 Brake test failed (BRAKE TEST FAILED) X X
25 Brake resistor short-circuited (BRAKE RESISTOR FAULT ) X
26 Brake resistor power 100% (BRAKE POWER 100%) X X
27 Brake transistor short-circuited (BRAKE IGBT FAULT) X
29 Heat-sink temperature too high (HEAT SINK OVER TEMP.) X X
30 Motor phase U missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE U) X
31 Motor phase V missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE V) X
32 Motor phase W missing (MISSING MOT.PHASE W) X
33 Quick discharge not OK (QUICK DISCHARGE FAIL) X X
34 Profibus communication fault (PROFIBUS COMM. FAULT) X X
35 Out of frequency range (OUT FREQ RNG/ROT LIM) X
36 Mains failure (MAINS FAILURE) X X
37 Inverter fault (INVERTER FAULT) X X
39 Check parameters 104 and 106 (CHECK P.104 & P.106) X
40 Check parameters 103 and 105 (CHECK P.103 & P.105) X
41 Motor too big (Motor too big) X
42 Motor too small (Motor too small) X
43 Brake fault (BRAKE FAULT) X X
44 Encoder loss (ENCODER FAULT) X X
57 Overcurrent (OVERCURRENT) X X X
60 Safety stop (EXTERNAL FAULT) X X

168 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Warnings Alarm messages

The display flashes between normal state and warning. The alarm comes up in the 2. and 3. line of
A warning comes up on the first and second line of the display, see example below:
the display. See examples below. If parameter 027
is set to line 3/4, the warning will be shown in these TRIP (RESET)
lines if the display is in read-out state 1-3.

NO MOTOR
ALARM:12
TORQUE LIMIT
SETUP

WARN. 3 SETUP

WARNING 1
Under 10 Volts (10 VOLT LOW):
WARNING 6
The 10 Volts voltage from terminal 50 on the
Voltage warning low (DC LINK VOLTAGE LOW):
control card is below 10 Volts.
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is below the
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10
undervoltage limit of the control system. The
Volts supply is overloaded. Max. 17 mA/min. 590 .
frequency converter is still active.
WARNING/ALARM 2
WARNING/ALARM 7
Live zero fault (LIVE ZERO ERROR):
Overvoltage (DC LINK OVERVOLT):
The current signal on terminal 60 is less than 50% of the
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) exceeds
value set in parameter 315 Terminal 60,min. scaling.
the inverter overvoltage limit (see table), the
WARNING/ALARM 3 frequency converter will trip after the time set
No motor (NO MOTOR): in parameter 410 has passed.
The motor check function (see parameter 122) Furthermore, the voltage will be stated in the display.
indicates that no motor has been connected to The fault can be eliminated by connecting a brake
the output of the frequency converter. resistor (if the frequency converter has an integral brake
chopper, EB or SB) or by extending the time chosen in
WARNING/ALARM 4 parameter 410. In addition, Brake function/overvoltage
Phase fault (MAINS PHASE LOSS): control can be activated in parameter 400.
A phase is missing on the supply side or the
Alarm/warn-
mains voltage imbalance is too high.
ing limits:
This message can also appear if there is a fault in VLT 5000 3 x 200 3 x 380 - 3 x 525 - 3 X 525 -
the input rectifier on the frequency converter. Series - 240 V 500 V 600 V 690 v
Check the supply voltage and supply currents [VDC] [VDC] [VDC] [VDC]
to the frequency converter. Undervolt- 211 402 557 553
age
WARNING 5 Voltage 222 423 585 585
Voltage warning high warning low
(DC LINK VOLTAGE HIGH): Voltage 384/405 801/8401) 943/965 1084/1109
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than warning
the overvoltage limit of the control system. The high (w/o
Miscellaneous

frequency converter is still active. brake -

w/brake)
Overvoltage 425 855 975 1130

The voltages stated are the intermediate circuit

voltage of the frequency converter with a tolerance

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 169

 VLT® 5000 Series

of ± 5 %. The corresponding mains voltage is the

intermediate circuit voltage divided by 1.35
WARNING/ALARM 13
1) VLT 5122 - VLT 5552: 817/828 VDC.
Overcurrent (OVERCURRENT):
WARNING/ALARM 8 The inverter peak current limit (approx. 200% of the
Undervoltage (DC LINK UNDERVOLT): rated current) has been exceeded. The warning
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) drops will last approx. 1-2 seconds, following which the
below the inverter lower voltage limit (see table frequency converter will trip, while giving an alarm.
on previous page), it will be checked whether Turn off the frequency converter and check whether
24 V power supply is connected. the motor shaft can be turned and whether the motor
If no 24 V power supply is connected, the size matches the frequency converter.
frequency converter will trip after a given time If extended mechanical brake control is selected,
that depends on the unit. trip can be reset externally.
Furthermore, the voltage will be stated in the display.
ALARM: 14
Check whether the supply voltage matches the
Earth fault (Earth fault):
frequency converter, see technical data.
There is a discharge from the output phases to earth,
WARNING/ALARM 9 either in the cable between the frequency converter
Inverter overload (INVERTER TIME): and the motor or in the motor itself.
The electronic, thermal inverter protection reports that Turn off the frequency converter and remove
the frequency converter is about to cut out because the earth fault.
of an overload (too high current for too long). The
ALARM: 15
counter for electronic, thermal inverter protection
Switch mode fault (SWITCH MODE FAULT):
gives a warning at 98% and trips at 100%, while
Fault in the switch mode power supply (internal
giving an alarm. The frequency converter cannot
± 15 V supply).
be reset until the counter is below 90%.
Contact your Danfoss supplier.
The fault is that the frequency converter is overloaded
by more than 100% for too long. ALARM: 16
Short-circuiting (CURR.SHORT CIRCUIT):
WARNING/ALARM 10
There is short-circuiting on the motor terminals
Motor overtemperature (MOTOR TIME):
or in the motor itself.
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR),
Turn off the frequency converter and remove
the motor is too hot. Parameter 128 allows a choice of
the short-circuit.
whether the frequency converter is to give a warning
or an alarm when the counter reaches 100%. The WARNING/ALARM 17
fault is that the motor is overloaded by more than Standard bus timeout (STD BUS TIMEOUT)
100% for too long. Check that motor parameters There is no communication to the frequency converter.
102-106 have been set correctly. The warning will only be active when parameter 514
has been set to another value than OFF.
WARNING/ALARM 11
If parameter 514 has been set to stop and trip,
Motor thermistor (MOTOR THERMISTOR):
it will first give a warning and then ramp down
The thermistor or the thermistor connection has been
until it trips, while giving an alarm.
disconnected. Parameter 128 allows a choice of
Parameter 513 Bus time interval could possibly
whether the frequency converter is to give a warning or
be increased.
an alarm. Check that the thermistor has been correctly
connected between terminal 53 or 54 (analogue WARNING/ALARM 18
voltage input) and terminal 50 (+ 10 Volts supply). HPFB bus timeout (HPFB BUS TIMEOUT )
There is no communication with the frequency converter.
WARNING/ALARM 12
The warning will only be active when parameter 804
Torque limit (TORQUE LIMIT):
has been set to another value than OFF.
The torque is higher than the value in parameter 221
If parameter 804 has been set to Stop and trip,
(in motor operation) or the torque is higher than the
it will first give a warning and then ramp down
value in parameter 222 (in regenerative operation).
until it trips, while giving an alarm.
Parameter 803 Bus time interval could possibly
be increased.

170 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

WARNING 19 See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.

Fault in the EEprom on the power card
(EE ERROR POWER CARD) NB!:
There is a fault on the power card EEPROM. The AMA can only be carried out if there are
frequency converter will continue to function, but no alarms during tuning.
is likely to fail at the next power-up. Contact
your Danfoss supplier. WARNING/ALARM 23
Fault during brake test (BRAKE TEST FAILED):
WARNING 20 The brake test is only run after power-up. If Warning
Fault in the EEprom on the control card has been selected in parameter 404, the warning
(EE ERROR CTRL CARD) will come when the brake test finds a fault.
There is a fault in the EEPROM on the control If Trip has been selected in parameter 404, the frequency
card. The frequency converter will continue to converter will trip when the brake test finds a fault.
function, but is likely to fail at the next power-up. The brake test may fail for the following reasons:
Contact your Danfoss supplier. No brake resistor connected or fault in the
connections; defective brake resistor or defective
ALARM 21
brake transistor. A warning or alarm will mean
Auto-optimisation OK
that the brake function is still active.
(AUTO MOTOR ADAPT OK)
The automatic motor tuning is OK and the frequency WARNING 25
converter is now ready for operation. Brake resistor fault
(BRAKE RESISTOR FAULT):
ALARM: 22
The brake resistor is monitored during operation and
Auto-optimisation not OK
if it short-circuits, the brake function is disconnected
(AUTO MOT ADAPT FAIL)
and the warning comes up. The frequency converter
A fault has been found during automatic motor
will still be able to work, although without the
adaptation. The text shown in the display indicates a
brake function. Turn off the frequency converter
fault message. The figure after the text is the error code,
and replace the brake resistor.
which can be seen in the fault log in parameter 615.
ALARM/WARNING 26
CHECK P.103,105 [0]
Brake resistor power 100%
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
(BRAKE PWR WARN 100%):
LOW P.105 [1] The power transmitted to the brake resistor is
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA. calculated as a percentage, as a mean value over the
last 120 sec., on the basis of the resistance value of
ASYMMETRICAL IMPEDANCE [2] the brake resistor (parameter 401) and the intermediate
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA. circuit voltage. The warning is active when the
dissipated braking power is higher than 100%. If Trip
MOTOR TOO BIG [3]
[2] has been selected in parameter 403, the frequency
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
converter will cut out while giving this alarm.
MOTOR TOO SMALL [4]
WARNING 27
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
Brake transistor fault
TIME OUT [5] (BRAKE IGBT FAULT):
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA. The brake transistor is monitored during operation and
if it short-circuits, the brake function is disconnected
INTERRUPTED BY USER [6] and the warning comes up. The frequency converter
Miscellaneous

See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA. will still be able to run, but since the brake transistor has
short-circuited, substantial power will be transmitted
INTERNAL FAULT [7]
to the brake resistor, even if it is inactive.
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.
Turn off the frequency converter and remove
LIMIT VALUE FAULT [8] the brake resistor.
See section Automatic motor adaptation, AMA.

MOTOR ROTATES [9]

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 171

 VLT® 5000 Series

Warning: There is a risk of substantial power

being transmitted to the brake resis- tor if WARNING: 35
the brake transistor has short-circuited. Out of frequency range
(OUT OF FREQUENCY RANGE):
ALARM: 29 This warning is active if the output frequency has
Heat sink temperature too high reached its Output frequency low limit (parameter 201)
(HEAT SINK OVER TEMP.): or Output frequency high limit (parameter 202). If
If the enclosure is IP 00 or IP 20/NEMA 1, the cut-out the frequency converter is in Process control, closed
temperature of the heat-sink is 90°C. If IP 54 is loop (parameter 100), the warning will be active in the
used, the cut-out temperature is 80°C. display. If the frequency converter is in another mode
The tolerance is ± 5°C. The temperature fault than Process control, closed loop, bit 008000 Out of
cannot be reset, until the temperature of the frequency range in extended status word will be active,
heat-sink is below 60°C. while there will be no warning in the display.
The fault could be the following:
WARNING/ALARM: 36
- Ambient temperature too high
Mains failure (MAINS FAILURE):
- Too long motor cable
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage
- Too high switching frequency.
to the frequency converter is lost and if parameter 407
ALARM: 30 Mains fault has been set to another value than OFF.
Motor phase U missing If parameter 407 has been set to Contr. ramp-down
(MISSING MOT.PHASE U): trip [2], the frequency converter will first give a warning
Motor phase U between frequency converter and then ramp down and trip, while giving an alarm.
and motor is missing. Check the fuses to the frequency converter.
Turn off the frequency converter and check
ALARM: 37
motor phase U.
Inverter fault (Inverter fault):
ALARM: 31 IGBT or the power card is defective. Contact
Motor phase V missing your Danfoss supplier.
(MISSING MOT.PHASE V): Auto-optimisation warnings
Motor phase V between frequency converter Automatic motor adaptation has stopped, since some
and motor is missing. parameters have probably been set wrongly, or the
Turn off the frequency converter and check motor used is too big/small for AMA to be carried out.
motor phase V. A choice must thus be made by pressing [CHANGE
DATA] and choosing ‘Continue’ + [OK] or ‘Stop’ + [OK].
ALARM: 32 If parameters need to be changed, select
Motor phase W missing ‘Stop’; start up AMA all over.
(MISSING MOT.PHASE W):
Motor phase W between frequency converter WARNING: 39
and motor is missing. CHECK P.104,106
Turn off the frequency converter and check The setting of parameter 102, 104 or 106
motor phase W. is probably wrong. Check the setting and
choose ‘Continue’ or ‘Stop’.
ALARM: 33
Quick discharge not OK WARNING: 40
(QUICK DISCHARGE NOT OK): CHECK P.103,105
Check whether a 24 Volt external DC supply has The setting of parameter 102, 103 or 105
been connected and that an external brake/discharge is probably wrong. Check the setting and
resistor has been fitted. choose ‘Continue’ or ‘Stop’.

WARNING/ALARM: 34 WARNING: 41
Fieldbus communication fault MOTOR TOO BIG
(FIELDBUS COMMUNICATION FAULT): The motor used is probably too big for AMA to
The fieldbus on the communication option be carried out. The setting in parameter 102
card is not working. may not match the motor. Check the motor
and choose ‘Continue’ or ‘Stop’.

172 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

WARNING: 42
MOTOR TOO SMALL
The motor used is probably too small for AMA
to be carried out. The setting in parameter 102
may not match the motor. Check the motor
and choose ‘Continue’ or ‘Stop’.

ALARM: 43
Brake fault (BRAKE FAULT)
A fault has arisen on the brake. The text shown in
the display indicates a fault message. The figure
after the text is the fault code that can be seen
in the fault log, parameter 615.

Brake check failed (BRAKE CHECK FAILED) [0]

The brake check carried out during power-up indicates
that the brake has been disconnected. Check
whether the brake has been connected correctly
and that it has not been disconnected.

Brake resistor short-circuited

(BRAKE RESISTOR FAULT) [1]
The brake output has short-circuited. Replace
the brake resistor.

Brake IGBT short-circuited

(BRAKE IGBT FAULT) [2]
The brake IGBT has short-circuited. This fault means
that the unit is not able to stop the brake and that,
consequently, the resistor is constant being energized.

WARNING/ALARM: 44
Encoder loss (ENCODER FAULT)
The encoder signal is interrupted from terminal
32 or 33. Check the connections.

WARNING/ALARM: 57
Overcurrent (OVERCURRENT)
As warning/alarm 13, but in this case the warning/alarm
occurs together with a quick stop.

ALARM: 60
Safety stop (EXTERNAL FAULT)
Terminal 27 (parameter 304 Digital Inputs) has been
programmed for a safety interlock [3] and is a logic ’0’.
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 173

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Warning word 1, Extended status word Bit (Hex) Extended status word (parameter
and Alarm word 541)
The warning word 1, extended status word and 000001 Ramping
the alarm word return the different status, warning 000002 Automatic motor tuning
and alarm messages of the frequency converter as 000004 Start clockwise/anti-clockwise
hexdecimal value. If there are more than one warning 000008 Slow down
or alarm, a sum of all warnings or alarms will be shown. 000010 Catch-up
Warning word 1, extended status word and alarm 000020 Feedback high
word can also be displayed using the serial bus
000040 Feedback low
000080 Output current high
in parameter 540, 541 and 538.
000100 Output current low
Bit (Hex) Warning word 1 (parameter 540) 000200 Output frequency high
000001 Fault during brake test 000400 Output frequency low
000002 EE-prom power card fault 000800 Brake test ok
000004 EE-prom control card 001000 Braking max.
000008 HPFP bus timeout 002000 Braking
000010 Standard bus timeout 004000 Quick discharge OK
000020 Overcurrent 008000 Out of frequency range
000040 Torque limit
000080 Motor thermistor Bit (Hex) Alarm word 1 (parameter 538)
000100 Motor overload 000001 Brake test failed
000200 Inverter overload 000002 Trip locked
000400 Undervoltage 000004 AMA tuning not OK
000800 Overvoltage 000008 AMA tuning OK
001000 Voltage warning low 000010 Power-up fault
002000 Voltage warning high 000020 ASIC fault
004000 Phase fault 000040 HPFP bus timeout
008000 No motor 000080 Standard bus timeout
010000 Live zero fault 000100 Short-circuiting
(4-20 mA current signal low) 000200 Switchmode fault
020000 10 Volts low 000400 Earth fault
040000 000800 Overcurrent
080000 Brake resistor power 100% 001000 Torque limit
100000 Brake resistor fault 002000 Motor thermistor
200000 Brake transistor fault 004000 Motor overload
400000 Out of frequency range 008000 Inverter overload
800000 Fieldbus communication fault 010000 Undervoltage
1000000 020000 Overvoltage
2000000 Mains failure 040000 Phase fault
4000000 Motor too small 080000 Live zero fault (4 - 20 mA current
8000000 Motor too big signal low)
10000000 Check P. 103 and P. 105 100000 Heat sink temperature too high
20000000 Check P. 104 and P. 106 200000 Motor phase W missing
40000000 Encoder loss 400000 Motor phase V missing
800000 Motor phase U missing
1000000 Quick discharge not ok
2000000 Fieldbus communication fault
4000000 Mains failure
8000000 Inverter fault
10000000 Brake power fault
20000000 Encoder loss
40000000 Safety interlock
80000000 Reserved

174 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Definitions Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and

VLT: Coasting stop, Quick-stop, DC
braking, Stop and the "Stop" key.
IVLT,MAX
Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing,
The maximum output current.
Start reversing, Jog and Freeze
IVLT,N output
The rated output current supplied by the
frequency converter. Group 1 functions are called Start-disable commands.
The difference between group 1 and group 2 is that
UVLT MAX
in group 1 all stop signals must be cancelled for the
The maximum output voltage.
motor to start. The motor can then be started by
Output: means of a single start signal in group 2.
A stop command given as a group 1 command
lM results in the display indication STOP.
The current transmitted to the motor. A missing stop command given as a group 2 command
results in the display indication STAND BY.
UM
The voltage transmitted to the motor. Start-disable command:
A stop command that belongs to group 1 of the
fM
control commands - see this group.
The frequency transmitted to the motor.
Stop command:
fJOG
See Control commands.
The frequency transmitted to the motor when the jog
function is activated (via digital terminals or the keypad). Motor:

fMIN IM,N
The minimum frequency transmitted to the motor. The rated motor current (nameplate data).
fMAX fM,N
The maximum frequency transmitted to the motor. The rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
Break-away torque: UM,N
The rated motor voltage (nameplate data).

PM,N
The rated power delivered by the motor
(nameplate data).

nM,N
The rated motor speed (nameplate data).
ηVLT
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as TM,N
the ratio between the power output and the power input. The rated torque (motor).

Input: References:
Control command: preset ref.
By means of LCP and the digital inputs, it is possible A firmly defined reference which can be set
from -100% to +100% of the reference range.
Miscellaneous

to start and stop the connected motor.

Functions are divided into two groups, with There are four preset references, which can be
the following priorities: selected via the digital terminals.

analogue ref.
A signal transmitted to input 53, 54 or 60.
Can be voltage or current.

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 175

 VLT® 5000 Series

pulse ref. LCP:

A signal transmitted to the digital inputs The control panel, which makes up a complete
(terminal 17 or 29). interface for control and programming of VLT 5000
Series. The control panel is detachable and may,
binary ref. as an alternative, be installed up to 3 metres away
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port. from the frequency converter, i.e. in a front panel,
RefMIN by means of the installation kit option.
The smallest value which the reference signal VVCplus
may have. Set in parameter 204. If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio
RefMAX control, VVCplus improves the dynamics and the
The maximum value which the reference signal stability, both when the speed reference is changed
may have. Set in parameter 205. and in relation to the load torque.

Miscellaneous: Slip compensation:

Normally, the motor speed will be affected by the
ELCB: load, but this load dependence is unwanted. The
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker. frequency converter compensates for the slip by
giving the frequency a supplement that follows
lsb:
the measured effective current.
Least significant bit.
Used in serial communication. Thermistor:
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where
msb
the temperature is to be monitored (frequency
Most significant bit.
converter or motor).
Used in serial communication.
Analogue inputs:
PID:
The analogue inputs can be used for controlling
The PID regulator maintains the desired speed
various functions of the frequency converter.
(pressure, temperature, etc.) by adjusting the output
There are two types of analogue inputs:
frequency to match the varying load.
Current input, 0-20 mA
Trip: Voltage input, 0-10 V DC.
A state which occurs in different situations, e.g.
Analogue outputs:
if the frequency converter is subjected to an
There are two analogue outputs, which are able to
overtemperature. A trip can be cancelled by pressing
supply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or a digital signal.
reset or, in some cases, automatically.
Digital inputs:
Trip locked:
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
A state which occurs in different situations, e.g. if the
functions of the frequency converter.
frequency converter is subject to an overtemperature.
A locked trip can be cancelled by cutting off mains Digital outputs:
and restarting the frequency converter. There are four digital outputs, two of which activate
a relay switch. The outputs are able to supply
Initialising:
a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
If initialising is carried out, the frequency converter
returns to the factory setting. Brake resistor:
The brake resistor is a module capable of
Setup:
absorbing the brake power that is generated in
There are four Setups, in which it is possible to
regenerative braking. This regenerative braking
save parameter settings. It is possible to change
power increases the intermediate circuit voltage
between the four parameter Setups and to edit one
and a brake chopper ensures that the power is
Setup, while another Setup is active.
transmitted to the brake resistor.

176 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Pulse encoder:
An external, digital pulse transmitter used for
feeding back information on motor speed. The
encoder is used in applications where great accuracy
in speed control is required.

AWG:
Means American Wire Gauge, i.e. the American
measuring unit for cable cross-section.

Manual initialisation:
Press the [CHANGE DATA] + [MENU] + [OK] keys at
the same time to carry out manual initialisation.

60° AVM
Switching pattern called 60° A synchronous
V ector M odulation.

SFAVM
Switching pattern called S tator F lux oriented A
synchronous V ector M odulation.

Automatic motor adjustment, AMA:

Automatic motor adjustment algorithm, which
determines the electrical parameters for the
connected motor, at standstill.

On-line/off-line parameters:
On-line parameters are activated immediately after the
data value is changed. Off-line parameters are not
activated until OK has been entered on the control unit.

VT characteristics:
Variable torque characteristics, used for
pumps and fans.

CT characteristics:
Constant torque characteristics, used for all
applications, such as conveyor belts and cranes. CT
characteristics are not used for pumps and fans.

MCM:
Stands for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring
unit for cable cross-section. 1 MCM ≡ 0.5067 mm2.
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 177

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Factory Settings

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

001 Language English Yes No 0 5

002 Local/remote control Remote control Yes Yes 0 5
003 Local reference 000.000 Yes Yes -3 4
004 Active setup Setup 1 Yes No 0 5
005 Programming setup Active setup Yes No 0 5
006 Copying of setups No copying No No 0 5
007 LCP copy No copying No No 0 5
008 Display scaling of motor frequency 1 0.01 - 500.00 Yes Yes -2 6
009 Display line 2 Frequency [Hz] Yes Yes 0 5
010 Display line 1.1 Reference [%] Yes Yes 0 5
011 Display line 1.2 Motor current [A] Yes Yes 0 5
012 Display line 1.3 Power [kW] Yes Yes 0 5
013 Local control/configura LCP digital control/as Yes Yes 0 5
par.100
014 Local stop Possible Yes Yes 0 5
015 Local jog Not possible Yes Yes 0 5
016 Local reversing Not possible Yes Yes 0 5
017 Local reset of trip Possible Yes Yes 0 5
018 Lock for data change Not locked Yes Yes 0 5
019 Operating state at power-up, local Forced stop, use Yes Yes 0 5
control saved ref.
027 Warning readout Warning in line 1/2 Yes No 0 5

Changes during operation:

"Yes" means that the parameter can be changed,
while the frequency converter is in operation. "No" Conversion index Conversion factor
74 0.1
means that the frequency converter must be stopped
2 100
before a change can be made. 1 10
0 1
4-Setup: -1 0.1
"Yes" means that the parameter can be programmed -2 0.01
individually in each of the four setups, i.e. the -3 0.001
-4 0.0001
same parameter can have four different data
values. "No" means that the data value will be
Data type:
the same in all four setups. Data type shows the type and length of the telegram.
Data type Description
Conversion index: 3 Integer 16
This number refers to a conversion figure to 4 Integer 32
5 Unsigned 8
be used when writing or reading by means
6 Unsigned 16
of a frequency converter. 7 Unsigned 32
9 Text string

178 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

100 Configuration Speed control, open loop No Yes 0 5

101 Torque characteristics High - constant torque Yes Yes 0 5
102 Motor power Depends on the unit 0.18-600 kW No Yes 1 6
103 Motor voltage Depends on the unit 200 - 600 V No Yes 0 6
104 Motor frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz No Yes 0 6
105 Motor current Depends on the unit 0.01-IVLT,MAX No Yes -2 7
106 Rated motor speed Depends on the unit 100-60000 rpm No Yes 0 6
107 Automatic motor adaptation, AMA Adaptation off No No 0 5
108 Stator resistor Depends on the unit No Yes -4 7
109 Stator reactance Depends on the unit No Yes -2 7
110 Motor magnetizing, 0 rpm 100 % 0 - 300 % Yes Yes 0 6
111 Min. frequency normal 1.0 Hz 0.1 - 10.0 Hz Yes Yes -1 6
magnetizing
112
113 Load compensation at low speed 100 % 0 - 300 % Yes Yes 0 6
114 Load compensation at high speed 100 % 0 - 300 % Yes Yes 0 6
115 Slip compensation 100 % -500 - 500 % Yes Yes 0 3
116 Slip compensation time constant 0.50 s 0.05 - 1.00 s Yes Yes -2 6
117 Resonance dampening 100 % 0 - 500 % Yes Yes 0 6
118 Resonance dampening time 5 ms 5 - 50 ms Yes Yes -3 6
constant
119 High starting torque 0.0 sec. 0.0 - 0.5 s Yes Yes -1 5
120 Start delay 0.0 sec. 0.0 - 10.0 s Yes Yes -1 5
121 Start function Coasting in start delay time Yes Yes 0 5
122 Function at stop Coasting Yes Yes 0 5
123 Min. frequency for activating 0.0 Hz 0.0 - 10.0 Hz Yes Yes -1 5
function at stop
124 DC holding current 50 % 0 - 100 % Yes Yes 0 6
125 DC braking current 50 % 0 - 100 % Yes Yes 0 6
126 DC braking time 10.0 sec. 0.0 - 60.0 sec. Yes Yes -1 6
127 DC brake cut-in frequency Off 0.0-par. 202 Yes Yes -1 6
128 Motor thermal protection No protection Yes Yes 0 5
129 External motor fan No Yes Yes 0 5
130 Start frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0-10.0 Hz Yes Yes -1 5
131 Initial voltage 0.0 V 0.0-par. 103 Yes Yes -1 6
145 Minimum DC brake time 0 sec. 0 - 10 sec. Yes Yes -1 6
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 179

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

200 Output frequency Only clockwise, 0-132 Hz No Yes 0 5

range/direction
201 Output frequency low limit 0.0 Hz 0.0 - fMAX Yes Yes -1 6
202 Output frequency high limit 66 / 132 Hz fMIN - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
203 Reference/feedback area Min - max Yes Yes 0 5
204 Minimum reference 0.000 -100,000.000-RefMAX Yes Yes -3 4
205 Maximum reference 50.000 RefMIN -100,000.000 Yes Yes -3 4
206 Ramp type Linear Yes Yes 0 5
207 Ramp-up time 1 Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
208 Ramp-down time 1 Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
209 Ramp-up time 2 Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
210 Ramp-down time 2 Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
211 Jog ramp time Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
212 Quick stop ramp-down time Depends on unit 0.05 - 3600 Yes Yes -2 7
213 Jog frequency 10.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 202 Yes Yes -1 6
214 Reference function Sum Yes Yes 0 5
215 Preset reference 1 0.00 % - 100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes -2 3
216 Preset reference 2 0.00 % - 100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes -2 3
217 Preset reference 3 0.00 % - 100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes -2 3
218 Preset reference 4 0.00 % - 100.00 - 100.00 % Yes Yes -2 3
219 Catch up/slow down value 0.00 % 0.00 - 100 % Yes Yes -2 6
220
221 Torque limit for motor mode 160 % 0.0 % - xxx % Yes Yes -1 6
222 Torque limit for regenerative 160 % 0.0 % - xxx % Yes Yes -1 6
operation
223 Warning: Low current 0.0 A 0.0 - par. 224 Yes Yes -1 6
224 Warning: High current IVLT,MAX Par. 223 - IVLT,MAX Yes Yes -1 6
225 Warning: Low frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 226 Yes Yes -1 6
226 Warning: High frequency 132.0 Hz Par. 225 - par. 202 Yes Yes -1 6
227 Warning: Low feedback -4000.000 -100,000.000 - par. 228 Yes -3 4
228 Warning: High feedback 4000.000 Par. 227 - 100,000.000 Yes -3 4
229 Frequency bypass, bandwidth OFF 0 - 100 % Yes Yes 0 6
230 Frequency bypass 1 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
231 Frequency bypass 2 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
232 Frequency bypass 3 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
233 Frequency bypass 4 0.0 Hz 0.0 - par. 200 Yes Yes -1 6
234 Motor phase monitor Enable Yes Yes 0 5

180 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

300 Terminal 16, input Reset Yes Yes 0 5

301 Terminal 17, input Freeze reference Yes Yes 0 5
302 Terminal 18 Start, input Start Yes Yes 0 5
303 Terminal 19, input Reversing Yes Yes 0 5
304 Terminal 27, input Coasting stop, inverse Yes Yes 0 5
305 Terminal 29, input Jog Yes Yes 0 5
306 Terminal 32, input Choice of setup, msb/speed up Yes Yes 0 5
307 Terminal 33, input Choice of setup, lsb/speed down Yes Yes 0 5
308 Terminal 53, analogue input voltage Reference Yes Yes 0 5
309 Terminal 53, min. scaling 0.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes -1 5
310 Terminal 53, max. scaling 10.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes -1 5
311 Terminal 54, analogue input voltage No operation Yes Yes 0 5
312 Terminal 54, min. scaling 0.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes -1 5
313 Terminal 54, max. scaling 10.0 V 0.0 - 10.0 V Yes Yes -1 5
314 Terminal 60, analogue input current Reference Yes Yes 0 5
315 Terminal 60, min. scaling 0.0 mA 0.0 - 20.0 mA Yes Yes -4 5
316 Terminal 60, max. scaling 20.0 mA 0.0 - 20.0 mA Yes Yes -4 5
317 Time out 10 sec. 1 - 99 sec. Yes Yes 0 5
318 Function after time out Off Yes Yes 0 5
319 Terminal 42, output 0 - IMAX Þ 0-20 mA Yes Yes 0 5
320 Terminal 42, output, pulse scaling 5000 Hz 1 - 32000 Hz Yes Yes 0 6
321 Terminal 45, output 0 - fMAX Þ 0-20 mA Yes Yes 0 5
322 Terminal 45, output, pulse scaling 5000 Hz 1 - 32000 Hz Yes Yes 0 6
323 Relay 01, output Ready - no thermal warning Yes Yes 0 5
324 Relay 01, ON delay 0.00 sec. 0.00 - 600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
325 Relay 01, OFF delay 0.00 sec. 0.00 - 600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
326 Relay 04, output Ready - remote control Yes Yes 0 5
327 Pulse reference, max. frequency 5000 Hz Yes Yes 0 6
328 Pulse feedback, max. frequency 25000 Hz Yes Yes 0 6
329 Encoder feedback pulse/rev. 1024 pulses/rev. 1 - 4096 Yes Yes 0 6
pulses/rev.
330 Freeze reference/output function No operation Yes No 0 5
345 Encoder loss timeout 1 sec. 0 - 60 sec Yes Yes -1 6
346 Encoder loss function OFF Yes Yes 0 5
357 Terminal 42, Output minimum 0% 000 - 100% Yes Yes 0 6
scaling
358 Terminal 42, Output maximum 100% 000 - 500% Yes Yes 0 6
scaling
359 Terminal 45, Output minimum 0% 000 - 100% Yes Yes 0 6
scaling
360 Terminal 45, Output maximum 100% 000 - 500% Yes Yes 0 6
scaling
361 Encoder loss threshold 300% 000 - 600 % Yes Yes 0 6
Miscellaneous

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 181

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

400 Brake function/overvoltage control Off Yes No 0 5

401 Brake resistor, ohm Depends on the unit Yes No -1 6
402 Brake power limit, kW Depends on the unit Yes No 2 6
403 Power monitoring On Yes No 0 5
404 Brake check Off Yes No 0 5
405 Reset function Manual reset Yes Yes 0 5
406 Automatic restart time 5 sec. 0 - 10 sec. Yes Yes 0 5
407 Mains Failure No function Yes Yes 0 5
408 Quick discharge Not possible Yes Yes 0 5
409 Trip delay torque Off 0 - 60 sec. Yes Yes 0 5
410 Trip delay-inverter Depends on type of unit 0 - 35 sec. Yes Yes 0 5
411 Switching frequency Depends on type of unit 1.5 - 14 kHz Yes Yes 2 6
412 Output frequency dependent switching Not possible Yes Yes 0 5
frequency
413 Overmodulation function On Yes Yes -1 5
414 Minimum feedback 0.000 -100,000.000 Yes Yes -3 4
- FBHIGH
415 Maximum feedback 1500.000 FBLOW - Yes Yes -3 4
100,000.000
416 Process unit % Yes Yes 0 5
417 Speed PID proportional gain 0.015 0.000 - 0.150 Yes Yes -3 6
418 Speed PID integration time 8 ms 2.00 - 999.99 Yes Yes -4 7
ms
419 Speed PID differentiation time 30 ms 0.00 - 200.00 Yes Yes -4 6
ms
420 Speed PID diff. gain ratio 5.0 5.0 - 50.0 Yes Yes -1 6
421 Speed PID low-pass filter 10 ms 5 - 200 ms Yes Yes -4 6
422 U 0 voltage at 0 Hz 20.0 V 0.0 - Yes Yes -1 6
parameter
103
423 U 1 voltage parameter 103 0.0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6
424 F 1 frequency parameter 104 0.0 - Yes Yes -1 6
parameter
426
425 U 2 voltage parameter 103 0.0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6
426 F 2 frequency parameter 104 par.424- Yes Yes -1 6
par.428
427 U 3 voltage parameter 103 0.0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6
428 F 3 frequency parameter 104 par.426 Yes Yes -1 6
-par.430
429 U 4 voltage parameter 103 0.0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6

182 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

430 F 4 frequency parameter 104 par.426-par.432 Yes Yes -1 6

431 U 5 voltage parameter 103 .0 - UVLT, MAX Yes Yes -1 6
432 F 5 frequency parameter 104 par.426 - 1000 Hz Yes Yes -1 6
433 Torque proportional gain 100% 0 (Off) - 500% Yes Yes 0 6
434 Torque integral time 0.02 sec. 0.002 - 2.000 sec. Yes Yes -3 7
437 Process PID Normal/inverse control Normal Yes Yes 0 5
438 Process PID anti windup On Yes Yes 0 5
439 Process PID start frequency parameter 201 fmin - fmax Yes Yes -1 6
440 Process PID proportional gain 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 Yes Yes -2 6
441 Process PID integral time 9999.99 sec. (OFF) 0.01 - 9999.99 sec. Yes Yes -2 7
442 Process PID differentiation time 0.00 sec. (OFF) 0.00 - 10.00 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
443 Process PID diff. gain limit 5.0 5.0 - 50.0 Yes Yes -1 6
444 Process PID lowpass filter time 0.01 0.01 - 10.00 Yes Yes -2 6
445 Flying start Disable Yes Yes 0 5
446 Switching pattern SFAVM Yes Yes 0 5
447 Torque compensation 100% -100 - +100% Yes Yes 0 3
448 Gear ratio 1 0.001 - 100.000 No Yes -2 4
449 Friction loss 0% 0 - 50% No Yes -2 6
450 Mains voltage at mains fault Depends on unit Depends on unit Yes Yes 0 6
453 Speed closed loop gear ratio 1 0.01-100 No Yes 0 4
454 Dead time compensation On No No 0 5
455 Frequency range monitor Enable 0 5
457 Phase loss function Trip Yes Yes 0 5
483 Dynamic DC Link compensation On No No 0 5

Miscellaneous

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 183

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index type

500 Address 1 0 - 126 Yes No 0 6

501 Baudrate 9600 Baud Yes No 0 5
502 Coasting Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
503 Quick-stop Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
504 DC-brake Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
505 Start Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
506 Reversing Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
507 Selection of setup Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
508 Selection of speed Logic or Yes Yes 0 5
509 Bus jog 1 10.0 Hz 0.0 - parameter 202 Yes Yes -1 6
510 Bus jog 2 10.0 Hz 0.0 - parameter 202 Yes Yes -1 6
511
512 Telegram profile FC Drive No Yes 0 5
513 Bus time interval 1 sec. 1 - 99 s Yes Yes 0 5
514 Bus time interval function Off Yes Yes 0 5
515 Data read-out: Reference % No No -1 3
516 Data read-out: Reference unit No No -3 4
517 Data read-out: Feedback No No -3 4
518 Data read-out: Frequency No No -1 6
519 Data read-out: Frequency x Scaling No No -2 7
520 Data read-out: Current No No -2 7
521 Data read-out: Torque No No -1 3
522 Data read-out: Power, kW No No 1 7
523 Data read-out: Power, HP No No -2 7
524 Data read-out: Motor voltage No No -1 6
525 Data read-out: DC link voltage No No 0 6
526 Data read-out: Motor temp. No No 0 5
527 Data read-out: VLT temp. No No 0 5
528 Data read-out: Digital input No No 0 5
529 Data read-out: Terminal 53, No No -2 3
analogue input
530 Data read-out: Terminal 54, No No -2 3
analogue input
531 Data read-out: Terminal 60, No No -5 3
analogue input
532 Data read-out: Pulse reference No No -1 7
533 Data read-out: External reference % No No -1 3
534 Data read-out: Status word, binary No No 0 6
535 Data read-out: Brake power/2 min. No No 2 6
536 Data read-out: Brake power/sec. No No 2 6
537 Data read-out: Heat sink temperature No No 0 5
538 Data read-out: Alarm word, binary No No 0 7
539 Data read-out: VLT Control word, binary No No 0 6
540 Data read-out: Warning word, 1 No No 0 7
541 Data read-out: Extended Status word No No 0 7
553 Display text 1 No No 0 9
554 Display text 2 No No 0 9
557 Data read-out: Motor RPM No No 0 4
558 Data read-out: Motor RPM x scaling No No -2 4
580 Defined parameter No No 0 6
581 Defined parameter No No 0 6
582 Defined parameter No No 0 6

184 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data

# description during operation index ype

600 Operating data: Operating hours No No 74 7

601 Operating data: Hours run No No 74 7
602 Operating data: kWh counter No No 1 7
603 Operating data: Number of power-up’s No No 0 6
604 Operating data: Number of overtemperatures No No 0 6
605 Operating data: Number of overvoltages No No 0 6
606 Data log: Digital input No No 0 5
607 Data log: Bus commands No No 0 6
608 Data log: Bus Status word No No 0 6
609 Data log: Reference No No -1 3
610 Data log: Feedback No No -3 4
611 Data log: Motor frequency No No -1 3
612 Data log: Motor voltage No No -1 6
613 Data log: Motor current No No -2 3
614 Data log: DC link voltage No No 0 6
615 Fault log: Error code No No 0 5
616 Fault log: Time No No -1 7
617 Fault log: Value No No 0 3
618 Reset of kWh counter No reset Yes No 0 5
619 Reset of hours-run counter No reset Yes No 0 5
620 Operating mode Normal function Normal function No No 0 5
621 Nameplate: VLT type No No 0 9
622 Nameplate: Power section No No 0 9
623 Nameplate: VLT ordering number No No 0 9
624 Nameplate: Software version no. No No 0 9
625 Nameplate: LCP identification no. No No 0 9
626 Nameplate: Database identification no. No No -2 9
627 Nameplate: Power section identification no. No No 0 9
628 Nameplate: Application option type No No 0 9
629 Nameplate: Application option ordering no. No No 0 9
630 Nameplate: Communication option type No No 0 9
631 Nameplate: Communication option ordering no. No No 0 9

Miscellaneous

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 185

 VLT® 5000 Series

PNU Parameter Factory setting Range Changes 4-Setup Conversion Data type

# description during operation index

700 Relay 6, function Ready signal Yes Yes 0 5

701 Relay 6, ON delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
702 Relay 6, OFF delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
703 Relay 7, function Motor running Yes Yes 0 5
704 Relay 7, ON delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
705 Relay 7, OFF delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
706 Relay 8, function Mains ON Yes Yes 0 5
707 Relay 8, ON delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
708 Relay 8, OFF delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
709 Relay 9, function Fault Yes Yes 0 5
710 Relay 9, ON delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6
711 Relay 9, OFF delay 0 sec. 0.00-600 sec. Yes Yes -2 6

186 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

■ Index Control panel (LCP) ....................................................... 66

Control panel - control keys ............................................. 66
Control panel - display ................................................... 66
A Control panel - display read-outs ...................................... 67
acceleration time ......................................................... 116 Control panel - LEDs ..................................................... 66
AMA ......................................................................... 106 Cooling.................................................................. 41, 42
analog inputs .............................................................. 126 Current reference with speed feedback .............................. 75
Accuracy of display readout (parameters 009-012) .............. 14
Address ..................................................................... 152
Alarm messages .......................................................... 169 D

Index
Alarm word ................................................................. 174 data-logs ...................................................................158
Alarms....................................................................... 168 deceleration time ......................................................... 116
AMA .......................................................................... 86 direction of motor rotation ............................................... 44
Analogue input current .................................................. 128 Data change ...............................................................102
Analogue input voltage .................................................. 127 Data change lock ......................................................... 125
Application configuration ................................................ 76 Data value, step-by-step ................................................ 71
Application option ........................................................ 161 DC brake ..................................................................111
Automatic Motor Adaptation ......................................86, 106 DC braking .................................................................123
Automatic reset ........................................................... 139 DC holding .................................................................110
DC-brake ...................................................................152
Definitions ..................................................................175
B Digital speed up/down ................................................... 74
Baudrate.................................................................... 152 DIP Switches 1-4 .......................................................... 57
Brake function .............................................................. 80 Direction ....................................................................114
Brake resistor............................................................... 13 Direction of motor rotation .............................................. 44
Braking time ................................................................ 80 Display ....................................................................... 99
Bus time interval .......................................................... 153 Display - Status messages ............................................. 165
Display mode ............................................................... 67
Display mode - selection of read-outstate .......................... 68
C
cable clamps ............................................................... 58
control cables .............................................................. 58 E
Cable clamp ............................................................... 62 earthing ...................................................................... 62
Cable lengths ............................................................... 14 Electrical installation ................................................. 43, 56
Catch spinning motor, ................................................... 148 Electrical installation - 24 Volt external DC supply ................. 47
Catch up ............................................................ 118, 118 Electrical installation - brake cable .................................... 45
Catch-up/Slow-down ................................................... 124 Electrical installation - brake resistor temperature switch ........ 45
Change of group of numeric data values ............................ 71 Electrical installation - bus connection ............................... 57
Changing a text value .................................................... 70 Electrical installation - control cables ................................. 55
Changing data ............................................................. 70 Electrical installation - earthing of control cables ................... 62
Coasting .................................................................... 152 Electrical installation - EMC precautions ............................. 58
Coasting stop ............................................................. 123 Electrical installation - external fan supply ........................... 47
Communication option .................................................. 161 Electrical installation - mains supply .................................. 43
Configuration .............................................................. 103 Electrical installation - motor cables .................................. 43
Connection of motor ...................................................... 44 Electrical installation - relay outputs .................................. 47
Control card test .......................................................... 160 Electrical installation, power cables .................................. 48
Control card, 24 V DC supply .......................................... 13 Encoder connection ...................................................... 75
Control card, analogue inputs .......................................... 12 Encoder feedback ................................................. 125, 135
Control card, digital inputs:.............................................. 11 Encoder loss...............................................................135
Control card, digital/pulse and analogue outputs ................. 12 Equalising cable, ........................................................... 62
Control card, pulse/encoder input ..................................... 12 ETR ..........................................................................111
Control card, RS 485 serial communication ........................ 13 Extended mechanical brake control................................... 88
Control characteristics ................................................... 14 External 24 V DC supply ............................................ 13, 47
Control key functions ..................................................... 67

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 187

 VLT® 5000 Series

External motor fan ........................................................ 112 Latched start ..............................................................123

Externals..................................................................... 14 LCP copy .................................................................... 98
LCP identification ......................................................... 161
Literature ...................................................................... 9
F Loadsharing ................................................................ 45
Factory settings ........................................................... 178 Local and remote control ................................................ 79
Fault log .................................................................... 159 Local jog ...................................................................101
Fault log: Time ............................................................ 159 Local reversing ............................................................101
Fault log: Value............................................................ 159 Local stop ..................................................................101
Feedback ............................................................ 142, 142 Low current ................................................................119
Feedback signal .......................................................... 115 Low feedback .............................................................120
Feedback-signal. ......................................................... 127 Low frequency ............................................................120
Flying start ............................................................94, 148
Freeze output.............................................................. 124
Freeze reference .......................................................... 124 M
Freeze reference/output ................................................ 135 motor phases. .............................................................121
Frequency bypass ........................................................ 120 Mains failure ........................................................ 124, 140
Fuses ......................................................................... 34 Mains failure/quick discharge with mains failure inverse.......... 93
Mains fault .................................................................149
Mains supply ............................................................... 17
G Mains supply (L1, L2, L3): ............................................... 10
Galvanically isolated ...................................................... 57 Manual reset ...............................................................139
General technical data ................................................... 10 Mechanical brake control ................................................ 88
General warning ............................................................. 4 Mechanical dimensions .................................................. 37
Mechanical installation ................................................... 40
Menu mode ................................................................. 70
H Menu structure ............................................................. 73
Harmonic filter ............................................................. 151
Motor cables ............................................................... 58
High current................................................................ 120
Motor protection ........................................................... 45
High feedback............................................................. 120
Motor thermal protection ..........................................45, 111
High frequency ............................................................ 120
High voltage test ........................................................... 43
N
Normal/high overload torque control,open loop.................... 95
I
IT mains...................................................................... 63
Indexed parameters ...................................................... 71 O
Infinitely variable change of numericdata value ..................... 71 Operating hours, .......................................................... 158
Initialisation to factory setting ........................................... 71 Output data ................................................................. 10
Installation of mechanical brake .......................................... 4 Output frequency ......................................................... 114
Internal current regulator ................................................. 95 Outputs .....................................................................130
Introduction ................................................................... 3 Overvoltage control ...................................................... 138

J P
Jog ........................................................................... 123 proportional gain .......................................................... 143
Parallel coupling of motors .............................................. 44
Parameter selection .................................................. 70, 70
K Parameter Setup .......................................................... 69
KWh counter .............................................................. 159
Parameters - Relay option.............................................. 162
kWh counter, .............................................................. 158
PID for process control ................................................... 90
PID for speed control ..................................................... 91
PLC ........................................................................... 62
L
Potentiometer reference ................................................. 74
Language ................................................................... 97
Power up ...................................................................102
Language 001 .............................................................. 97

188 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Series

Pre-heat .................................................................... 110 Slow down ................................................................118

Preset reference, ......................................................... 123 Software version .......................................................... 161
Preset references ......................................................... 118 Speed down ...............................................................124
Process control, closed loop .......................................... 103 Speed control, closed loop ............................................ 103
Process PID ............................................................... 146 Speed control, open loop .............................................. 103
Programming of Torque limit and stop ............................... 95 Speed PID .................................................................143
Programming Setup ...................................................... 98 Speed up ...................................................................124
Pulse feedback ........................................................... 125 Start .................................................................. 123, 152
Pulse reference .................................................... 125, 134 Start anti-clockwise only ............................................... 123
Pulse start/stop ............................................................ 74 Start clockwise only...................................................... 123

Index
Stator resistance.......................................................... 107
Stop .........................................................................123
Q Switching frequency ..................................................... 141
Quick discharge ........................................................... 92 Switching pattern ......................................................... 148
Quick Setup ................................................................ 69
Quick-stop .......................................................... 123, 152
T
Telegram profile ...........................................................153
R Thermistor ..................................................................111
Ramp type ................................................................. 116 Thermistor. .................................................................127
Ramp-down time ......................................................... 116 Tightening-up torques and screw sizes ............................. 45
Ramp-up time ............................................................. 116 Time out ....................................................................128
Read out via the serial communication .............................. 155 Torque characteristics ..............................................10, 103
Reference ................................................................... 97 Torque control, open loop .............................................. 103
Reference function ....................................................... 117 Torque control, speed feedback ...................................... 103
Reference signal ......................................................... 115 Torque limit .......................................................... 118, 119
Reference. ................................................................. 127 Torque limit. ................................................................127
Reference/feedback unit ................................................ 142 Trip locked .................................................................168
References - multi-references .......................................... 83 Trouble-shooting .......................................................... 164
References - single references ......................................... 81 Two wire start/stop ........................................................ 74
Relative reference ........................................................ 127 Two-wire transmitter ...................................................... 74
Relay ................................................................. 134, 134
Relay outputs: ......................................................... 13, 13
Reset ................................................................. 123, 139 U
Resistor brake ............................................................. 138 U/f characteristic ......................................................... 144
Reversing ............................................................ 123, 153 Unintended start ............................................................. 4
RFI switch ................................................................... 63 Unit data ....................................................................161
RS 485 ....................................................................... 57 Use of emc-correct cables .............................................. 61

S V
status word ............................................................... 174 VLT 5000 Series protection: ....................................... 16, 16
Safety earthing ............................................................. 43 VLT ordering number, .................................................... 161
Safety interlock ............................................................ 125 Vlt output data (u, v, w): .................................................. 10
Safety regulations ........................................................... 4 VLT type, ...................................................................161
Selection of Setup ........................................................ 152 Voltage level ...............................................................149
Selection of Setup, ....................................................... 124
Selection of speed ....................................................... 152
serial communication ..................................................... 62 W
Setting of parameters .................................................... 76 Warning against unintended start........................................ 4
Setup ......................................................................... 98 Warning word .............................................................174
Setup change .............................................................. 74 Warnings ............................................................ 168, 169
SFAVM ...................................................................... 149 Warnings and alarms .................................................... 168
single references. .................................................. 128, 128

MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 189

 VLT® 5000 Series

6
60° AVM .................................................................... 148

190 MG.51.A9.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

 VLT® 5000 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions
www.danfoss.com/drives

VLT® 5000
MG51A902

*MG51A902*
175R0786 MG51A902 Rev. 2006-02-09